Back to GetFilings.com



Table of Contents

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

Form 10-K

 

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)

OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

 

FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED

  DECEMBER 31, 2004

COMMISSION FILE NUMBER   

  0-11113

 

PACIFIC CAPITAL BANCORP

(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)

 

California   95-3673456
(State or other jurisdiction of   (I.R.S. Employer
incorporation or organization)   Identification No.)
     
1021 Anacapa St.    
Santa Barbara, California   93101
(Address of principal executive offices)   (Zip Code)

 

(805) 564-6405

(Registrant’s telephone number, including area code)

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act: NONE

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

Title of Class

Common Stock, no par value

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes X     No     

 

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.    [    ]

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is an accelerated filer (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act).    Yes X     No     

 

The aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates computed June 30, 2004, based on the sales prices on that date of $28.13 per share: Common Stock—$ 1,185,156,451. This amount is based on reported beneficial ownership by all directors and executive officers and the registrant’s Employee Stock Ownership Plan; however, this determination does not constitute an admission of affiliate status for any of these stockholders.

 

As of February 22, 2005, there were 45,775,723 shares of the issuer’s common stock outstanding.

 

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE: Portions of registrant’s Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Shareholders on May 24, 2005 are incorporated by reference into Part III.


Table of Contents
INDEX                    Page

PART I

                    

Item 1.

       Business    3
         (a)      General Development of the Business    3
         (b)      Financial Information about Industry Segments    4
         (c)      Narrative Description of Business    4
         (d)      Financial Information about Foreign and Domestic Operations and Export Sales    5
         (e)      Available Information    5

Item 2.

       Properties    6

Item 3.

       Legal Proceedings    6

Item 4.

       Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders    6

PART II

                    

Item 5.

       Market for the Registrant’s Common Stock and Related Stockholder Matters    7
         (a)      Market Information    7
         (b)      Holders    7
         (c)      Dividends    7
         (d)      Securities Authorized for Issuance Under Equity Compensation Plans    7

Item 6.

       Selected Financial Data    8

Item 7.

       Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations    9

Item 7A.

       Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk    75

Item 8.

       Financial Statements and Supplementary Data    75

Item 9.

       Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosures    136

Item 9A.

       Controls and Procedures    136

PART III

                    

Item 10.

       Directors and Executive Officers of the Registrant    139

Item 11.

       Executive Compensation    139

Item 12.

       Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management    139

Item 13.

       Certain Relationships and Related Transactions    139

Item 14.

       Principal Account Fees and Services    139

PART IV

                    

Item 15.

       Exhibits, Financial Statements, and Reports on Form 8-K    140

SIGNATURES

                   141

EXHIBIT INDEX

                   142

CERTIFICATIONS

                   145

 

2


Table of Contents

PART I

 

ITEM 1. BUSINESS

 

(a)  General Development of the Business

 

Operations commenced as Santa Barbara National Bank (“the Bank”) in 1960. In 1979, the Bank switched from a national charter to a state charter and changed its name to Santa Barbara Bank & Trust (“SBB&T”). Santa Barbara Bancorp (“SBBancorp”) was formed as a holding company in 1982. In 1998, SBBancorp merged with Pacific Capital Bancorp (“PCB”), a bank holding company that was the parent of First National Bank of Central California (“FNB”). SBBancorp was the surviving company, but took the name Pacific Capital Bancorp to recognize the wider market area. In March 2002, the Company consolidated the two subsidiary banks, SBB&T and FNB, into one national bank charter (“the Bank Merger”), Pacific Capital Bank, N.A. (“PCBNA”). Unless otherwise stated, “Company” refers to this consolidated entity and to its subsidiary bank when the context indicates. “Bancorp” refers to the parent company only.

 

At the time of the Bank Merger, SBB&T had grown to 29 banking offices with loan, trust and escrow subsidiary offices. Through 1988, banking activities were primarily centered in the southern coastal region of Santa Barbara County. Two banking offices were added in the merger with Community Bank of Santa Ynez Valley on March 31, 1989. Five offices in northern Santa Barbara County were added with the acquisition of First Valley Bank on March 31, 1997, and three offices in the Santa Clara River Valley region of Ventura County were added with the acquisition of Citizens State Bank on September 30, 1997. From 1995 through 1998, six new banking offices were opened in western Ventura County and one in northern Santa Barbara County. The Company acquired Los Robles Bank (“LRB”) at the end of June 2000, when the Company purchased all of the outstanding shares of Los Robles Bancorp, parent of LRB. LRB was merged with SBB&T in the second quarter of 2001. LRB had three offices. Two of these became offices of SBB&T and the third was closed because of its close proximity to one of the existing offices of SBB&T.

 

At the time of the Bank Merger, FNB had 11 banking offices in Monterey, Santa Cruz, Santa Clara, and San Benito counties. The offices in Santa Clara County use the name South Valley National Bank, which was a separate subsidiary of PCB until it was consolidated with FNB shortly before PCB merged with SBBancorp. The offices in San Benito County use the name San Benito Bank (“SBB”). SBB was a separate bank prior to its merger with FNB at the end of July 2000. FNB also provided trust and investment services to its customers.

 

Subsequent to the Bank Merger, the Company opened an additional banking office in the Simi Valley area of Ventura County. Pacific Crest Capital Inc. (“PCCI”) was acquired in March 2004. Its subsidiary, Pacific Crest Bank with its deposit offices and lending activities was merged into PCBNA. The deposit offices are located in Encino and Beverly Hills in Los Angeles County, and in San Diego in San Diego County. The lending activities of the former Pacific Crest Bank are conducted in a number of western states. Primarily these loans are for income producing properties and loans to small businesses guaranteed by the Small Business Administration. PCCI was merged into the Bancorp.

 

PCBNA now has 45 banking offices from San Diego in the South to Morgan Hill in the North. The Company continues to use the brand names of Santa Barbara Bank & Trust, First National Bank of Central California, South Valley National Bank, and San Benito Bank in their respective market areas, and Pacific Capital Bank for the three former offices of Pacific Crest Bank.

 

The Company has several other subsidiaries. PCB Services Corporation was formed in 1988. This subsidiary, which was primarily involved in mortgage brokering services and the servicing of brokered loans, ceased those activities in 2001 and now has only insignificant activities. A second, Pacific Capital Services Corporation, is inactive. There are two additional subsidiaries, SBB&T Automobile Loan Securitization Corporation and SBB&T RAL Funding Corporation, that are or were used in the securitizations mentioned in Note 10 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

3


Table of Contents

(b)  Financial Information about Industry Segments

 

Information about industry segments is provided in Note 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 of this report. In addition, the following information is provided to assist the reader in understanding the Company’s business segments:

 

  (i) Geographical areas—As explained in (a) above, the Company’s deposit businesses are conducted in eight California counties. Approximately 30% of this business is conducted in a northern region consisting of the four counties of Monterey, Santa Cruz, San Benito, and Santa Clara. Approximately 65% of this business is conducted in a region consisting of the two counties of Santa Barbara and Ventura. The three banking offices in Encino, Beverly Hills and San Diego account for about 5% of the deposits. The use of the separate brand names is for community recognition only, all offices are legally branches of PCBNA, and all of these banking offices are administered under one management structure.

 

In addition to the retail and business deposits managed by the above banking offices, the Company makes use of brokered deposits and deposits received from the State of California which are administered by the Company’s Treasury department.

 

The Company’s lending businesses are organized broadly by product line, not region. There is one manager for commercial lending, another for consumer lending, and one for Wealth Management, the lending to high net worth customers.

 

Several of the Company’s businesses are conducted over a wider geographic area. The income tax refund businesses described in Management’s Discussion and Analysis in Item 7 of this report (“MD&A”) on pages 62 through 68 and which comprise a separate reportable segment in Note 26 to the Financial Statements, are conducted in all 50 states. The commercial equipment leasing business is conducted throughout the Western United States. The indirect auto lending business is conducted in several counties in California other than the counties listed above in which the Company conducts deposit activities. Neither the commercial equipment leasing nor the indirect automobile lending businesses comprise an individual segment reportable in Note 26. As described above, the lending businesses acquired with PCCI are conducted in California, Arizona, Texas, and Oregon. They are reported as a separate segment in Note 26.

 

  (ii) Foreign operations—The Company has no foreign operations of its own. The Company does lend to and provide letters of credit and other trade-related services to a number of commercial enterprises that do business abroad. None of these customer relationships generate a significant portion of the Company’s revenues.

 

  (iii) Aside from the impact of changes on interest income and interest expense from changes in prevailing market rates that may occur in 2005 and subsequent years (which primarily impact the Consumer Banking and Commercial Segments), expenses incurred in connection with the Company’s technology investments described on page 54 of the MD&A and changes in reporting relationships that could cause realignment of the reportable segments, there are no facts that, in the opinion of Management, would indicate that the three-year segment information provided in Note 26 may not be indicative of current or future operations of the segments reported.

 

(c)  Narrative Description of Business

 

Holding Company:  Bancorp is a bank holding company. As of December 31, 2004, as described above, it had one bank subsidiary. Bancorp provides support services to its subsidiary bank, PCBNA. These services include executive management, legal, accounting and treasury, and investor relations.

 

Bank Products and Services:  PCBNA offers a full range of commercial banking services to households, professionals, and small- to medium-sized businesses. These include various

 

4


Table of Contents

commercial, real estate and consumer loan, leasing and deposit products. PCBNA offers other services such as electronic fund transfers and safe deposit boxes to both individuals and businesses. In addition, services such as lockbox payment servicing, foreign currency exchange, letters of credit, and cash management are offered to business customers. PCBNA also offers trust and investment services to individuals and businesses. These include acting as trustee or agent for living and testamentary trusts, charitable remainder trusts, employee benefit trusts, and profit sharing plans, as well as executor or probate agent for estates. Investment management and advisory services are also provided.

 

PCBNA also offers products related to income tax returns filed electronically. The Company is one of three financial institutions, which together provide over 90% of these products on a national basis. The Company provides these products to taxpayers who file their returns electronically. For both products, the taxpayer instructs the Internal Revenue Service to remit his/her refund to the Company. In the case of a Refund Anticipation Loan (RAL), the Company will have lent the taxpayer some portion of the amount of his/her refund and will apply the refund when received from the IRS to repayment of the loan. In the case of a Refund Transfer (RT), the Company will forward the refund to the taxpayer once it has been received from the IRS. As a loan product, there is credit risk associated with a RAL. There is no credit risk associated with an RT. Because they are associated with income tax returns, there is a high degree of seasonality to the income from these programs. These programs are more fully described in the MD&A on pages 62 through 68.

 

Additional information about the products by the various business segments of PCBNA is provided in Note 26 of the Financial Statements in Item 8 of this form.

 

Customer concentration:  There are no customers individually accounting for 10% or more of consolidated revenues.

 

Competition:  For most of its banking products, the Company faces competition in its market area from branches of most of the major California money center banks, some of the statewide savings and loan associations, and other local community banks, savings and loans, and credit unions. For some of its products, the Company faces competition from other non-bank financial service companies, especially securities firms and asset or investment managers. Some of these competitors emphasize price and others technology. The Company strives to compete primarily on the basis of customer service.

 

Employees:  The Company currently employs the equivalent of 1,369 full time employees. Additional employees would be added if new opportunities for geographic expansion or other business activities should occur.

 

(d)  Financial Information about Foreign and Domestic Operations and Export Sales

 

The Company does not have any foreign business operations or export sales of its own. However, it does provide financial services including wire transfers, foreign currency exchange, letters of credit, and loans to other businesses involved in foreign trade.

 

(e)   Available Information

 

The Company maintains an Internet website at http://www.pcbancorp.com. The Company makes available its annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K and amendments to such reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities and Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and other information related to the Company, free of charge, through this site as soon as reasonably practicable after it electronically files those documents with, or otherwise furnishes them to, the SEC. The Company’s Internet website and the information contained therein or connected thereto are not intended to be incorporated into this annual report on Form 10-K.

 

5


Table of Contents
ITEM 2. PROPERTIES

 

The Company maintains its executive offices in leased premises at 1021 Anacapa St., Santa Barbara, California. The Trust & Investment Services Division is also located in this building. The Company leases other premises in the Santa Barbara area for Information Technology, Operations Support and other administrative functions and other premises in Ventura County for its Delinquency Management Unit and for the relationship managers in that county. Of the 45 branch banking offices, all or a portion of 31 are leased. The 45 branch offices are located in the eight California counties mentioned above in Item 1(a). The Company owns the building used by its Residential Real Estate, Business Services, and International Banking units.

 

The Company has obtained the master lease on the shopping center where one of its branch offices is located. As explained in Note 12 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 of this Annual Report, the portion of the lease related to the building is classified as a capital lease.

 

Premises are utilized based on needed space and the geography of the customer served. There is no necessary correspondence between use of the buildings and business segments. For example, in addition to employees providing deposit related services, portions of the branch offices frequently house Consumer and Commercial Banking segment employees involved in lending activities. Similarly, of the Residential Real Estate, Business Services, and International Banking units housed in the building mentioned above, the first is in the Consumer Banking segment and the second two are in the Commercial Banking segment. Rather than attempt an allocation of ownership of these assets, for segment reporting in Note 26, all buildings are recognized as assets of the “All Other” segment, but rental expenses are generally charged to the business segments when allocation is practicable.

 

The buildings are of various ages and consequently require varying levels of maintenance. All are suitable and adequate for their intended use.

 

ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

 

The Company has been named in several lawsuits filed by customers and others. The significant suits are described in Note 17 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 of this report. The Company does not expect that these suits will have any material impact on its financial condition or operating results.

 

The Company is involved in various other litigation of a routine nature that is being handled and defended in the ordinary course of the Company’s business. In the opinion of Management, based in part on consultation with legal counsel, the resolution of these litigation matters will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial condition or operating results.

 

ITEM 4. SUBMISSION OF MATTERS TO A VOTE OF SECURITY HOLDERS

 

There were no matters submitted to a vote of security holders during the fourth quarter of the fiscal year covered by this report.

 

6


Table of Contents

PART II

 

ITEM 5. MARKET FOR THE REGISTRANTS COMMON STOCK AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

 

(a)  Market Information

 

The Company’s common stock trades on The Nasdaq Stock Market under the symbol “PCBC”. The following table presents the high and low closing sales prices of the Company’s common stock for each quarterly period for the last two years as reported by The Nasdaq Stock Market:

 

      

2004 Quarters

    

2003 Quarters

     4th    3rd    2nd    1st    4th    3rd    2nd    1st

Range of stock prices:

                                                       

High

   $ 34.54    $ 30.18    $ 30.41    $ 30.19    $ 28.88    $ 27.00    $ 27.41    $ 23.14

Low

   $ 29.34    $ 26.30    $ 25.87    $ 26.75    $ 22.71    $ 22.61    $ 22.21    $ 18.86

 

(b)  Holders

 

There were approximately 9,400 shareholders as of December 31, 2004. This number includes an estimate of the number of shareholders whose shares are held in the name of brokerage firms or other financial institutions. The Company is not provided with the number or identities of these shareholders, but has estimated the number of such shareholders from the number of shareholder documents requested by these firms for distribution to their customers.

 

Based on filings with the SEC by institutional investors, approximately 28% of the Company’s shares are owned by these institutions. These institutions may be investing for their own accounts or acting as investment managers for other investors.

 

(c)  Dividends

 

The Company declares dividends four times a year. The Company declares cash dividends to its shareholders each quarter. Its policy is to declare and pay dividends of between 35% and 40% of its net income to shareholders. The following table presents cash dividends declared per share for the last two years:

 

      

2004 Quarters

    

2003 Quarters

     4th    3rd    2nd    1st    4th    3rd    2nd    1st

Cash dividends declared

   $ 0.18    $ 0.18    $ 0.17    $ 0.17    $ 0.16    $ 0.16    $ 0.15    $ 0.14

 

The above per share figures are adjusted for the 4 for 3 stock split that was distributed in June 2004. The pre-split amounts for the first two quarters of 2004 were $0.22 per share. Adjusted for the split, the quarterly figures were $0.165. These amounts have been rounded to $0.17 per share for presentation.

 

The Company funds the dividends paid to shareholders primarily from dividends received from the subsidiary bank, PCBNA.

 

(d )  Securities Authorized for Issuance Under Equity Compensation Plans

 

The required table for this section of Item 5 is included in Note 18 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8 of this report and is hereby incorporated by reference.

 

7


Table of Contents
ITEM  6. SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA

 

The following table compares selected financial data for 2004 with the same data for the four prior years. The Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements and the accompanying notes presented in Item 8 explain reasons for the year-to-year changes. The following data has been derived from the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company and should be read in conjunction with those statements, which are included in this report.

 

(amounts in thousands
except per share amounts)
  2004    

Increase

(Decrease)

    2003     2002     2001     2000  

RESULTS OF OPERATIONS:

                                               

Interest income

  $ 326,181     $ 53,992     $ 272,189     $ 266,746     $ 291,108     $ 289,964  

Interest expense

    69,211       15,278       53,933       62,799       97,226       110,526  

Net interest income

    256,970       38,714       218,256       203,947       193,882       179,438  

Provision for credit losses

    12,809       (5,477 )     18,286       19,727       26,671       14,440  

Other operating income

    75,635       (4,646 )     80,281       73,784       65,726       50,340  

Non-interest expense:

                                               

Staff expense

    94,697       10,795       83,902       74,420       69,788       67,204  

Other operating expense

    85,209       6,873       78,336       68,868       73,362       64,753  

Income before income taxes

    139,890       21,877       118,013       114,716       89,787       83,381  

Provision for income taxes

    51,946       9,604       42,342       39,865       33,676       31,925  

Net Income

  $ 87,944     $ 12,273     $ 75,671     $ 74,851     $ 56,111     $ 51,456  

DILUTED PER SHARE DATA:

                                               

Average shares outstanding

    45,911       (172 )     46,083       46,653       47,359       47,305  

Net Income

  $ 1.92     $ 0.28     $ 1.64     $ 1.60     $ 1.18     $ 1.09  

Cash dividends declared

  $ 0.69     $ 0.09     $ 0.60     $ 0.53     $ 0.38     $ 0.47  

Cash dividends paid

  $ 0.69     $ 0.09     $ 0.60     $ 0.53     $ 0.50     $ 0.47  

FINANCIAL CONDITION:

                                               

Total loans

  $ 4,062,294     $ 881,415     $ 3,180,879     $ 3,019,820     $ 2,799,092     $ 2,517,104  

Total assets

    6,024,785       1,165,155       4,859,630       4,219,213       3,960,929       3,677,625  

Total deposits

    4,512,290       657,573       3,854,717       3,516,077       3,365,575       3,102,819  

Long-term debt***

    817,364       326,264       491,100       252,000       175,000       103,000  

Total shareholders’ equity

    459,682       60,634       399,048       371,075       325,876       296,261  

OPERATING AND CAPITAL RATIOS:

                                               

Average total shareholders’

                                               

equity to average total assets

    7.59 %     -0.79 %     8.38 %     8.40 %     8.33 %     7.77 %

Rate of return on average:

                                               

Total assets

    1.54 %     -0.09 %     1.63 %     1.80 %     1.45 %     1.40 %

Total shareholders’ equity

    20.30 %     0.86 %     19.44 %     21.46 %     17.46 %     18.06 %

Tier 1 leverage ratio

    6.33 %     -1.13 %     7.46 %     7.94 %     7.70 %     7.16 %

Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio

    8.18 %     -1.88 %     10.06 %     9.77 %     9.78 %     9.21 %

Total risk-based capital ratio

    12.10 %     -1.23 %     13.33 %     12.10 %     12.23 %     10.46 %

Dividend payout ratio

    35.9 %     -0.6 %     36.5 %     32.7 %     32.1 %     40.6 %

 

*Prior to 2001, the Company followed a practice of declaring dividends in one quarter and paying them in the next. In 2001, the Company switched to a practice of declaring dividends in the same quarter in which they were paid. Consequently, no dividend was declared in the first quarter of 2001, but the dividend that had been declared in the fourth quarter of 2000 was paid in the first quarter of 2001.

 

**The above results of operations and balances for 2000 have been restated to reflect the Company’s business combination with San Benito Bank in that year that was accounted for as a pooling of interest transaction.

 

***Includes obligations under capital lease.

 

8


Table of Contents

ITEM 7.    MANAGEMENTS DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

Pacific Capital Bancorp

and Subsidiaries

 

INTRODUCTION

 

Purpose and Definition of Terms

 

The following provides Management’s comments on the financial condition and results of operations of Pacific Capital Bancorp and its subsidiaries. Unless otherwise stated, “we” or “the Company” refers to this consolidated entity. You should read this discussion in conjunction with the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements and the notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements. These statements and notes are presented on pages 79 through 135 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K. “Bancorp” will be used when referring to the parent company only. Terms with which you may not be familiar are printed in bold and defined the first time they occur or are defined in a note on pages 68 through 73. These notes are designated by a letter. References to notes designated by a number refer to notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements that are found on pages 84 through 135 of this document. The impact of recent accounting pronouncements is disclosed in Note 1.

 

Subsidiaries

 

The Company has one subsidiary bank, Pacific Capital Bank, N.A. (“PCBNA”). This bank is the survivor of a merger of the Company’s two former banking subsidiaries, Santa Barbara Bank & Trust (“SBB&T”) and First National Bank of Central California (“FNB”). The Company merged the two banks on March 29, 2002 to obtain the efficiencies of a single primary bank regulator. Prior to the merger, SBB&T was regulated by the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco (“FRBSF”) and the California Department of Financial Institutions while FNB was regulated by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (“OCC”). PCBNA continues to use the SBB&T and FNB brands as well as two additional brands, South Valley National Bank (“SVNB”) and San Benito Bank (“SBB”). These had been independent banks that had merged with FNB before FNB and SBB&T merged. The brand Pacific Capital Bank is used for the three banking offices acquired from Pacific Crest Bank when the Company purchased its parent company Pacific Crest Capital Inc. (“PCCI”) in March 2005. PCB Services Corporation is a non-bank subsidiary of Bancorp which was primarily involved in mortgage brokering and the servicing of brokered loans. It ceased this business and became essentially inactive in 2001. The Company pays a small number of out-of-state employees through this company. The Company has a second inactive subsidiary, Pacific Capital Services Corporation. The Company has two subsidiaries that are special purpose entities which are used in the securitizations mentioned in Note 10. One of these, SBB&T Automobile Loan Securitization Corporation, is now inactive, as the securitization it was used for has been closed. The three subsidiaries used for the trust preferred securities described in Note 13 are not consolidated with the Company and the rest of its subsidiaries. The reason they are not consolidated is explained in the “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities” section of Note 1.

 

Forward-Looking Statements

 

This discussion and analysis provides insight into Management’s assessment of the operating trends over the last several years and its expectations for 2005. Such expressions of expectations are not historical in nature and are “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Forward-looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that may cause actual future results to differ materially from those expressed in any forward-looking statement. Such risks and uncertainties with respect to the Company include:

 

·   increased competitive pressure among financial services companies;
·   changes in the interest rate environment reducing interest margins or increasing interest rate risk;
·   deterioration in general economic conditions, internationally, nationally or in the State of California;

 

9


Table of Contents
·   the occurrence of events such as the terrorist acts of September 11, 2001;
·   economic or other disruptions caused by military actions in Iraq or other areas;
·   the availability of sources of liquidity at a reasonable cost;
·   difficulties in opening additional branches, integrating acquisitions, or introducing new products and services;
·   reduced demand for, or earnings derived from, the Company’s income tax refund loan and refund transfer programs; and
·   legislative or regulatory changes adversely affecting the businesses in which the Company engages.

 

This discussion also provides information on the strategies adopted by the Company to address these risks, and the results of these strategies.

 

Pooling-of-Interest Restatements

 

We accounted for the merger of SBB with the Company using the “pooling-of-interests” method of accounting. As a result, we restated all amounts in this discussion and in the Consolidated Financial Statements to reflect the results of operations as if this merger had occurred prior to the earliest period presented. In contrast, the acquisition of PCCI was accounted for as a purchase transaction, and its results of operations are included with those of the Company only from the date of acquisition, which was March 5, 2004.

 

GAAP AND NON-GAAP MEASURES

 

In various sections of this discussion and analysis, we have called attention to the significant impacts on the Company’s balance sheet and year to date income statement caused by its tax refund anticipation loans (“RAL”) and refund transfer (“RT”) programs. These programs account for approximately 30% of the Company’s pretax income. We have discussed the results of operations and actions taken by the Company to manage these programs in the section below titled “Refund Anticipation Loan and Refund Transfer Programs.” Included in the discussion is a summary statement of the results of operations for the programs. These programs comprise one of the Company’s operating segments for purposes of segment reporting in Note 26, “Segment Disclosure,” to the Consolidated Financial Statements. As such, Management believes that separately reporting operating results for the programs is consistent with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States (“GAAP”).

 

Because there are only two other financial institutions with nationwide refund programs of similar size to those of the Company, Management computes a number of amounts and ratios exclusive of the balances and operating results of these programs. We do this so that we may compare the results of the Company’s traditional banking operations with the results of other financial institutions. For the last several years, we have conducted conference calls with analysts and investors in connection with our quarterly earnings releases. During these calls, investors and analysts have expressed through their questions an interest in knowing certain balances and the usual performance ratios for the Company exclusive of the RAL and RT programs. We believe analysts and investors request this information for the same reason that Management uses it internally, namely, to provide more comparability with virtually all of the rest of the Company’s peers that do not operate such programs. For example, Management compares the Company’s net interest margin without RAL interest income or expense to the net interest margin of other banks to determine the efficiency with which it prices loans and deposits. Consequently, we have provided these amounts and ratios both with and without the balances and results of the RAL and RT programs in our press releases and in our periodic quarterly and annual reports on Forms 10-Q and 10-K, respectively. All such amounts and ratios that exclude the balances and results of the RAL and RT programs are clearly labeled as “without” or “excluding RAL/RT.”

 

While we provide these amounts and ratios both with and without the balances and results of the RAL and RT programs, we would stress that both shareholders and potential investors should pay attention primarily to the GAAP results that include the operating results of the RAL and RT programs.

 

10


Table of Contents

In the section of this discussion that explains the RAL and RT programs, “Tax Refund Anticipation Loan and Refund Transfer Programs” that begins on page 62, we include several tables that reconcile all numbers and ratios reported in this discussion exclusive of the RAL/RT balances or results to the same numbers and ratios for the Company as a whole reported in the Consolidated Financial Statements. The reconciliations for amounts and ratios related to credit quality are included in Table 9B on page 45. The tables provide the consolidated numbers or ratios, the RAL/RT adjustment, and the numbers or ratios exclusive of the RAL/RT adjustment.

 

In addition to the non-GAAP measures computed related to the Company’s balances and results exclusive of its RAL and RT programs, we have included other financial information determined by methods other than in accordance with GAAP. We use these non-GAAP measures in our analysis of the business and its performance. In particular, net interest income, net interest margin and operating efficiency are calculated on a fully tax-equivalent basis (“FTE”).

 

The use of FTE measurement is a common practice in banking and Management finds that calculating these measures on an FTE basis provides a useful picture of net interest income, net interest margin and operating efficiency for comparative purposes. The efficiency ratio also uses net interest income on an FTE basis. The calculation of net interest income on this basis is explained in Note B. Table 2 contains a reconciliation of the amounts and ratios with and without the FTE adjustment. Net interest income as reported on the Company’s Consolidated Income Statement in Item 8 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K is not reported on an FTE basis.

 

OVERVIEW OF EARNINGS PERFORMANCE

 

In 2004, the Company earned net income of $87.9 million, or $1.92 per diluted share. This represents a 16% increase over the $75.7 million net income or $1.64 per diluted share reported for 2003.

 

The significant factors impacting net income for 2004 compared to 2003 were:

 

·   the Federal Open Market Committee (“FOMC”) of the Federal Reserve Board (“FRB”) raised its target Federal funds rate five times during 2004;
·   we saw an increase of approximately 10% in transaction volumes in our income tax refund loan and transfer programs; interest income on the loans and fees on the transfers increased accordingly;
·   the purchase of PCCI added new loans and deposits to increase net interest income;
·   loan balances increased approximately $462 million exclusive of the loans purchased with PCCI;
·   we introduced a “no-fee” checking product in late 2003 that continued to grow in 2004, providing relatively low cost funds;
·   we received significant payments on loans that had been charged-off in prior years permitting a very low provision expense for credit losses;
·   we had losses of $2.0 million in 2004 in the securities portfolio compared to gains of $2.0 million in 2003 as we sold low-yielding securities in 2004 at a loss to reposition the proceeds in higher yielding securities; and
·   noninterest expenses increased primarily due to the new staff added from the PCCI purchase and consulting expense for implementing the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

 

Each of these items will be addressed in more detail in various sections of this discussion.

 

2003 earnings had increased just slightly over 2002 earnings. The major differences between 2003 and 2002 were as follows:

 

·   growth in the loan and securities portfolios were able to generate an increase in interest income, while the lowering by the FOMC of its target rate in late 2002 and again in 2003 allowed lower interest expense on its deposit and other liabilities;
·   the Company’s provision for credit loss for loans other than RALs was lower by almost $8 million;
·   noninterest revenues decreased by approximately $8 million including an increase of $1.3 million in gains on securities sales while operating expense increased by $19.0 million;

 

11


Table of Contents
·   the Company did not have the advantage of certain beneficial income tax adjustments that were recorded in 2002.

 

From a longer range perspective, for the five years of 2000 through 2004, the Company’s net income increased at a compound average annual rate of 13.6%. Among the reasons for this favorable trend of increase in net income have been:

 

·   the integration of eight new branch offices through acquisitions (Note A);
·   growth in the tax refund anticipation loan (“RAL”) and refund transfer (“RT”) programs;
·   strong loan demand—compound annual growth of 12% exclusive of acquisitions;
·   continued growth in service charges and fee income; and
·   cost savings related to its mergers.

 

Measures and ratios of profitability, specifically return on assets, return on equity, the operating efficiency ratio and net interest margin with and without the RAL and RT program, may be found in Table 16G.

 

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

A number of critical accounting policies are used in the preparation of the Consolidated Financial Statements which this discussion accompanies.

 

The Use of Estimates

 

The preparation of Consolidated Financial Statements in accordance with GAAP requires Management to make certain estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts of reported assets and liabilities as well as contingent assets and liabilities as of the date of these financial statements. These estimates and assumptions also affect the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period(s). Although Management believes these estimates and assumptions to be reasonably accurate, actual results may differ.

 

The principal areas in which estimates are used are as follows:

 

Collectibility of Loans and the Allowance for Credit Losses:  With respect to delinquent loans, we are required to estimate whether the principal and interest due on the loans will be collected. If a loan is deemed uncollectible, it must be charged-off. If we estimate that a loan will be collected but it is later determined that it will not be collected, then the Company’s loan assets will have been overstated because only collectible amounts are to be reported. If we estimate that a loan is not collectible and therefore charge it off, but subsequently payments are received, then the loan balances were understated and provision expense was overstated.

 

With respect to loans that are not deemed to be wholly uncollectible, an estimate of the amount of the probable losses incurred in the Company’s loan portfolio must still be made. This estimate is used to determine the amount of the allowance for credit losses and therefore the periodic charge to income for the provision for credit losses expense. A description of the method of developing the estimate is described in the section below titled “Allowance for Credit Losses” and in Note 1. If the actual losses incurred in future periods materially exceed the estimate of probable losses developed by Management, then the Allowance for Credit Losses will have been understated and the Company will have to record additional provision expense as the actual amount of losses are recognized. If the losses currently in the portfolio are materially less than the estimate, then the Company will reverse the excess allowance through provision expense in future periods.

 

Events or circumstances that can cause this estimate of losses to be substantially different than eventually occur are primarily a lack of sufficient information about borrowers’ financial condition or as such financial condition may change over time. This occurs because the borrower does not provide the information on a timely basis or because it is incomplete or inaccurate.

 

As discussed in the section below titled “Credit Losses,” the Company experienced such a change in estimate in 2004. In earlier years, we had estimated that certain loans were uncollectible and that

 

12


Table of Contents

we would be paid less than the outstanding amount for certain other loans. Consequently we had charged-off the first group of loans and allocated allowance for credit loss to the second group equal to our estimate of what we would not be paid. In 2004, a significant amount of payments were received on some of these loans. These collections or recoveries were added back to the allowance for credit loss. This resulted in a lower provision expense than would have otherwise been the case because this added allowance was then available to cover estimated losses on other loans. In essence, a portion of the allowance was provided by the recoveries rather than by provision expense.

 

Realizing the benefit of Deferred Tax Assets:  The Company’s deferred tax assets are explained in the section below titled “Income Tax” and in Note 15. The Company uses an estimate of future earnings to support its position that the benefit of its deferred tax assets will be realized. If future income should prove non-existent or not sufficient to recover the amount of the deferred tax assets within the tax years to which they may be applied, the assets will not be realized and the Company’s net income will be reduced.

 

Actuarial estimates used in Retiree Health Plan:  The Company uses certain estimates regarding its employees to determine its liability for Post Retirement Health Benefits. These estimates include life expectancy, length of time before retirement, long-term rate of return on assets, and future rates of growth of medical costs. Should these estimates prove materially wrong such that the liability is understated, the Company will either incur more expense to provide the benefits or it will need to amend the plan to limit benefits.

 

Prepayment and other estimates used in securitization:  The Company used certain estimates in determining the residual value of the securitization of indirect auto loans described in Note 10. The assumptions and estimates used for the discount, prepayment, and default rates are shown in that note. As explained in Note 10, the securitization ended in 2004. Had the estimates for prepayment and default rates been too low by a material amount, the Company would have had to write down through earnings the residual value and a loss would have to be recognized. Had the estimates for the prepayment and default rates been too high by a material amount, the Company would have had to write up the residual value and a gain would be recognized. As it happened, the estimates were very close and no significant adjustment was required.

 

Prepayment assumptions used in determining the amortization of premium and discount for securities:  Mortgage-backed or asset-backed securities make up 66% of the Company’s investment securities. These securities are subject to the prepayment of principal of the underlying loans as described in Note 10. The rate at which prepayments are expected to occur in future periods impacts the amount of premium to be amortized in the current period. This is because holders of securities are required to recognize an amortization amount each period that would result in the same effective interest rate for the security if prepayments in fact occur as estimated. If prepayments in a future period are higher than estimated, then the Company must amortize a larger amount of premium in that future period. In that way, the total premium amortized to date as of the end of that future period will equal the amount that would have been amortized had the higher prepayment rate been experienced during all past periods over which the security was held. If future prepayments are less than estimated, then less premium will be amortized in the future period to similarly result in an amount of premium amortization life-to-date as if the lower rate of prepayments had been experienced from the purchase of the security. The result then of an over or under estimate is to introduce volatility to interest income.

 

13


Table of Contents

Estimates of the fair value of assets:  Certain assets of the Company are recorded at fair value, or the lower of cost or fair value. In some cases, the fair value used is an estimate. Included among these assets are securities that are classified as available-for-sale, goodwill and other intangible assets, and other real estate owned and impaired loans. These estimates may change from period to period as they are impacted by changes in interest rates and other market conditions. Losses not anticipated or greater than anticipated could result if the Company were forced to sell one of these assets and discovered that its estimate of fair value had been too high. Gains not anticipated or greater than anticipated could result if the Company were to sell one of these assets and discovered that its estimate of fair value had been too low. Estimates of fair value are arrived at as follows:

 

Assumptions regarding mortgage and other servicing rights:  For the Company, mortgage and other servicing rights (“MSRs”) arise only from the sale of loans as described below on page 41. However, there is a secondary market for MSRs wherein a financial institution may purchase the right to service loans for and receive a fee from the holder of the loans. The market value for such servicing is based on the coupon rates, maturity, and prepayment rates experienced for the loans being serviced. The value of the servicing rights recorded by the Company at the time of the sale is based on Management’s best estimate of the market value of servicing rights for similar pools of loans in the secondary market. If the Company overestimates the value of the MSRs, it will recognize too large a gain at the time of sale and will hold an asset against which a charge will later have to be taken. If the Company underestimates the value of the MSRs, it will have recognized too small a gain and will later recognize income from the servicing that should have been recognized in the period in which the loans were sold.

 

Available-for-sale securities:  The fair values of most securities classified as available-for-sale are based on quoted market prices. These quoted market prices are derived from two independent sources and compared for consistency. If the two sources differ significantly, or if quoted market prices are not available, alternative methods are used including seeking bids from brokers on a representative security or extrapolating the value from the quoted prices of similar instruments. The Company also uses estimates of the future rate of prepayments on the loans underlying the various mortgage-backed securities to determine the expected life of that security. That estimated life then determines the rate of amortization or accretion to recognize against the premium or discount of those instruments.

 

Goodwill and other intangible assets:  As discussed in Note 9, the Company must assess goodwill and other intangible assets each year for impairment. This assessment involves estimating cash flows for future periods, preparing analyses of market multiples for similar operations, and estimating the fair value of the reporting unit to which the goodwill is allocated. If the future cash flows were materially less than the estimates, the Company would be required to take a charge against earnings to write down the asset to the lower fair value.

 

Other real estate owned and impaired loans:  The fair value of other real estate owned or collateral supporting impaired loans is generally determined from appraisals obtained from independent appraisers. The Company also must estimate the costs to dispose of the property. This is generally done based on experience with similar properties. When determining the valuation allowance for impaired loans, the Company may use the discounted cash flow method which may include estimates of borrower revenue, expenses, capital expenditures and disposals of capital assets, along with estimates of future economic conditions including forecasts of interest rates and other economic factors that management believes would impact estimated future customer cash flows.

 

Estimates relating to Self-Insurance for Workers’ Compensation:  The Company self-insures for a portion of its workers’ compensation exposure. Because not all injuries are immediately reported to the Company, it must accrue an estimate of the claims loss for injuries that have occurred but not been reported and for the estimated eventual cost of reported claims. The estimate is based on actuarial data provided by the insurance company that covers the Company for large claims above the Company’s self-insured amount. If Management underestimates the cost of claims, they will need to recognize an expense for these claims in subsequent periods. If the estimate is too large, the Company will report a reduction in expense in subsequent years for the excess.

 

14


Table of Contents

Alternative Methods of Accounting

 

The accounting and reporting policies of the Company are in accordance with GAAP and conform to practices within the banking industry. As such there are few alternatives available to the Company in its accounting. The few areas where choices are available are as follows:

 

Depreciation of fixed assets:  The Company selects lives of assets over which to depreciate or amortize the cost based on the expected period it will benefit the Company. The Company’s methods of depreciation and the lives of fixed assets are described in Note 1. If a method is used or a life is chosen that results in a material amount of the cost not having been amortized when the asset provides no further benefit to the Company, then a loss will be incurred for the unamortized cost of the asset when it is disposed of or replaced.

 

Amortization of the cost of other assets:  The Company’s methods of amortizing assets other than fixed assets are described in various notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements as appropriate. As with fixed assets, if the method of amortization or the amortization term results in unamortized cost when the asset has no further value, a loss will be recognized.

 

Stock options:  When the Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation (SFAS 123) in 1996, it elected to continue to use the method of accounting for stock options that did not recognize compensation expense at the time options were granted. As required by SFAS 123, pro forma amounts of compensation expense and the pro forma impact on net income and earnings per share are disclosed each year as if the Company had instead elected to use the accounting method that recognizes compensation expense. The pro forma compensation expense is computed using the binomial model for pricing options. This model—as well as other statistical models—assumes that the options are freely tradable. In fact, employees may not transfer the options. For the year 2004, had the Company elected the second method of accounting for its stock options, the impact would be to lower net income by $2.25 million and earnings per share by approximately 2.6%.

 

EXTERNAL FACTORS IMPACTING THE COMPANY

 

The major external factors impacting the Company include economic conditions, regulatory considerations, and trends in the banking and financial services industries.

 

Economic Conditions

 

From a national perspective, the most significant economic factors impacting the Company in the last three years have been a slow growth in the economy during 2002 and 2003 and the actions of the FOMC to increase the pace of that growth followed by faster growth in 2004 accompanied by FOMC increases in short-term interest rates to limit potential inflationary impacts from that growth. The FOMC had lowered its target short-term rate once in 2002 by 0.50% and in 2003 by 0.25% to its lowest rate in 45 years. These changes, especially after the extreme rate of decline in 2001 when the Fed lowered rates by 4.25%, impacted the Company as market rates for loans, investments and deposits responded to the Fed’s actions. These impacts are discussed in detail in the sections below titled “The Impact of Changes in Asset and Liability Balances to Net Interest Income and Net Interest Margin” and “Interest Rate Risk.” In 2004, the FOMC raised short-term interest rates by 1.25%. These increases did not have a significant impact on the Company in 2004 for reasons discussed in those same sections.

 

Selected customers in the hospitality and tourist industries continued to be impacted in 2002 and 2003 by the consequences of the events of September 11, 2001. Agriculture faced price pressures during 2002, but there was price firming in the row crops segment during 2003 and 2004. The wine industry remains unsettled with inventory high and new vines coming into production. The high tech segment continued to show uncertain and varying results. Housing markets have showed some slowdown in sales and refinancings in 2004, but generally prices continue to increase with the high-end residential properties showing some volatility. During 2003, loan demand for commercial real estate markets slowed compared to 2002, but picked up again in 2004. Vacancy rates in the Company’s core market areas remained in the 5%-6% percent range. Loan demand from small

 

15


Table of Contents

businesses continued to grow at a moderate rate, except for leasing, for which outstanding balances grew 55% in 2004. Consumer loan demand aside from residential real estate also picked up in 2004.

 

Regulatory Considerations

 

Bank Regulation:  Changes in regulations and/or the regulatory environment impact the Company. The OCC is the primary regulator for PCBNA because it is a nationally chartered bank. The FRBSF is the regulator for the Bancorp because it is a bank holding company.

 

Regulation impacts the Company in several ways:

 

·   the FRB may change the amount of cash that Banks must hold with it to manage the money supply;
·   the OCC may impose restrictions on the type and features of products or services offered to customers;
·   it is necessary to obtain approval for business combinations from regulatory agencies;
·   the regulatory agencies conduct periodic examinations;
·   there are legal and regulatory restrictions on the amount of dividends that its subsidiary bank can pay to its parent;
·   the Company must ensure it is in compliance with fair lending, anti-money laundering, bank secrecy, and community reinvestment legislation; and
·   regulation sets minimum capital requirements.

 

The actions which the various banking agencies can take with respect to financial institutions which fail to maintain adequate capital and comply with the other requirements are discussed below in the section titled “Regulation.”

 

Non-banking regulation:  As a public company, the Company is also subject to many laws and regulations related to securities issuance. Especially important in 2003 and 2004 is the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. Passed in response to corporate accounting and reporting failures, the act requires all large public companies as of December 31, 2004 to document their internal controls over financial reporting, evaluate the design and effectiveness of those controls, periodically test all significant controls to ensure they are functioning, and provide a certification by the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of the documentation, evaluation, and testing. The act further requires companies’ independent registered public accounting firm to evaluate this assertion.

 

The required certification is included in this Annual Report on Form 10-K on page 144 and the conclusion of the Company’s independent registered public accounting firm regarding this assertion is included in its opinion on page 76.

 

Competition

 

The Company faces competition from other financial institutions and from businesses in other industries that have developed financial products. Banks once had an almost exclusive franchise for deposit products and provided the majority of business financing. With deregulation in the 1980’s, other kinds of financial institutions began to offer competing products. Also, increased competition in consumer financial products has come from companies not typically associated with the banking and financial services industry, companies as diverse as AT&T, General Motors and various software developers. Similar competition is faced for commercial financial products from insurance companies and investment bankers. Competition from companies that are not banks is also developing for payments processing. Often this activity is associated with Internet auction sites and other e-commerce. Community banks, including the Company, attempt to offset these trends by developing new products that capitalize on the service quality that a local institution can offer. Among these are new loan, deposit, and investment products. The Company’s primary competitors are different for each specific product and market area. While this offers special challenges for the Company in marketing of products, it offers protection from one competitor dominating the Company in its market areas.

 

16


Table of Contents

For deposit products, the primary competition is from other local independent banks and the local branches of larger national and regional banks. For consumer loans, the primary competition is from larger banks that because of their investments in automation can offer very fast decisions and low prices. For commercial loans, the primary competition is again from both local banks and regional/national banks based on local contacts for the former and price for the latter. For residential real estate, competition comes from both larger banks with their automation and from independent loan brokers that capitalize on relationships with realtors and title insurance firms. For fiduciary services, competition comes from local offices of larger financial institutions that capitalize on brand familiarity and from small independent money managers that suggest banks are too conservative in their money management style.

 

RISK MANAGEMENT

 

We see the process of addressing the potential impacts of the external factors listed above as part of our management of risk. In addition to common business risks such as disasters, theft, and loss of market share, the Company is subject to special types of risk due to the nature of its business. New and sophisticated financial products are continually appearing with different types of risk which need to be defined and managed if we choose to offer them to our customers. Also, the risks associated with existing products must be reassessed periodically. The Company cannot operate risk-free and make a profit. Instead, the process of risk definition and assessment allows the Company to select the appropriate level of risk for the anticipated level of reward and then decide on the steps necessary to manage this risk. The Company’s Chief Risk Officer and the other members of its Senior Leadership Council under the direction and oversight of the Board of Directors lead the risk management process.

 

Some of the risks faced by the Company are those faced by most enterprises—reputational risk, operational risk, and legal risk. The special risks related to the financial products offered by the Company are credit risk and interest rate risk. Credit risk relates to the possibility that a debtor will not repay according to the terms of the debt contract. Credit risk is discussed in the sections related to loans and the allowance for credit loss. Interest rate risk relates to the adverse impacts of changes in interest rates on financial instruments. The types of interest rate risk will be explained in the next two sections. The effective management of these and the other risks mentioned above is the backbone of the Company’s business strategy.

 

THE IMPACT OF CHANGES IN ASSETS AND LIABILITIES TO NET INTEREST INCOME AND NET INTEREST MARGIN

 

The Company earns its income primarily from two sources. The first of these sources is from the management of its financial assets and liabilities and the second is from charging fees for services provided. The first source involves functioning as a financial intermediary; that is, the Company accepts funds from depositors or obtains funds from other creditors and then either lends the funds to borrowers or invests those funds in securities or other financial instruments. Income is earned as a spread between the interest earned from the loans or investments and the interest paid on the deposits and other borrowings. The second source, fee income, is discussed in other sections of this analysis, specifically in “Noninterest Revenue” and “Tax Refund Anticipation Loans and Refund Transfers.”

 

We monitor asset and deposit levels, developments and trends in interest rates, liquidity, capital adequacy and marketplace opportunities. We respond to all of these to protect and increase income while managing risks within acceptable levels as set by the Company’s policies. In addition, alternative business plans and contemplated transactions are analyzed for their impact on the level of risk assumed by the Company. This process, known as asset/liability management, is carried out by changing the maturities and relative proportions of the various types of loans, investments, deposits and other borrowings in the ways described below. The Management staff responsible for asset/liability management operates under the oversight of the Asset/Liability Committee and provides regular reports to the Board of Directors. Board approval is obtained for major actions or the occasional exception to policy.

 

17


Table of Contents

Changes in Net Interest Income and Net Interest Margin

 

Net interest income is the difference or spread between the interest and fees earned on loans and investments (the Company’s earning assets) and the interest expense paid on deposits and other liabilities. Net interest income or the amount by which interest income will exceed interest expense depends on two factors: (1) the volume or balance of earning assets compared to the volume or balance of interest-bearing deposits and liabilities, and (2) the interest rate earned on those interest earning assets compared with the interest rate paid on those interest-bearing deposits and liabilities.

 

The Company’s earning assets generally exceed its interest-bearing liabilities by 25%—33%. This occurs as the Company is able to fund a significant proportion of its earning assets with noninterest demand accounts.

 

The comparison of rates earned and rates paid is usually done with an analysis of the Company’s net interest margin. Net interest margin is net interest income expressed as a percentage of average earning assets. It is used to measure the difference between the average rate of interest earned on assets and the average rate of interest that must be paid on liabilities used to fund those assets. The net interest income is expressed using a tax equivalent adjustment (Note B) to reflect the fact that the interest income on some municipal securities and loans is exempt from Federal income tax.

 

Table 1 compares the changes in tax equivalent net interest income and tax-equivalent net interest margin from 2002 to 2003 and from 2003 to 2004.

 

TABLE 1—Changes in Tax Equivalent Net Interest Income and Net Interest Margin

 

(dollars in

thousands)

   Tax-equivalent
net interest
income
    Average
earning
assets
   

Average

interest-
bearing
liabilities

    Tax-equivalent
net interest
margin
 

2002

   $ 210,601     $ 3,848,710     $ 2,944,344     5.47 %

$ change

   $ 14,234     $ 478,186     $ 323,308     -0.27 %

% change

     6.8 %     12.4 %     11.0 %   -4.94 %

2003

   $ 224,835     $ 4,326,896     $ 3,267,652     5.20 %

$ change

   $ 38,482     $ 973,018     $ 921,116     -0.23 %

% change

     17.1 %     22.5 %     28.2 %   -4.42 %

2004

   $ 263,317     $ 5,299,914     $ 4,188,768     4.97 %

 

Tax equivalent net interest income increased each year, 6.8% from 2002 to 2003 and 17.1% from 2003 to 2004 as would be expected given the growth in earning assets—12.4% from 2002 to 2003 and 22.5% from 2003 to 2004. However, the Company’s net interest margin decreased from 5.47% in 2002 to 5.20% in 2003, and decreased to 4.97% for 2004. This would suggest that either the average rate earned on the assets declined or that the average rate paid on the liabilities increased, because net interest income did not increase as much as earning assets.

 

Management uses the information in Tables 2 and 3 to analyze these changes in net interest income and net interest margin. Table 2, “Distribution of Average Assets, Liabilities, and Shareholders’ Equity and Related Interest Income, Expense and Rates,” sets forth the average daily balances (Note C) for the major asset and liability categories, the related income or expense where applicable, and the resultant yield or cost attributable to the average earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities. Changes in the average balances and the rates received or paid depend on market opportunities, how well the Company has managed interest rate risks, product pricing policy, product mix, and external trends and developments.

 

Table 3, “Volume and Rate Variance Analysis of Net Interest Income,” analyzes the changes in net interest income from 2002 to 2003 and from 2003 to 2004 that are reported in Table 2. The analysis shows the impact of volume and rate changes on the major categories of assets and liabilities from one year to the next. The table explains how much of the difference or variance in interest income or expense from one year to the next for each major category of assets or liabilities is due to changes in the balances (volume) or to changes in rates.

 

18


Table of Contents

For example, Table 2 shows that interest income from taxable securities increased by $15.7 million from $34.5 million for 2003 to $50.2 million for 2004 while the average balance increased from $913 million to $1.2 billion and the average rate earned increased from 3.78% to 4.02%. Table 3 shows that the $15.7 million increase in interest income was actually the sum of a $13.4 million increase in interest income from the larger balance of securities held in 2004 compared to 2003 and an increase of $2.3 million due to an increase in the average rate received.

 

A shift in the relative size of the major balance sheet categories has an impact on net interest income and net interest margin. For example, to the extent that funds invested in securities can be repositioned into loans, earnings increase because of the higher rates paid on loans. However, changing the asset mix in this way comes at the price of additional risks that must be successfully managed. Additional credit risk is incurred with loans compared to the very low risk of loss on securities, and the Company must carefully monitor the underwriting process to ensure that the benefit of the additional interest earned is not offset by additional credit losses. Also, because loans cannot be sold as easily as securities, the Company incurs more liquidity risk. Another example relates to the liability side of the balance sheet. In general, depositors are willing to accept a lower rate on their funds than are other providers of funds because of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”) insurance coverage. To the extent that the Company can fund asset growth by deposits, especially the lower cost transaction accounts, rather than borrowing funds from other financial institutions, the average rates paid on funds will be less, and net interest income more. The lower cost transaction accounts, however, are demand accounts. While they generally are the result of stable relationships, these funds may be withdrawn by depositors at any time, whereas higher costs forms of borrowing have set maturities around which the Company can plan.

 

The Impact of Overall Trends in the Balances and Rates of Assets and Liabilities—2002 to 2003

 

The FOMC’s decrease in late 2002 of its target rate by 50 basis points and a further 25 basis point decrease in June 2003 limited the Company’s ability to increase net interest income despite the growth in assets. As shown in Table 2, tax equivalent interest income increased by $5.3 million from 2002 to 2003. However, interest income for RALs was $12.1 million in 2003 more than in 2002. This means that interest income from other loans, securities, and money market investments decreased by $6.8 million year-to-year. Interest expense also decreased from 2002 to 2003, but only by $8.9 million, and exclusive of the lower interest expense related to borrowings incurred to fund RALs, interest expense declined $8.1 million. This greater decline in interest expense than interest income resulted in an increase in net interest income exclusive of RALs of $1.3 million.

 

Average earning assets increased by approximately $478 million. Average loans outstanding during 2003 increased $209 million over the average during 2002 and average securities increased $261 million. Among the loan categories, it was primarily residential real estate and commercial loans that increased, the former by $43.5 million in average balances and the latter by $158 million. The relatively large increase in securities was the result of the leveraging plan executed by the Company during 2003. The purchase of these securities and the funding used in the plan are discussed in the securities section of this discussion starting on page 32.

 

Average interest-bearing liabilities increased by $323 million—$212 million in deposits and $111 million in long-term debt and other borrowings. As mentioned above, deposits generally are less expensive than borrowings and the Company is always promoting deposit relationships. Borrowings are used to supplement deposit growth and, as described below in the section titled “Interest Rate Risk,” to help manage interest rate risk.

 

The net interest margin decreased from 5.47% in 2002 to 5.20% in 2003. The reduction in interest rates at the end of 2002 and in 2003 impacted new products sold and the renewal/replacement of those loans, securities, deposits, and borrowings that matured during 2003 by lowering interest received and interest paid. The leverage plan added net interest income, as well as assets and liabilities in this low interest rate environment. Together these events—(1) lower interest income from the decrease in rates offset by more net interest income from the additional securities purchased and (2) the lower rates paid on deposits and borrowings—increased the numerator of the net interest margin fraction, net interest income (exclusive of RAL interest income and expense), by $1.3 million or 0.7%. The denominator of the fraction, average earning assets, increased by 12.4%. The result was a lower net interest margin.

 

19


Table of Contents

The Impact of Overall Trends in the Balances and Rates of Assets and Liabilities—2003 to 2004

 

As noted above, the Company’s tax equivalent net interest income increased from 2003 to 2004, but the net interest margin declined. The net interest margin also decreased from 5.20% in 2003 to 4.97% in 2004 while net interest income increased. The FOMC raised short-term interest rates by 1.25% during 2004. However, this all occurred in the second half of the year, meaning that the factors that contributed to a lower net interest margin in 2003 than in 2002 continued during the first half of 2004.

 

Of these factors, two were primary. The first was inability to decrease the average rate paid on interest-bearing liabilities proportionately to the decreases in the average rate on earning assets because deposit rates had already been decreased as low as possible in 2003. This caused a reduction of net interest income without a reduction of earning assets. In other words, a decrease in the numerator of the net interest margin computation with no corresponding decrease in the denominator.

 

The second factor brought forward from 2003 was the leveraging strategy already mentioned. In essence this involves adding earning assets at a relatively low yield or spread to generate net interest income. However, because of the low yield, it increases net interest income less than it increases earning assets, thus lowering the net interest margin. The strategy, initiated in 2003, had a full year’s impact on 2004.

 

In addition to these two factors, a third factor in 2004 causing the decrease in net interest margin was the acquisition of PCCI. The business model chosen by PCCI was very profitable, but had a lower net interest margin than the Company’s. PCCI elected to take less credit risk than the Company and therefore had less provision for loan loss at the cost of lower loan yields. On the liability side, it funded its activities not through retail deposit products, but through a mixture of certificates of deposit and borrowings that paid a higher average rate than the Company paid on its funding. These two choices—accepting lower interest income for lower provision expense and trading higher cost funding for lower operational costs of nonretail deposits—simply moved its profitability out of net interest income. Consequently, the addition to the Company’s balance sheet of these lower yielding assets and higher cost liabilities resulted in an increase to net interest income, but a lowering of the net interest margin in 2004 compared to 2003.

 

20


Table of Contents

 

 

[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

 

 

 

21


Table of Contents

TABLE 2—Distribution of Average Assets, Liabilities, and Shareholders’ Equity and Related Interest Income, Expense, and Rates (Notes B and D)

 

     Twelve months ended
December 31, 2004


 
(dollars in thousands)    Balance    Income    Rate  

Assets:

                    

Money market instruments:

                    

Commercial paper

   $    $    0.00 %

Federal funds sold

     63,802      748    1.17 %
    

  

      

Total money market instruments

     63,802      748    1.17 %
    

  

      

Securities:

                    

Taxable

     1,247,026      50,191    4.02 %

Non-taxable

     184,217      16,214    8.80 %
    

  

      

Total securities

     1,431,243      66,405    4.64 %
    

  

      

Loans:

                    

Commercial (including leasing)

     930,554      59,950    6.44 %

Real estate-multi family & nonresidential

     1,454,539      90,170    6.20 %

Real estate-residential 1-4 family

     847,954      47,009    5.54 %

Consumer

     565,142      68,165    12.06 %

Other

     6,680      81    1.21 %
    

  

      

Total loans

     3,804,869      265,375    6.97 %
    

  

      

Total earning assets

     5,299,914      332,528    6.27 %
    

  

      

FAS 115 Market Value Adjustment

     18,049              

Non-earning assets

     390,008              
    

             

Total assets

   $ 5,707,971              
    

             

Liabilities and shareholders’ equity:

                    

Interest-bearing deposits:

                    

Savings and interest-bearing transaction accounts

   $ 1,900,627    $ 12,429    0.65 %

Time certificates of deposit

     1,447,208      29,713    2.05 %
    

  

      

Total interest-bearing deposits

     3,347,835      42,142    1.26 %
    

  

      

Borrowed funds:

                    

Repos and Federal funds purchased

     120,417      1,589    1.32 %

Other borrowings

     720,516      25,480    3.54 %
    

  

      

Total borrowed funds

     840,933      27,069    3.22 %
    

  

      

Total interest-bearing liabilities

     4,188,768      69,211    1.65 %
    

  

      

Noninterest-bearing demand deposits

     1,046,870              

Other liabilities

     39,065              

Shareholders’ equity

     433,268              
    

             

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

   $ 5,707,971              
    

             

Interest income/earning assets

                 6.27 %

Interest expense/earning assets

                 1.30 %
                  

Tax equivalent net interest income/margin

            263,317    4.97 %

Provision for credit losses charged to operations/earning assets

            12,809    0.24 %
                  

Net interest margin after provision for credit losses on tax equivalent basis

            250,508    4.73 %

Less: tax equivalent income included in interest income from non-taxable securities and loans

            6,347    0.12 %
           

  

Net interest income after provision for credit loss

          $ 244,161    4.61 %
           

  

Loans other than RALs

   $ 3,702,100    $ 228,702    6.18 %

Consumer loans other than RALs

   $ 462,373    $ 31,492    6.81 %

 

22


Table of Contents

 

Twelve months ended
December 31, 2003


    Twelve months ended
December 31, 2002


 
  Balance      Income    Rate       Balance      Income    Rate  
                                     
                                     
$ 1,109    $ 13    1.17 %   $ 2,081    $ 50    2.40 %
  86,365      1,050    1.22 %     77,568      1,346    1.74 %


  

        

  

      
  87,474      1,063    1.22 %     79,649      1,396    1.75 %


  

        

  

      
                                     
  912,624      34,476    3.78 %     658,765      32,643    4.96 %
  175,470      16,152    9.20 %     168,214      15,592    9.27 %


  

        

  

      
  1,088,094      50,628    4.65 %     826,979      48,235    5.83 %


  

        

  

      
                                     
  796,044      48,779    6.13 %     634,419      50,231    7.92 %
  1,094,569      71,819    6.56 %     1,200,157      79,995    6.67 %
  735,055      44,643    6.07 %     691,475      46,996    6.80 %
  523,033      61,749    11.81 %     410,595      46,371    11.29 %
  2,627      87    3.31 %     5,436      176    3.24 %


  

        

  

      
  3,151,328      227,077    7.21 %     2,942,082      223,769    7.61 %


  

        

  

      
  4,326,896      278,768    6.44 %     3,848,710      273,400    7.10 %


  

        

  

      
  23,175                   15,040              
  295,583                   287,938              


               

             
$ 4,645,654                 $ 4,151,688              


               

             
                                     
                                     
$ 1,591,043    $ 10,299    0.65 %   $ 1,392,013    $ 11,831    0.85 %
  1,240,315      25,862    2.09 %     1,227,682      35,073    2.86 %


  

        

  

      
  2,831,358      36,161    1.28 %     2,619,695      46,904    1.79 %


  

        

  

      
                                     
  66,999      743    1.11 %     78,768      1,184    1.50 %
  369,295      17,029    4.61 %     245,881      14,711    5.98 %


  

        

  

      
  436,294      17,772    4.07 %     324,649      15,895    4.90 %


  

        

  

      
  3,267,652      53,933    1.65 %     2,944,344      62,799    2.13 %


  

        

  

      
  909,915                   810,008              
  78,818                   48,552              
  389,269                   348,784              


               

             
$ 4,645,654                 $ 4,151,688              


               

             
              6.44 %                 7.10 %
              1.24 %                 1.63 %
             

               

         224,835    5.20 %            210,601    5.47 %
         18,286    0.43 %            19,727    0.51 %
             

               

         206,549    4.77 %            190,874    4.96 %
         6,579    0.15 %            6,654    0.17 %
      

  

        

  

       $ 199,970    4.62 %          $ 184,220    4.79 %
      

  

        

  

$ 3,029,669    $ 195,093    6.44 %   $ 2,874,091    $ 203,923    7.10 %
  $401,374    $ 29,765    7.42 %   $ 344,768    $ 26,525    7.69 %

 

 

23


Table of Contents

TABLE 3—Volume and Rate Variance Analysis of Net Interest Income

(Taxable equivalent basis—Notes B and E)

 

(in thousands)    2004 over 2003

    2003 over 2002

 
     Rate     Volume     Total     Rate     Volume     Total  

Increase (decrease) in:

                                                

Assets:

                                                

Money market instruments:

                                                

Commercial paper

   $ (7 )   $ (6 )   $ (13 )   $ (19 )   $ (18 )   $ (37 )

Federal funds sold

     (42 )     (260 )     (302 )     (271 )     (25 )     (296 )
    


 


 


 


 


 


Total money market investment

     (49 )     (266 )     (315 )     (290 )     (43 )     (333 )
    


 


 


 


 


 


Securities:

                                                

Taxable

     2,323       13,392       15,715       (1,723 )     3,556       1,833  

Non-taxable

     (159 )     221       62       33       527       560  
    


 


 


 


 


 


Total securities

     2,164       13,613       15,777       (1,690 )     4,083       2,393  
    


 


 


 


 


 


Loans:

                                                

Commercial (including leasing)

     2,572       8,599       11,171       (3,716 )     2,263       (1,453 )

Real estate—multi family & nonresidential

     926       17,425       18,351       (1,292 )     (6,884 )     (8,176 )

Real estate—residential 1-4 family

     (391 )     2,757       2,366       (2,424 )     71       (2,353 )

Consumer loans

     1,337       5,079       6,416       2,213       13,165       15,378  

Other loans

     (22 )     16       (6 )     (51 )     (37 )     (88 )
    


 


 


 


 


 


Total loans

     4,422       33,876       38,298       (5,270 )     8,578       3,308  
    


 


 


 


 


 


Total earning assets

     6,537       47,223       53,760       (7,250 )     12,618       5,368  
    


 


 


 


 


 


Liabilities:

                                                

Interest-bearing deposits:

                                                

Savings and interest-bearing transaction accounts

           2,130       2,130       (1,484 )     (48 )     (1,532 )

Time certificates of deposit

     173       3,678       3,851       (9,048 )     (163 )     (9,211 )
    


 


 


 


 


 


Total interest-bearing deposits

     173       5,808       5,981       (10,532 )     (211 )     (10,743 )
    


 


 


 


 


 


Borrowed funds:

                                                

Repos and Federal funds purchased

     161       685       846       (281 )     (160 )     (441 )

Other borrowings

     61       8,390       8,451       (439 )     2,757       2,318  
    


 


 


 


 


 


Total borrowed funds

     222       9,075       9,297       (720 )     2,597       1,877  
    


 


 


 


 


 


Total interest-bearing liabilities

     395       14,883       15,278       (11,252 )     2,386       (8,866 )
    


 


 


 


 


 


Tax equivalent net interest income

   $ 6,142     $ 32,340     $ 38,482     $ 4,002     $ 10,232     $ 14,234  
    


 


 


 


 


 


 

INTEREST RATE RISK

 

To understand the results of operations for the Company, it is not enough to simply follow the impact of changes in interest rates. With such a large proportion of the Company’s income derived from net interest income, it is important to understand that the Company addresses risks that are related to changes in interest rates by changing balances and the relative proportion of assets and liabilities. All of this discussion about interest rate risk pertains to financial instruments that are purchased or issued for other than trading purposes, because the Company does not originate or purchase financial instruments for trading purposes.

 

24


Table of Contents

Market Risk Relating to Fixed-Rate Instruments

 

Market risk results from the fact that the market values of assets or liabilities on which the interest rate is fixed will increase or decrease with changes in market interest rates. If the Company invests funds in a fixed-rate long-term security and then interest rates rise, the security is worth less than a comparable security just issued because the older security pays less interest than the newly issued security. If the older security were then to be sold before maturity, the Company would have to recognize a loss. Conversely, if interest rates decline after a fixed-rate security is purchased, its value increases, because it is paying a higher coupon rate than newly issued securities.

 

The fixed-rate liabilities of the Company, like certificates of deposit and borrowings from the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”), also change in value with changes in interest rates. As rates drop, they become more valuable to the depositor or creditor because they continue to pay interest at a rate now higher than is current in financial markets. Conversely, they become more costly to the Company. As rates rise, these liabilities become more valuable to the Company, because the Company is then paying less than the current market rate. Therefore, while the value changes regardless of which direction interest rates move, the adverse impacts of market risk to the Company’s fixed-rate assets are due to rising interest rates and for the Company’s fixed-rate liabilities they are due to falling rates.

 

In general, for a given change in interest rates, the amount of the change in value up or down is larger for instruments with longer remaining maturities (Note F). Therefore, the exposure to market risk from assets is lessened by managing the amount of fixed-rate assets and by keeping maturities relatively short. However, these steps must be balanced against the need for adequate interest income because variable rate and shorter term fixed-rate securities generally earn less interest than fixed-rate and longer term securities.

 

Note 25 discloses the carrying amounts and fair values of the Company’s financial assets and liabilities as of the end of 2004 and 2003. There is a relatively small difference between the carrying amount of the assets and their fair value due to credit quality issues. The primary difference between the carrying amount and the fair value of the Company’s financial assets is essentially a measure of how much changes in interest rates have made the assets more or less valuable to the Company at December 31, 2004 and 2003 than when acquired. The excess of the carrying amounts of the financial assets over their fair values at the end of 2004 was $39.1 million compared with an excess of fair value over carrying amount $54.5 million at the end of 2003.

 

Loans are the only category of assets disclosed in the table that having carrying amounts different than their fair value. The change in the relationship between the carrying amount and the fair value for loans from December 31, 2003 to December 31, 2004 was due to increases in interest rates. As interest rates rise fixed-rate loans decline in value just as do securities because they are no longer earning the market rate of interest.

 

Theoretically, variable-rate assets do not have this market risk associated with them because their coupon rate—the stated rate of the loan or security—varies or reprices with changes in market rates. However, few loans or securities are completely variable. That is, almost all have some kind of a delay before they reprice or a limitation on the extent or frequency with which they reprice. For example, a number of the Company’s loans are originated at one rate which is fixed for a specified period of time, and then they convert to variable instruments. Even after their conversion date, they will usually reprice to the then current market prices only monthly, quarterly, annually, or less frequently.

 

Because the amount of the Company’s fixed-rate liabilities is significantly less than its fixed-rate assets, and because the average maturity of the fixed-rate liabilities is substantially less than for the fixed-rate assets, the market risk relating to liabilities is not as great as for assets. That is, the fair value the Company’s fixed-rate liabilities are generally not as sensitive to changes in interest rates as are the assets. The difference between the carrying amount and the fair value in the table in Note 25 shows the impact of changing rates on the Company’s liabilities that have fixed-rates. They are worth $14.4 million less to customers or lenders to the Company at December 31, 2004, than they were when issued, because on a weighted average basis, they are paying rates that are lower than

 

25


Table of Contents

current market rates. At December 31, 2003, the fair value had exceed the carrying amount by $18.0 million because some of the liabilities had been issued in prior years when rates were higher. Many of those deposits or borrowings matured during 2004 and the increase in interest rates has meant that deposits or borrowings issued when rates were lower are now paying less interest than the current market rates and are therefore worth less to the depositor or lender.

 

While many of the deposits may be repriced at any time at the Company’s option, it does not typically hold term liabilities that may reprice prior to maturity. Two of the issues of subordinated debt described in Note 13 are exceptions in that they reprice after five years.

 

Mismatch Risk

 

The second interest-related risk, mismatch risk, arises from the fact that when interest rates change, the changes do not occur equally in the rates of interest earned on assets and paid on liabilities. This occurs because of differences in the contractual maturity terms of the assets and liabilities held. A difference in the maturities, a mismatch, can cause adverse impacts on net interest income.

 

The Company has a portion of its commercial loan portfolio tied to the national prime rate. If these rates are lowered because of general market conditions, e.g., the prime rate decreases in response to a rate decrease by the FOMC as happened in 2002 and 2003, these loans will be re-priced. If the Company were at the same time to have a large proportion of its deposits in longer-term fixed-rate certificates, interest earned on loans would decline while interest expense would remain at higher levels for a period of time until the certificates matured. Therefore, net interest income would decrease immediately. A decrease in net interest income could also occur with rising interest rates if the Company had a large portfolio of fixed-rate loans and securities that was funded by deposit accounts on which the rate is steadily rising.

 

If the assets of a holder of financial instruments mature or reprice sooner than its liabilities, then the assets will respond more quickly than liabilities to changes in interest rates. In this case, the holder is said to be asset sensitive. If liabilities respond sooner to changes in rates than assets, it is said to be liability sensitive. If the amounts of assets and liabilities maturing or repricing in the short-term are approximately the same, it is said to be neutral.

 

In general, community banks or regional banks tend to be asset sensitive because they primarily depend on retail or commercial deposits for their funding. These deposits are generally administered rate deposits, i.e. they may be changed at the Company’s option in response to changes in market rates, competitive pressures, and need for funding. Administered rate deposit accounts like negotiable order of withdrawal (“NOW”) accounts, money market deposit accounts (“MMDA”), and savings, are the accounts that do not have a contractually set rate for their term as do certificates of deposit. Money center banks tend to have a higher proportion of other borrowings—wholesale funding—in their funding mix. Wholesale funding is comprised of borrowings from other financial institutions and deposits received from sources other than through customer relationships. These sources of funding tend to be short-term and priced by reference to indices outside of the control of the Company. Deposits provide the advantage of a lower cost of funding compared to using wholesale funding, but their interest rates are less sensitive to changes in market rates. Customer expectations do not permit banks to decrease their deposit rates as frequently as market rates may decline and, because they bear generally lower rates than other borrowings, when the interest rate environment is already low, they can’t be reduced as much as wholesale rates will move. However, when interest rates are rising, they generally do not rise as quickly as the indices to which borrowing prices are referenced.

 

This exposure to mismatch risk is managed by attempting to match the maturities and repricing opportunities of assets and liabilities. This may be done by varying the terms and conditions of the products that are offered to depositors and borrowers. For example, if many depositors want shorter-term certificates while most borrowers are requesting longer-term fixed rate loans, the Company may try to adjust the interest rates on the certificates and loans to try to match up demand for similar maturities. However, there are practical limitations on the extent to which the Company can encourage customers to select terms desired by the Company to attain a better matching. Generally, the Company purchases securities or incurs other borrowings with the appropriate maturity to

 

26


Table of Contents

manage a mismatch rather than trying to force customers into selecting different maturities by pricing, because such special pricing may raise customers’ expectations causing them disappointment when the mismatch is no longer present and the Company has no need to offer the special pricing.

 

The following table shows the Company’s assets and liabilities sorted into reprice/maturity ranges. While the Company does not manage its interest rate risk by means of this gap analysis—a table in which the difference between assets and liabilities maturing or repricing in each period is shown is referred to as a “gap” analysis—the following table is provided for the reader. It summarizes the time periods in which maturities and or repricing opportunities occur for the major categories of assets and liabilities for December 31, 2004. The cumulative gap and the cumulative gap as a percentage of total assets are also reported. A positive number indicates that assets maturing or repricing in that specific period exceed maturing or repricing liabilities. A negative number indicates the opposite. As of December 31, 2004, the Company had a slight excess of assets repricing or maturing overnight. There is a large excess of liabilities over assets repricing in the next maturity period. Ordinarily, this would suggest that the Company is liability sensitive rather than asset sensitive as was stated in the preceding paragraph. However, this excess of liabilities over assets is a byproduct of the assumption that all non-term deposit accounts could be repriced at any time. In fact these deposit accounts are not immediately repriced with each change in market interest rates, nor do they change to the same degree as market rates when they are repriced. Rather than drawing the larger conclusion of “asset sensitive” or “liability sensitive” from the table, a better use for it is to note that the Company has a wide distribution of maturities or repricing opportunities in both its assets and liabilities. The period gaps, cumulative gaps, and cumulative gaps relative to assets are also shown as of December 31, 2003. There were no appreciable changes in this condition from December 31, 2003 to December 30, 2004.

 

TABLE 4—Repricing Opportunities by Major Category of Assets and Liabilities

 

(dollars in thousands)

   
 
 
Immedi-
ate or
one day
 
 
 
   
 
 
2 day
to
6 months
 
 
 
   
 
 
6 months
to
12 months
 
 
 
   
 
 
1 year
to
3 years
 
 
 
   
 
 
3 years
to
5 years
 
 
 
   
 
 
More
than
5 years
 
 
 
   
 
 
Total
rate
sensitive
 
 
 
   
 
 
Total
non-rate
sensitive
 
 
 
    Total  

As of December 31, 2004

                                                                       

Assets:

                                                                       

Cash and due from banks

  $     $     $     $     $     $     $     $ 133,116     $ 133,116  

Federal funds sold

                                                     

Securities

    13,752       190,569       166,019       461,159       240,751       627,663       1,699,913       (175,039 )     1,524,874  

Loans

            2,067,467       400,872       975,241       417,266       165,539       4,026,385       35,909       4,062,294  

Allowance for loan and

                                                                       

and lease losses

                                              (53,977 )     (53,977 )

Other assets

                                              358,478       358,478  
   


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


Total assets

  $ 13,752     $ 2,258,036     $ 566,891     $ 1,436,400     $ 658,017     $ 793,202     $ 5,726,298     $ 298,487     $ 6,024,785  
   


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


Liabilities and Equity:

                                                                       

Deposits

  $     $ 3,796,283     $ 335,949     $ 280,375     $ 98,269     $ 1,414     $ 4,512,290     $     $ 4,512,290  

Borrowings

          304,334       159,431       326,148       144,250       77,130       1,011,293             1,011,293  

Other liabilities

                                              41,520       41,520  

Shareholders’ equity

                                              459,682       459,682  
   


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


Total liabilities and equity

  $     $ 4,100,617     $ 495,380     $ 606,523     $ 242,519     $ 78,544     $ 5,523,583     $ 501,202     $ 6,024,785  
   


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


 


Gap

  $ 13,752     $ (1,842,581 )   $ 71,511     $ 829,877     $ 415,498     $ 714,658     $ 202,715     $ (202,715 )   $  

Cumulative gap

  $ 13,752     $ (1,828,829 )   $ (1,757,318 )   $ (927,441 )   $ (511,943 )   $ 202,715     $ 202,715     $     $  
                                                                         

Cumulative gap/total assets

    0.23 %     -30.36 %     -29.17 %     -15.39 %     -8.50 %     3.36 %     3.36 %     0.00 %     0.00 %

As of December 31, 2003

                                                                       

Gap

  $ 22,447     $ (1,592,109 )   $ 192,214     $ 695,877     $ 272,092     $ 725,493     $ 316,014     $ (316,014 )   $  

Cumulative gap

  $ 22,447     $ (1,569,662 )   $ (1,377,448 )   $ (681,571 )   $ (409,479 )   $ 316,014     $ 316,014     $     $  
                                                                         

Cumulative gap/total assets

    0.46 %     -32.30 %     -28.34 %     -14.03 %     -8.43 %     6.50 %     6.50 %     0.00 %     0.00 %

 

Note: The model places all non-time deposits in the immediate category. Securities are listed by their maturity or any repricing prior to maturity. The $13.8 million placed in the immediate category for securities is the market value adjustment for available-for-sale securities. As the market value of securities are determined by the current interest rate environment any

 

27


Table of Contents

changes in interest rates would have an immediate change in their market values and the corresponding adjustment. Prime rate loans generally do not reprice until the day after a change in the FOMC target rate, so they are placed in the 2 day to 6 month category. The negative $175 million in the non-rate sensitive category is the unaccreted discount net of unamortized premium on the securities. These amounts do not change with interest rates, but instead are accreted or amortized by the level yield method over the term of the security.

 

Basis Risk

 

The above gap table addresses mismatch risk, but does not address the fact that interest rates rarely change in a parallel or equal manner. This phenomenon is the cause of basis risk—that interest rates associated with the various assets and liabilities differ in how often they change, the extent to which they change, and whether they change sooner or later than other interest rates. For example, while the repricing of a specific asset and a specific liability may occur at roughly the same time, the interest rate on the liability may rise one percent in response to rising market rates while the asset increases only one-half percent. While the Company would appear to be evenly matched with respect to the maturities of the specific asset and liability, it would suffer a decrease in net interest income.

 

Nonparallel responses occur because various contractual limits and non-contractual factors come into play. An example of a contractual limit is the “interest rate cap” on some residential real estate loans. These caps may limit the amount that the rates customers pay may increase. An example of a non-contractual factor is the assumption on how low rates could be lowered on deposit accounts. While priced at the Company’s option, there are limits to how low they can be priced and yet retain the customers.

 

This exposure to basis risk is the type of interest risk least able to be managed, but is also the least dramatic. Avoiding concentration in only a few types of assets or liabilities is the best means of increasing the chance that the average interest received and paid will move in tandem. The wider diversification means that the movements in many different rates, each with their own volatility characteristics, will tend to offset each other.

 

The Impact of Interest Rate Risk on the Company

 

Each of these risks came into play in the last three years as the interest rate environment changed dramatically.

 

Market Risk:  In 2003 we saw the partial reversal of a trend that started in 2001 of the fair value of financial assets increasing relative to their carrying amount. This was caused by the further decreases in market rates that occurred during 2001-2003. While the fair value had exceeded the carrying value by $145.9 million by the end of 2002, this excess had decreased to $54.5 million by the end of 2003. This change in the excess of fair value over carrying value occurred primarily for three reasons. The first is that while short-term interest rates were lower at the end of 2003 than a year earlier, as the FOMC decreased rates another 25 basis points in June 2003, mid- and longer-term rates increased especially during the second half of the year. For example, rates on 5-year Treasury securities were about 50 basis points higher than they had been at the beginning of 2003. The second is that the reclassification of held-to-maturity securities to available-for-sale—they were carried at their fair value at the end of 2003. The third is the large amount of loan refinancing and new origination activity in 2003 had the effect of narrowing the spread between fair value and carrying amounts by increasing the proportion of loans that are relatively new, i.e., for which there had been little time for their fair value to have been impacted by changes in interest rates since origination.

 

The increases in interest rates during 2004 had the impact of changing the relationship of carrying amount to fair value to one of an excess of carrying amount over fair value.

 

The difference between the fair value and carrying amount of liabilities was less impacted by these changes in interest rates, moving from a position where the carrying value was $27.9 million less than the fair value at the end of 2002, $18.0 million less than the fair value at the end of 2003, to a reversed position with the carrying amount exceeding the fair value by $14.4 million at December 31, 2004.

 

28


Table of Contents

Mismatch Risk:  Over the last several years, with respect to mismatch risk, the Company has generally been neutral or slightly asset sensitive. This was a detriment in 2001 as a large proportion of the Company’s assets kept repricing lower with each FOMC action lowering rates while a large proportion of its liabilities lagged in their repricing. During the first three quarters of 2002, both assets and liabilities repriced as they matured or as repricing dates occurred, but more liabilities than assets repriced and the Company’s net interest margin improved. However, the asset sensitivity negatively impacted net interest income in 2003 with the two FOMC decreases in interest rates in late 2002 and June 2003.

 

The leveraging strategy described on page 34 of this discussion lessened the asset sensitivity of the Company, putting it in an almost neutral position. While increasing net interest income in both 2003 and 2004, the reduced asset sensitivity had the effect of lessening the positive impact on earnings from the increases in short-term rates during 2004.

 

Basis Risk:  Basis risk had the effect of increasing asset sensitivity as the market rates continued to drop during 2001. This occurred because while assets set to prime rate as an index changed with each decrease in prime and to exactly the same extent as prime, the rates even on administered rate deposits could not be decreased as frequently or to the same extent. For example, the rate paid on NOW accounts at year-end 2000 was 50 basis points. It is clear that the rate on these accounts could not be decreased to the same extent as the 475 basis points that prime decreased in 2001.

 

By the beginning of 2002, the general economic consensus was that there would be interest rate increases during the year as the economy improved, but instead the FOMC lowered their target rate one more time in November and again the Company saw a decrease in its net interest margin as its prime-based loans immediately repriced by 50 basis points. Continuing the example in the preceding paragraph, in response to the 50 basis point decrease in rates in November 2002, the Company was able to lower its rate on NOW accounts by only 10 basis points. As noted above, banks the size of the Company generally are more asset sensitive than larger banks, but the last rate decrease by the FOMC caused even the larger banks to become asset sensitive as their funding costs were not lowered to the same extent as the rates on their assets were lowered. The rate decrease in June of 2003 had a similar effect as deposit rates could not be lowered.

 

The second half of 2004 is another good example of the nonparallel shifts in interest rate changes that cause basis risk. The FOMC increased short-term interest rates five times by 25 basis points each, but mid-term and long-term rates were lower at the end of 2004 than they were at the end of 2003. This had the advantage of increasing rates earned on assets with very short maturities or repricing dates while not decreasing the value of the longer term assets.

 

Net Interest Income and Net Economic Value Simulations

 

To quantify the extent of all of these risks both in its current position and in transactions it might do in the future, management uses computer modeling to simulate the impact of different interest rate scenarios on net interest income and on net economic value. Net economic value, or the market value of portfolio equity, is defined as the difference between the market value of financial assets and liabilities. These hypothetical scenarios include both sudden and gradual interest rate changes, and interest rate changes in both directions. This modeling is the primary means the Company uses for interest rate risk management decisions.

 

Each month, the Company models how sudden, hypothetical changes in interest rate, called shocks, if applied to its asset and liability balances, would impact net interest income and net economic value. The results of this modeling indicate how much of the Company’s net interest income and net economic value are “at risk” (deviation from the base level) from various sudden rate changes (Note G). This exercise is valuable in identifying risk exposures and in comparing the Company’s interest rate risk profile with those of other financial institutions.

 

The results for the Company’s December 31, 2004, balances indicate that the Company’s net interest income at risk over a one-year period and net economic value at risk from 2% shocks are within normal expectations for such sudden changes.

 

29


Table of Contents

TABLE 5A—Rate Sensitivity

 

     Shocked
by –2%
    Shocked
by +2%
 

As of December 31, 2004

            

Net interest income

   (4.75 %)   +1.48 %

Net economic value

   +3.15 %   (13.28 %)

As of December 31, 2003

            

Net interest income

   (6.25 %)   +3.22 %

Net economic value

   +18.87 %   (8.01 %)

 

As indicated above, the Company is less asset sensitive at December 31, 2004 than at December 31, 2003. This is shown by the lower estimated increase in net interest income at December 31, 2004 were there to be a sudden 2% parallel increase in interest rates. The reasons for this change in asset sensitivity are: (1) the liabilities used to fund the purchase of securities in 2004 have shorter maturities than the securities purchased; (2), many of the loans originated in 2004 were fixed-rate or at least fixed for several years; and (3) changes in assumptions regarding the frequency and extent of increase in deposit rates.

 

While no model is a perfect description of the complexity of a bank’s balance sheet, and actual results are certain to differ from any model’s predicted results, Management is unaware of any material limitations such that the above results would not reflect fully the net interest rate risk exposures of the Company. For example, there are no material positions, instruments or transactions that are not included in the modeling or included instruments that have special features that are not included.

 

Assumptions used in modeling:  Among the assumptions that must be included in the model are those that address optionality. Optionality is a characteristic of many financial instruments. Various examples include (1) the option customers have to prepay their loans or request early withdrawal of their term deposits; (2) the option issuers of some of the securities held by the Company to prepay or call their debt; and (3) the option of the Company to reprice its administered deposits. The Company addresses optionality in the model through estimates or assumptions. For example, Management estimates the rate at which customers of residential real estate loans will prepay their obligations under various interest rate scenarios, estimates the target rate at which security issuers are likely to call their debt, and estimates the frequency and extent to which the Company would reprice deposit rates under different interest rate scenarios.

 

As indicated in Notes 24 and 25, the Company does not have a significant amount of derivative instruments. Also as explained in Note 24, almost all of those instruments the Company does have are offsetting instruments where increases in income, expenses, or value from some of the swaps are offset by expenses, income, or loss from the rest. Consequently, these instruments do not need to be specifically addressed in the model.

 

Management also makes certain other significant assumptions for these measurements that significantly impact the results. The two most significant of these assumptions are (1) the use of a “static” balance sheet—Management does not project changes in the size or mix of the various assets and liabilities—and (2) estimates regarding the Company’s non-maturity deposits. The use of a static balance sheet is done to limit the variables in the model. The only exception to this is the inclusion of the RAL income in the net interest income over the next 12 months. While not sensitive to interest rates—see the section on RALs below for an explanation of interest income for this product—the amount is simply too large to ignore even though it is a seasonal product and there were no RALs on the balance sheet at year-end. The purpose of the comparison is not to project net interest income over the next year, but to measure the current sensitivity to changes in interest rates and compare that measurement to similar measurements done in the past. It is also done to determine the impact of hypothetical individual transactions on the sensitivity. Because of the assumption of a static balance sheet, readers of this discussion should not look at the above table as a projection of net interest income. The assumptions for non-maturity deposits are significant, because they have no contractual maturity and because their rates are not determined with respect to any external index. Therefore, Management must estimate how long the deposits will remain

 

30


Table of Contents

with the Company in order to determine their economic value, and must estimate how soon, how frequently, and to what degree changes in short-term interest rates will be reflected in the rates of these administered deposits to determine the impact of those changes on net interest income.

 

As interest rates change, the assumptions regarding responsiveness to further change must be reviewed, and any changes will affect the computed results. These assumptions are reviewed each quarter and are changed as deemed appropriate to reflect the best information available to Management. Assumptions used for the measurement at December 31, 2004 are not necessarily the same as those used for the measurement at December 31, 2003.

 

The same changes to the balance sheet and assumptions mentioned above in connection with net interest income also account for the changes in net economic value. However, the computation of net economic value discounts all cash flows over the life of the instrument, not only the next twelve months. For example, in estimating the impact on net interest income of a two-percent rise in rates on a security maturing in three years, only the negative impact during the first year is captured in net interest income. In estimating the impact on net economic value, the negative impact for all three years is captured. Therefore, the results tend to be more pronounced.

 

The changes in assumptions accounts for most of the change in the net economic value in the event of a 200 basis point change in interest rates at the end of 2004 compared to the expected changes in net economic value in response to the same change in rates at the end of 2003.

 

Asymmetry of results:  As noted above in discussing basis risk, financial instruments do not respond in parallel fashion to rising or falling interest rates. This causes an asymmetry in the magnitude of changes in net interest income and net economic value resulting from the hypothetical increases and decreases in rates. In other words, the same percentage of increase and decrease in the hypothetical interest rate will not cause the same percentage change in net interest income or net economic value.

 

In addition, the degree of asymmetry changes as the base rate changes from period to period and as there are changes in the Company’s product mix. For example, if savings accounts are paying 4% when one measures the impact of a 2% decrease in market rates, the measured responsiveness of the rate paid on these accounts to that decrease will be greater than the responsiveness if the current rate is 3% when the measurement is done. This is because the Company cannot assume that it will be able to lower the rates paid on these deposits as much from a 3% base as from a 4% base.

 

Another example of a factor that would cause asymmetric results would be the extent consumer variable rate loans are a larger proportion of the portfolio than in a previous period. The caps on loan rates, which generally are present only in consumer loans, would have more of an adverse impact on the overall result if rates were to rise.

 

Non-shock simulations:  In addition to applying scenarios with sudden interest rate shocks, net interest income simulations are prepared at least quarterly using various interest rate projections. Reflecting what appears to be a general consensus that the FOMC will continue to gradually increase short-term rates though 2005, Management’s projection for the most likely scenario includes four increases of 25 basis point each spaced through out the year. As the year progresses, the models are revised to make use of the latest available projections. In addition to a “most-likely” scenario, the Company also projects the impact on net interest income from higher and lower rate scenarios.

 

In addition to the assumptions used in the shock analysis mentioned above, the interest rate simulation reports are dependent on additional assumptions relating to the shape of the interest rate curves and the volatility of the interest rate scenarios selected. In addition, Management expects relatively flat yield curves (Note H).

 

Under these “more realistic” scenarios, as in the case of the sudden rate shock model, the Company’s net interest income at risk in 2005 is still well within normal expectations. The change in the average expected Fed funds rate is also shown to give perspective as to the extent of the interest rate changes assumed by the two scenarios.

 

31


Table of Contents

TABLE 5B—Results of Alternative Simulations

 

     Rates Lower
Than Most
Likely
    Rates Higher
Than Most
Likely
 

Percentage change in net interest income

   (0.60 %)   0.54 %

compared to most likely scenario

            

Change in average Fed funds rate

   (0.54 %)   0.71 %

 

Managing Interest Rate Risk with Derivative Instruments

 

The steps that the Company takes to mitigate interest rate risk were mentioned above as each type of interest rate risk was explained. They primarily involve pricing products to achieve diversification or offsetting risk characteristics and purchasing securities or issuing debt with maturities that offset undesired risk characteristics. The Company has also occasionally used derivative instruments, specifically interest rate swaps, to protect large loans or pools of loans. However, there are limitations and costs associated with these instruments.

 

In general, absent the ability to correctly predict the future direction and extent of changes in interest rates, there is a trade-off between assuming additional cost and assuming additional risk. For example, the Company could enter into an interest rate swap whereby it receives a variable rate on a notional amount to another financial institution in exchange for paying a fixed rate. This will protect the Company’s interest income if rates rise, because it will receive more as the variable rate adjusts with each increase in rates while it continues to pay the same fixed amount over the term of the contract. This will offset the fact that the Company’s fixed rate assets will be earning less than the market rate after the rise. However, the Company would lose interest income if rates decline instead of rise as its variable receipt decreases (Note R).

 

Alternatively, the Company could purchase an option contract under which it would receive cash from the other party if rates rose or fell by a specified amount, depending on which direction the Company anticipated rates to move. This contract avoids incurring risk should rates move against its expectations, but the option fee, a not insignificant amount, is forfeited if rates do not move as anticipated.

 

Despite the trade-offs inherent in using derivative instruments, Management anticipates making more use of them in the future. As its RAL program continues to grow, the Company must increasingly structure its balance sheet to provide the large amount of liquidity needed in the first quarter of each year. This limits the Company’s ability to take some of the natural or on-balance sheet hedge positions (Note I) of which it could otherwise make use. Derivative instruments may provide the additional flexibility needed both to maintain the liquidity and protect net interest income.

 

SECURITIES

 

The major components of the Company’s earning asset base are the securities portfolio, the loan portfolio and its holdings of money market instruments. The Company’s Asset Liability Management Committee (“ALCO”) has overall responsibility for the management of the securities portfolios, the money market instruments, and the Company’s borrowings. The structure and detail within these portfolios are very significant to an analysis of the financial condition of the Company. The loan and money market instrument portfolios and the borrowings will be covered in later sections of this discussion.

 

Securities Portfolios

 

The Company classifies its securities into three portfolios: the “Liquidity Portfolio,” the “Discretionary Portfolio,” and the “Earnings Portfolio.” As of the end of 2004, all of these portfolios are comprised of securities classified in the financial statements as available-for-sale.

 

32


Table of Contents

The Liquidity Portfolio’s primary purpose is to provide liquidity to meet cash flow needs. The portfolio consists of U.S. Treasury and agency securities. These securities are purchased with maturities of up to three years with an average maturity of between one and two years.

 

The Discretionary Portfolio’s primary purposes are to provide income from available funds and to hold earning assets that can be purchased or sold as part of overall asset/liability management. The Discretionary Portfolio consists of U.S. Treasury and agency securities, collateralized mortgage obligations (“CMOs”), asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed securities (Note J), and municipal securities.

 

The Earnings Portfolio’s primary purpose is to provide income from securities purchased with funds not expected to be needed for making loans or repaying depositors. The Earnings Portfolio consists of long-term tax-exempt obligations.

 

As explained in Note 1, securities that are classified as available-for-sale are carried at their fair value. This means that the carrying amount of some securities will increase or decrease based on changes in interest rates and very rarely to changes in their credit quality. In December 2003, the Company recognized that the flexibility to sell any of its securities prior to maturity in order to manage interest rate risk or to provide liquidity was more desirable than the avoidance of the balance sheet volatility and consequently reclassified all of its securities as available-for-sale. This reclassification prevents for at least two years any classification by the Company of subsequent purchases as held-to-maturity.

 

Maintaining adequate liquidity is one of the highest priorities for the Company. Therefore, available funds are first used to purchase securities for the Liquidity Portfolio. So long as there are sufficient securities in that portfolio to meet its purposes, available funds are then used to purchase securities for the Discretionary Portfolio and the Earnings Portfolio.

 

Additional Purposes Served by the Securities Portfolios

 

The securities portfolios of the Company serve additional purposes: (1) to act as collateral for the deposits of public agencies and trust customers that must be secured by certain securities owned by the Company; (2) to be used as collateral for borrowings that the Company occasionally utilizes for liquidity purposes; (3) to support the development needs of the communities within its marketplace; and (4) to assist in managing interest rate risk.

 

Collateral for deposits:  The legal requirements for securing specific deposits may only be satisfied by pledging certain types of the Company’s securities. A large proportion of these deposits may be secured by state and municipal securities, but some can only be secured by U.S. Treasury securities, so holding a minimum amount of these securities will always be necessary.

 

Collateral for borrowing:  As covered in other sections of this discussion, the Company borrows funds from other financial institutions to manage its liquidity position. Certain amounts may be borrowed unsecured, i.e. without collateral, but by pledging some of its securities as collateral, the Company may borrow more and/or at lower rates.

 

Community Development:  The Company searches actively for investments that support the development needs of communities within its marketplace. Such investments would include mortgage-backed securities consisting of real estate loans to lower income borrowers in its market areas. The Company also holds several bonds of school districts within its market areas.

 

Interest Rate Risk Management:  The Company also uses purchases for and sales from its securities portfolios to manage interest rate risk as explained above in the section titled “Interest Rate Risk”.

 

Amounts and Maturities of Securities

 

As a ready source of liquidity, the size of the securities portfolios tends to vary with the relative increase in loan and deposit balances. The end of year balance increased by $449 million from 2002 to 2003 as the increase in loans ($161 million) was less than the increase in deposits ($339 million).

 

33


Table of Contents

The ideal manner for a financial institution to grow or to increase its net interest income is through adding deposits and investing the received funds in loans. This is ideal because the spread between the interest earned and paid is then maximized. However, with interest rates low, loan demand improving, but still moderate, and customers unwilling to place their funds in the longer-term CDs that would help the Company avoid incurring mismatch risk the opportunities to grow in this manner are limited. The Company decided that the purchase of securities funded by the borrowings would provide some additional net interest income, even though the relatively thin spread between the earnings rate on the securities and the cost of the borrowings would negatively impact the net interest margin. The Company began to implement this “leveraging” strategy in a small way in late 2002, and then substantially increased the Discretionary Portfolio by the purchase of $500 million of securities from April through September 2003 after the end of the 2003 RAL/RT season. It is termed “leveraging” because the purchaser is increasing its assets without a corresponding increase in capital, hence leveraging its capital.

 

Almost all of the securities purchased were hybrid ARM MBS supplemented by a few CMOs. Hybrid ARM MBSs are mortgage-backed securities that have the initial coupon rate of the underlying mortgages fixed for 3, 5, or 7 years and then reprice to an external index. The securities purchases were funded by term borrowings from the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”). The use of term debt to fund the purchases reduces the interest rate risk incurred by the purchase of the securities, because the spread between the assets and liabilities would be “locked in” for at least the term of the debt. The Company did not try to exactly “match fund” the purchases—exactly match the term of the securities purchased and the debt incurred—because the spreads would then be too narrow. The Company had been asset sensitive as explained in the section titled “Interest Rate Sensitivity,” and it could afford some mismatching of the maturities to obtain a wider spread in the interest income and expense.

 

In 2004, loans increased more ($881 million) than deposits ($657 million), and securities increased by $207 million. The acquisition of PCCI caused much of the increases in these balances, but without the effect of the purchase, loans still increased $462 million, deposits $367 million, and securities $86 million.

 

The Company purchased another $200 million in hybrid ARM MBS securities during 2004, this time using only the 3 and 5 year initial fixed rates. Again, these were funded with FHLB advances. That the securities portfolios increased only $76 million despite these purchases is due to the payments received on the earlier purchases. As disclosed in the Consolidated Statement of Cash flows for 2004, the Company received $306 million in proceeds on sale or maturity of securities.

 

Table 6 sets forth the amounts and maturity ranges of the securities at December 31, 2004. Because many of the securities included in the Earnings Portfolio are state or municipal bonds, much of the income from this portfolio has the additional advantage of being tax-exempt. Therefore, the tax equivalent weighted average yields of the securities are shown in Table 2. The average yields on the taxable securities are significantly lower than the average rates earned from loans as shown in Table 2. Because of this, while taxable securities provide liquidity and act as collateral for deposits and borrowings, they are purchased for earnings only when loan demand is weak or when the company can fund the purchase with specific debt that locks in an acceptable spread. In addition, they are now all classified as available-for-sale, so they could be sold if loan demand should increase. If the securities purchased in the leveraging strategy were sold, spread versus the specific debt would increase.

 

Other Securities Disclosures

 

Turnover and Maturity Profile:  The Company generally purchases municipal securities with maturities of 18-25 years because, in Management’s judgment, they have the best ratio of rate earned to the market risk incurred in purchasing these fixed rate securities. However, to mitigate this higher interest rate risk, the Company purchases taxable securities with relatively short maturities. This in turn causes frequent maturities and what may appear to be a relatively high turnover rate. In addition, MBS securities represent a higher proportion of the securities portfolios in 2003 and 2004 than in 2002. There is a monthly paydown for these securities as mortgage payments are received on the underlying mortgages. Therefore it would be expected that proceeds

 

34


Table of Contents

from maturities would be higher relative to these securities than they would be for single maturity securities.

 

TABLE 6—Maturity Distribution and Yield Analysis of the Securities Portfolios

 

As of December 31, 2004

(dollars in thousands)

   One year
or less
   After one
year to
five years
  

After five

years to
ten years

   Over ten
years
   Total

Maturity distribution:

                                  

Available-for-sale:

                                  

U.S. Treasury obligations

   $ 50,560    $ 61,666    $    $    $ 112,226

U.S. agency obligations

     75,353      134,692                210,045

Mortgage-backed securities and

                                  

Collateralized mortgage obligations

     1,432      503,176      365,625      104,818      975,051

Asset-backed securities

     8,691      11,617                20,308

State and municipal securities

     1,981      9,017      36,032      160,214      207,244

  

  

  

  

  

Total

   $ 138,017    $ 720,168    $ 401,657    $ 265,032    $ 1,524,874

  

  

  

  

  

Weighted average yield (Tax equivalent—Note B):

                                  

Available-for-sale:

                                  

U.S. Treasury obligations

     3.35%      2.68%                2.98%

U.S. agency obligations

     3.96%      3.51%                3.67%

Mortgage-backed securities and

                                  

Collateralized mortgage obligations

     5.72%      4.14%      4.49%      4.58%      4.32%

Asset-backed securities

     4.33%      5.03%                4.73%

State and municipal securities

     9.73%      10.19%      8.33%      9.36%      9.22%

Overall weighted average

     3.86%      3.98%      4.80%      7.36%      4.75%

 

As noted above, the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows for 2004 shows $306 million in proceeds on the sale or maturity of securities. Of this amount, the table in Note 5 shows that $87 million related to sales. For 2003, proceeds from the sales were $146 million.

 

These sales are not due to trading activity. The Company does not have a trading portfolio. That is, it does not purchase securities on the speculation that interest rates will decrease and thereby allow subsequent sale at a gain. Proceeds from sales represented only 6% of the average balance in the securities portfolio in 2004 and 13% in 2003. The gains and (losses) from sales of securities were minimal, representing 1.71% of pretax income in 2003 and (1.44%) in 2004. In 2003, most of the sales were consistent with the Company’s strategy of riding the yield curve (Note K). The remainder of the securities sold were small positions taken a number of years ago in municipal securities. As the Company has become larger, it has attempted to increase the size of each issue purchased so as to keep the number of securities in the portfolio manageable. As smaller issues matured, the proceeds were combined into larger purchases. Because the maturity of the municipal securities is generally more than 20 years, a number of the smaller issues were sold to gain this efficiency rather than wait until their maturity.

 

In 2004, most of the sales were made in consideration of the likelihood of additional rising interest rates. Selling some of the lowest yielding securities allowed the Company to reinvest the proceeds from these sales at higher rates. Taking a loss and the resulting tax deduction in the current year with reinvestment in a higher yielding security improves total return on the portfolio compared with leaving the funds earning the lower rate.

 

Approximately $500 million of the purchases in 2003 and $200 million in 2004 are explained above in the comment on the leveraging strategy. In addition to this, if the various purposes for the portfolios mentioned above are to be met, purchases must be made throughout interest rate cycles. Rather than anticipate the direction of changes in interest rates, the Company’s investment practice with respect to securities in the Liquidity and Discretionary Portfolios is to purchase securities so

 

35


Table of Contents

that the maturities are approximately equally spaced by quarter within the portfolios. The periodic spacing of maturities provides the Company with a steady source of cash for liquidity purposes. If the cash is not needed, this pattern of frequent maturities minimizes reinvestment risk, which is having too much cash available all at once that must be invested perhaps when rates are low.

 

Securities gains and losses: As occurred in 2004, the Company will occasionally sell securities prior to maturity to reposition the funds into a better yielding asset. This usually results in a loss. Except in the case of sales executed to ride the yield curve, the Company generally does not follow a practice of selling securities to realize gains. This is because future income is reduced after a sale by the difference between the higher rates that were being earned on the sold securities and the lower rates that can be earned on new securities purchased with the proceeds. In addition, the Company pays taxes on the gains sooner than it would if paying taxes only as interest is received, thereby losing the use of those funds. However, gains are occasionally recognized when interest rates have decreased and:

 

·   the issuer calls the securities;
·   the Company needs to reposition the maturities of securities to manage mismatch risk;
·   the Company needs to change the risk-weighting profile of its assets to manage its capital position (see the section below titled “Capital Resources”); or
·   the Company is selling small remaining portions of amortizing securities to reduce administrative burden.

 

Hedges, Derivatives, and Other Disclosures

 

The Company has policies and procedures that permit limited types and amounts of derivatives to help manage interest rate risk. As with securities, the Company’s ALCO has overall responsibility for the use and management of derivatives, interest rate swaps, and hedging activities.

 

As mentioned above, the Company has occasionally purchased interest rate swaps from other financial institutions to hedge large, fixed-rate loans or to mitigate the interest rate risk in pools of fixed-rate loans. The Company’s use of derivative instruments is discussed in Note 23 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The Company has not purchased any securities arising out of a highly leveraged transaction and its investment policy prohibits the purchase of any securities of less than investment grade or so-called “junk bonds.”

 

MONEY MARKET INSTRUMENTS—FEDERAL FUNDS SOLD, SECURITIES PURCHASED UNDER AGREEMENTS TO RESELL, AND COMMERCIAL PAPER

 

Cash in excess of amounts projected to be needed for operations over the next several months is generally placed in securities. Cash in excess of amounts immediately needed for operations is generally lent to other financial institutions as Federal funds sold or as securities purchased under agreements to resell (for brevity termed “reverse repos”). Both transactions are overnight loans. Federal funds sold are unsecured; reverse repos are secured.

 

Excess cash expected to be available for slightly longer periods may be used to purchase short-term securities or commercial paper. Commercial paper instruments are short-term notes issued by companies. They are actively traded among investors after issuance. As a percentage of average earning assets, the amount of these instruments tends to vary based on changes and differences in short-term market rates. The amount is also impacted in the first quarter of the year by the large cash flows associated with the tax refund loan and transfer programs.

 

The one-day term of the Federal funds sold and reverse repos means that they are highly liquid as the funds are returned to the Company the next day and they are not subject to market risk. Commercial paper issued by highly-rated domestic companies is highly liquid as there is an active market for these instruments should the Company desire to sell them before their maturity. However, commercial paper is subject to market risk, should interest rates change while it is held by the Company.

 

36


Table of Contents

The highly liquid nature of these money market instruments results in a relatively low earnings rate. The average rate earned in 2004 was 1.17%. For 2003 and 2002, the average rates earned were 1.22% and 1.75%, respectively. As discussed below in “Liquidity,” the Company has developed and maintains numerous other sources of liquidity than these overnight and short-term funds. The Company determined that in the current low rate environment earnings would be improved by investing more of the available funds in securities at higher rates even if it would need to resort to borrowing from other sources of liquidity more often. Therefore, the Company reduced the average balance of funds held in these instruments and increased securities.

 

LOAN PORTFOLIO

 

The Company offers a wide variety of loan types and terms to customers along with very competitive pricing and quick delivery of the credit decision. Table 7 sets forth the distribution of the Company’s loans at the end of each of the last five years.

 

The amounts shown in the table for each category are net of the deferred or unamortized loan origination, extension, and commitment fees and the deferred origination costs for loans in that category. These net deferred fees and costs included in the loan totals are shown for information at the bottom of the table. These deferred amounts are amortized over the lives of the loans to which they relate.

 

Growth in Portfolio and Loan Sales

 

The year-end balance for all loans increased about $221 million from the end of 2001 to the end of 2002, about $161 million from the end of 2002 to the end of 2003 and about $881 million from the end of 2003 to the end of 2004. Approximately $419 million of the growth during 2004 was due to the acquisition of PCCI. All of the categories reported in Table 7 on page 39 showed growth during 2004. Most of the categories also showed growth in 2002 and 2003.

 

From time to time the Company sells loans. The balances would be higher were it not for these sales. The sales are transacted for several reasons which are discussed below as they relate to each loan category.

 

Loan Categories

 

The Company makes both adjustable rate and fixed rate 1-4 family mortgage loans. In prior years, the Company retained the adjustable loans and sold the fixed rate loans to minimize market risk. In the last several years, because low rates have increased the rate with which borrowers have prepaid their loans, the Company has retained some of the fixed rate loans in order to help maintain the interest income. The Company originated $153 million of residential real estate loans in 2002 and sold $56 million. It originated $226 million of these loans in 2003 and sold $73 million. In 2004, loan originations slowed as rising interest rates slowed refinance activity. Loan balances in this category grew $93 million during 2004.

 

Construction and development loans increased $36 million in 2004. The portfolio is primarily comprised of owner-developed residential and commercial properties with the outstanding lending commitment less than $1 million. This loan category is probably the most volatile because developer activity is most subject to changes in the economic cycle. The balances at December 31, 2003 and 2002 were $250 million and $289 million, respectively.

 

Consumer loans increased $44 million from 2003 to 2004. As with the construction category, none of this growth was the result of the PCCI acquisition. The slower rate of growth in 2003 had been reflective of several factors. As noted above, loan demand in general was slower in 2003 than in 2002 as the economy continued to remain flat. While they had held up for much of 2001 and 2002, consumer confidence levels were finally impacted by the economic news. In 2004, economic recovery appeared more obvious and consumer confidence increased.

 

This category includes the Company’s program of indirect auto loans—the purchase of loans originated by dealers. The Company has entered into indirect financing agreements with a number

 

37


Table of Contents

of automobile dealers whereby the Company purchases loans dealers have made to customers. While automobile dealers frequently provide financing to customers through manufacturers’ finance subsidiaries, some customers prefer loan terms that are not included in the standard dealer packages. Other customers are purchasing used cars not covered by the manufacturers’ programs. Based on parameters agreed to by the Company, the dealer makes the loan to the customer and then sells the loan to the Company.

 

This program is neither a factoring nor a flooring arrangement. The individual customers, not the dealers, are the borrowers and thus there is no large concentration of credit risk. In addition, there is a review of underwriting practices of a dealer prior to acceptance into the program. This is done to ensure process integrity, to protect the Company’s reputation, and to monitor compliance with consumer loan laws and regulations.

 

Growth in this line was slow in 2003 because, with the economy slow, auto sales were sluggish and auto manufacturers reintroduced 0% financing to increase sales. This made the Company’s auto loan programs temporarily less competitive. In addition, the Company did not add as many dealers to the program as it had in previous years. There were approximately $207 million of such loans included in the consumer loan total below for December 31, 2003, as compared with $192 million at December 31, 2002. In 2004, auto sales picked up and the balance of these loans was $236 million at the end of the year.

 

In Table 7 below, consumer loans are shown to have decreased from year-end 2000 to year-end 2001. This decrease is attributable to a sale of $58.2 million of the indirect auto loans included in consumer loan category through a securitization for the purposes of capital management. This purpose is described in the section below titled “Capital Resources.”

 

Home equity loans and small business commercial equipment leasing both experienced significant percentage increases in 2004, 53% for the former, and 55% for the latter. Aggressive marketing efforts and the improving economy accounted for the growth. None of the PCCI loans were in these categories. In 2003 and 2002, growth was slower for these categories. In the case of commercial equipment leasing, the slower growth was due to slower business expansion given the more uncertain economy. Home equity loans grew more in 2004 that the two prior years because of a more aggressive sales program begun in 2004.

 

Commercial loans increased by $101 million during 2004, as the economy continues its recovery and businesses are gaining confidence to increase their activity. Approximately $37 million of this growth was acquired with PCCI.

 

Most of PCCI’s loans were in the commercial or non residential real estate loan category, and the acquisition added $376 million. The Company added another $108 million in this category during 2004. In this category as well, the recovering economy was evident as the Company added only $35 million in 2003.

 

Most of the loans made to municipalities are in support of low-cost housing projects being built by housing agencies.

 

38


Table of Contents

TABLE 7—Loan Portfolio Analysis by Category

 

     December 31,
(dollars in thousands)      2004      2003      2002      2001      2000

Real estate:

                                  

Residential

   $ 892,705    $ 799,793    $ 691,160    $ 728,026    $ 586,904

Multi-family residential

     182,936      121,750      83,787      90,438      73,504

Nonresidential

     1,114,114      732,231      733,187      503,237      491,052

Construction and development

     286,387      249,976      289,017      185,264      172,331

Commercial, industrial, and agricultural

     782,475      680,679      644,623      874,294      775,365

Home equity lines

     212,064      138,422      116,704      85,025      71,289

Consumer

     340,623      296,286      288,040      187,949      205,992

Leases

     230,035      148,504      134,104      126,744      129,159

Municipal tax-exempt obligations

     18,135      11,419      30,166      8,043      4,102

Other

     2,820      1,819      9,032      10,072      7,406

  

  

  

  

  

Total loans

   $ 4,062,294    $ 3,180,879    $ 3,019,820    $ 2,799,092    $ 2,517,104

  

  

  

  

  

Net deferred fees

   $ 7,107    $ 5,380    $ 5,313    $ 4,908    $ 5,813

 

The terms of approximately two-thirds of the balance of loans held by the Company involve some repricing characteristic that reflect changes in interest rates—either they immediately reprice as some external index such as prime rate changes or they reprice periodically based on the then current value of an index. Nonetheless, fixed rate loans still make up a significant portion of the portfolio, and to the extent that even the variable rate loans do not reprice immediately, the same interest rate and liquidity risks that apply to securities are also applicable to lending activity. Fixed-rate loans and loans that only periodically reprice are subject to market risk—they decline in value as interest rates rise and rise in value as interest rates decrease with the exception of the residential real estate loans, the Company’s loans that have fixed rates generally have relatively short maturities, which effectively lessens the sensitivity to changes in value from market risk. With the exception of some of the residential real estate loans that have an extended period before their first repricing, the loans that reprice periodically usually do so frequently, i.e. at least annually. The fixed rate residential real estate loans have longer maturities and less frequent repricings, but do have monthly principal amortization that at least permits the repricing of those principal payments.

 

The table in Note 25 shows that at December 31, 2003, the excess of fair value over carrying value was $54.5 million or 1.7%. At December 31, 2004, there was an excess of carrying value over fair value of $39.1 million. This excess represents 1.0% of the carrying value. This change of position is due to (1) the repricings that took place during the first half of 2004 that reset interest rates on some of the loans at lower rates than they had been earning and then (2) the increase in interest rates during the second half of the year that caused those loans and others recently originated to earn less than the new higher market rate.

 

Table 8 shows the scheduled maturity of selected loan types outstanding as of December 31, 2003, and shows the proportion of fixed and floating rate loans for each type. Net deferred loan origination, extension, and commitment fees are also not shown in the table. There is no maturity or interest sensitivity associated with the fees because they have been collected in advance.

 

39


Table of Contents

TABLE 8—Maturities and Sensitivities of Selected

Loan Types to Changes in Interest Rates

 

(in thousands)

   Due in
one year
or less
   Due after
one year
to five
years
   Due after
five years

Commercial, industrial, and agricultural

                    

Floating rate

   $ 398,380    $ 142,237    $ 122,050

Fixed rate

     23,032      72,475      24,301

Real estate—construction and development

                    

Floating rate

     194,866      40,953      24,153

Fixed rate

     9,805      6,911      9,699

Real estate—residential

                    

Floating rate

     1,364      10,164      447,990

Fixed rate

     72      28      433,087

Municipal tax-exempt obligations

     42      5,707      12,386

  

  

  

Total

   $ 627,561    $ 278,475    $ 1,073,666

  

  

  

 

The amortization and short maturities generally present in the Company’s fixed rate loans also help to maintain the liquidity of the portfolio and reduce credit risk. However, they result in lower interest income if rates are falling because the cash received from monthly principal payments is reinvested at lower rates. At present, except for the specific market risk incurred by the decision to hold some of the fixed-rate residential and non-residential real estate mortgages, Management prefers to incur market risk from longer maturities in the securities portfolios, and avoid such risk in the loan portfolio. The reason for this preference is that, aside from residential mortgages, there are more limited secondary markets for longer-term loans than for longer-term securities. In the event that the Company should want to sell such loans for either liquidity or capital management reasons when interest rates are above the original issue rates, the loss taken would be greater than for the sale of securities with comparable maturities (Note Q).

 

Potential Problem Loans:  From time to time, Management has reason to believe that certain borrowers may not be able to repay their loans within the parameters of the present repayment terms, even though, in some cases, the loans are current at the time. These loans are regarded as potential problem loans, and a portion of the allowance is assigned and/or allocated, as discussed below, to cover the Company’s exposure to loss should the borrowers indeed fail to perform according to the terms of the notes. This class of loans does not include loans in a nonaccrual status or 90 days or more delinquent but still accruing, which are shown in Table 11.

 

At year-end 2004, potential problem loans amounted to $90.8 million or 2.2% of the portfolio. The corresponding amounts for 2003 and 2002 were $92.4 million or 2.9% of the portfolio and $122.7 million or 4.1% of the portfolio, respectively. The 2004 amount is comprised of loans of all types.

 

Other Loan Portfolio Information

 

Other information about the loan portfolio that may be helpful to readers of the financial statements follows.

 

Adjustable rate residential loans:  The adjustable loans generally have low initial “teaser” rates. While these loans have interest rate “caps,” all are repriced to a market rate of interest within a reasonable time. A few loans have payment caps that would result in negative amortization if interest rates rise appreciably.

 

Foreign Loans:  The Company does not assume foreign credit risk through either loan or deposit products. However, the Company does make loans to borrowers that have foreign operations and/or have foreign customers. Economic and currency developments in the international markets may therefore affect our domestic customers’ activities.

 

40


Table of Contents

Participations, Syndications and Multibank Facilities:  Occasionally in the ordinary course of business, the Company will participate in a credit facility, that is, it will sell or will purchase a portion of a loan to or from another bank. The usual reasons that banks sell or participate loans are (1) to stay within their regulatory maximum limit for loans to any one borrower; (2) to reduce the concentration of lending activity to a particular industry or geographical area or otherwise diversify risk; (3) to manage regulatory capital ratios; and (4) to provide services to large clients in their serving area. Occasionally, a portion of another bank’s loan may be purchased or participated in by the Company when the originating bank is unable to lend the whole amount under its regulatory lending limit to its borrower or wishes to diversify risk, or the borrower requests that the Company be involved in its financing process. This is done only if the loan represents a good investment for the Company and the borrower or project is in one of the Company’s market areas. In these cases, the Company conducts its own independent credit review and formal approval prior to committing to purchase. The Company has no ongoing commitments in place with other banks to participate or sell loans.

 

Loan to Value Ratio:  One of the underwriting criteria for loans is the loan to collateral value ratio. Depending on the type of project, policy limits for real estate construction and development loans range from 60-90% of the appraised value of the collateral. For permanent real estate loans, the policy limits generally are 75% of the appraised value for commercial property loans and 80% for residential real estate property loans. Mortgage insurance is generally required on most residential real estate loans with a loan to value ratio in excess of 80%. Such loans, which can reach up to 90% loan to appraised value, are strictly underwritten according to mortgage insurance standards. The above policy limits are sometimes exceeded when the loan is being originated for sale to another institution that does lend at higher ratios and the sale is immediate; when the exception is temporary; or when other special circumstances apply. There are other specific loan to collateral limits for commercial, industrial and agricultural loans which are secured by non-real estate collateral. The adequacy of such limits is generally established based on outside asset valuations and/or by an assessment of the financial condition and cash flow of the borrower, and the purpose of the loan. Consumer loans that are secured by collateral also have loan to collateral limits which are based on the loan type and amount, the nature of the collateral, and other financial factors on the borrower.

 

Loan Concentrations:  The concentration profile of the Company’s loans is discussed in Note 17 to the accompanying Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Loan Sales and Servicing Rights:  Most loans sold are sold “servicing released” and the purchaser takes over the collection of the payments. However, some are sold with “servicing retained” and the Company continues to receive the payments from the borrower and forwards the funds to the purchaser. The Company earns a fee for this service. The sales are made without recourse, that is, the purchaser cannot look to the Company in the event the borrower does not perform according to the terms of the note.

 

GAAP requires companies engaged in mortgage banking activities to recognize the rights to service mortgage or other loans for others as separate assets. For loans sold, a portion of the investment in the loan is ascribed to the right to receive this fee for servicing less adequate compensation and this value is recorded as a gain on sale and as a receivable. The amount of the gain and receivable recorded is the net present value of the servicing fees to be received over the expected lives of the mortgages. The servicing rights are amortized in proportion to and over the life of the loans as a charge against income. Management periodically reviews the anticipated lives of the loans. When interest rates decline, borrowers prepay their loans more often and consequently, the net present value declines. As explained in Note 10, the Company has established a valuation allowance to recognize changes in the fair value of the asset due to changes in estimated rates of prepayments. Net of this valuation allowance, the balance of this separate asset was $537,000 and $1.7 million at December 31, 2003 and 2004, respectively. The activity in the asset and valuation accounts is shown in a table in Note 10.

 

41


Table of Contents

ALLOWANCE FOR CREDIT LOSSES

 

Credit risk is inherent in the business of extending loans and leases to individuals, partnerships, and corporations. The Company sets aside an allowance or reserve for credit losses through charges to earnings. These charges are shown in the Consolidated Statements of Income as provision for credit losses. All specifically identifiable and quantifiable losses are immediately charged off against the allowance. However, for a variety of reasons, not all losses that have occurred are immediately made known to the Company and of those that are known, the full extent of the loss may not be able to be specifically quantified. The allowance for credit losses is an estimate of losses that have occurred but have not been identified or are not currently quantifiable. In this discussion, “loans” include the lease contracts purchased and originated by the Company.

 

Determination of the Adequacy of the Allowance for Credit Losses and the Allocation Process

 

The Company formally determines the adequacy of the allowance on a quarterly basis. This determination is based on the periodic assessment of the credit quality or “grading” of loans. Loans are initially graded when originated. They are re-graded as they are renewed, when there is a new loan to the same borrower, when identified facts demonstrate heightened risk of nonpayment, or if they become delinquent. Re-grading of larger problem loans will occur at least quarterly. Confirmation of the quality of the grading process is obtained both by independent credit reviews conducted by firms specifically hired by the Company for this purpose and by banking examiners.

 

After reviewing the gradings in the loan portfolio, the second step is to assign or allocate a portion of the allowance to groups of loans and to individual loans to cover Management’s estimate of the loss that may be present in these loans. Allocation is related to the grade and other factors, and is done by the methods discussed in Note 1.

 

The last step is to compare the amounts allocated for estimated losses to the current available allowance. To the extent that the current allowance is insufficient to cover the estimate of unidentified losses, Management records additional provision for credit loss. If the allowance is greater than appears to be required at that point in time, provision expense is adjusted accordingly.

 

Consistent with GAAP and with the methodologies used in estimating the unidentified losses in the loan portfolio, the allowance is comprised of several components. These components are described in Note 1.

 

Uncertainties in Determining the Adequacy of the Allowance for Credit Losses

 

The process of determining an estimate of unidentified and/or unquantifiable losses inherently involves uncertainty. Among the sources of this uncertainty are the following:

 

·   There are limitations to any credit risk grading process. The volume of loans makes it impracticable to re-grade every loan every quarter. Therefore, it is possible that some currently performing loans not recently graded will not be as strong as their last grading and an insufficient portion of the allowance will have been allocated to them. Grading and loan review often must be done without knowing whether all relevant facts are at hand. Troubled borrowers may inadvertently or deliberately omit important information from reports or conversations with lending officers regarding their financial condition and the diminished strength of repayment sources.
·   Neither the historical loss factors nor the review of specific individual loans give consideration to interdependencies between borrowers, yet this could impact the magnitude of losses inherent in the portfolios. For example, a rise in interest rates may adversely impact the amount of home mortgage lending. This could cause a reduction in the amount of home building initiated by developers, and this could have an impact on the credit quality of loans to building contractors in the commercial or construction segments of the portfolio. This kind of interdependency could cause losses within a specific period to be greater than would be predicted by the simple application of historical loss rates.

 

42


Table of Contents
· The loss estimation factors do not give consideration to the seasoning of the portfolios. Seasoning is relevant because losses are less likely to occur in loans that have been performing satisfactorily for several years than in loans that are more recent. In addition, term loans usually have monthly scheduled payments of principal and interest. With a term loan, a missed or late payment gives an immediate signal of a decline in credit quality. However, most of the Company’s commercial loans and lines of credit have short-term maturities and frequently require only interest payments until maturity. Because they have shorter maturities and lack regular principal amortization, the process of seasoning does not occur and the signaling of the missed principal payment is not available.

 

The Company addresses these uncertainties in the allocated component of the allowance as discussed in Note 1.

 

Assignment Table

 

Table 9A shows the amounts of allowance assigned for the last five years to each loan type disclosed in Table 7. It also shows the percentage of balances for each loan type to total loans. In general, it would be expected that those types of loans which have historically more loss associated with them will have a proportionally larger amount of the allowance assigned to them than do loans which have less risk.

 

It would also be expected that the amount assigned for any particular category of loan will increase or decrease proportionately to both the changes in the loan balances and to increases or decreases in the estimated loss in loans of that category. Occasionally, changes in the amount assigned to a specific loan category will vary from changes in the total loan balance for that category due to the impact of the changes in credit rating for larger individual loans. The reduction in assigned allowance overall, and specifically in the categories of construction and development, and commercial, industrial and agricultural between 2002 and 2003 is attributable to two events. The first is the resolution by sale of a large hospitality related troubled loan in the first category, and the second is the restructuring of a significant agricultural loan relationship in the wine industry included in the second category.

 

In general, changes in the risk profile of the various parts of the loan portfolio should be reflected in the allowance assignment. There is no assignment of allowance to RALs at December 31, 2004 because all of these loans not repaid are charged-off prior to year-end.

 

43


Table of Contents

TABLE 9A—Assignment of the Allowance for Credit Losses

 

(dollars in thousands)

 

          December 31,
  2004

  2003

  2002

  2001

  2000

      Amount   Percent
of Loans
to Total
Loans
    Amount   Percent
of Loans
to Total
Loans
    Amount   Percent
of Loans
to Total
Loans
    Amount   Percent
of Loans
to Total
Loans
    Amount   Percent
of Loans
to Total
Loans

Real estate:

                                                 

Residential

  $ 2,031   22.0%   $ 3,196   25.1%   $ 2,844   24.9%   $ 2,927   26.0%   $ 2,826   23.3%

Multi-family residential*

    613   4.5%                                        

Nonresidential

    5,080   31.9%     6,442   26.7%     5,260   19.7%     4,751   21.2%     3,903   22.4%

Construction and development

    1,233   7.0%     1,726   7.9%     4,681   7.4%     1,174   6.6%     1,071   6.9%

Commercial, industrial, and agricultural

    22,771   19.3%     21,824   21.5%     23,775   29.3%     26,352   31.2%     17,806   30.8%

Home equity lines

    797   5.2%     641   4.4%     800   3.8%     377   3.0%     257   2.8%

Consumer

    11,413   8.4%     9,455   9.3%     10,001   8.9%     7,569   6.7%     4,863   8.2%

Leases

    10,039   5.7%     6,266   4.7%     6,460   4.4%     5,669   4.5%     3,853   5.1%

Municipal tax-exempt obligations

      0.4%       0.4%       1.0%       0.3%       0.2%

Other

      0.1%       0.0%       0.4%       0.4%     26   0.3%

Not specifically allocated

                            53         520    

 

 
 

 
 

 
 

 
 

 

Total allowance

  $ 53,977   100.0%   $ 49,550   100.0%   $ 53,821   100.0%   $ 48,872   100.0%   $ 35,125   100.0%

 

 
 

 
 

 
 

 
 

 

Allowance for credit loss as a percentage of year-end loans

    1.33%         1.56%         1.78%         1.75%         1.40%    

Year-end loans

  $ 4,062,294       $ 3,180,879       $ 3,019,820       $ 2,799,092       $ 2,517,104    

 

*In prior years, multi-family residential loans were included in the nonresidential category.

 

At the bottom of Table 9A is the ratio of the allowance for credit losses to total loans for each of the last five years. At the bottom of Table 11 is the ratio of the allowance for credit losses to nonperforming loans. While the Company does not determine its allowance for credit loss by attempting to achieve particular target ratios, the Company nonetheless computes its ratios and compares them with peer ratios as a check on its methodology. The ratio of the allowance to total loans is lower at the end of 2004 compared to the ratios at the end of prior years while the ratio of the allowance to nonperforming loans is higher than at the end of the two prior years. These changes occurred for several reasons.

 

The first is that the Company has experienced a generally positive trend in credit quality in its portfolios, with more loans moving to more favorable classifications in 2004 than moving to less favorable. In the Company’s allowance methodology, this trend would lessen the need for as much allowance.

 

Secondly, much of the growth in the loan portfolio during 2004 occurred in residential, commercial real estate, and commercial loans, all of which have relatively low historical charge-off rates. Consequently, loan growth was disproportionate to the need for additional allowance for credit losses.

 

Thirdly, the charge-off of loans changes the numerator and denominators of these ratios differently. For example, a portion of the allowance at the end of 2002 was allocated to two nonperforming loans discussed on page 48 below. As explained in that discussion, one of these loans was sold at a discount in 2003. The discount was charged against the allowance for credit losses, reducing the numerator of the allowance to total loans and the allowance to nonperforming loans ratios. The nonperforming loan was removed from both the total for all loans and the total for nonperforming loans, the denominator for the respective ratios. The percentage reduction of allowance was greater than the percentage reduction for total loans, lowering the first ratio, but less than the percentage

 

44


Table of Contents

reduction in nonperforming loans, raising the second ratio. The second loan was restructured with a portion charged-off. The amount charged-off lowered the amount of the allowance by about an equal amount as it lowered the total for nonperforming loans, and consequently, the ratio of allowance to nonperforming loans was not impacted. However, the amount charged-off lowered the amount of the allowance by more than it lowered the balance of total loans and consequently, the ratio of allowance total loans decreased.

 

CREDIT LOSSES

 

Table 9B, “Summary of Credit Loss Experience,” shows the additions to, charge-offs against, and recoveries for the Company’s allowance for credit losses. Also shown is the ratio of charge-offs to average loans for each of the last five years.

 

TABLE 9B—Summary of Credit Loss Experience

 

(dollars in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,
     2004    2003    2002    2001    2000

Balance of allowance for credit losses at beginning of year

   $ 49,550    $ 53,821    $ 48,872    $ 35,125    $ 30,454

  

  

  

  

  

Charge-offs:

                                  

Real estate:

                                  

Residential

                    457      112

Multi-family residential *

                                

Nonresidential

     6      369      12           107

Construction and development

          1,469           127     

Commercial, industrial, and agricultural

     8,489      11,982      14,032      7,490      8,118

Tax refund anticipation

     12,511      13,712      6,615      9,189      6,226

Other consumer

     7,266      6,769      4,144      6,046      1,910

  

  

  

  

  

Total charge-offs

     28,272      34,301      24,803      23,309      16,473

  

  

  

  

  

Recoveries:

                                  

Real estate:

                                  

Residential

     27      2      302      93      65

Multi-family residential *

                                

Nonresidential

     2      12      296      228      184

Construction and development

     513                    

Commercial, industrial, and agricultural

     8,315      4,136      3,926      3,918      1,255

Home equity lines

                         26

Tax refund anticipation

     4,043      5,182      4,510      4,769      3,059

Other consumer

     1,847      2,412      991      1,377      976

  

  

  

  

  

Total recoveries

     14,747      11,744      10,025      10,385      5,565

  

  

  

  

  

Net charge-offs      13,525      22,557      14,778      12,924      10,908

Allowance for credit losses recorded in acquisition transactions

     5,143                     1,139

Provision for credit losses refund anticipation loans

     8,468      8,530      2,105      4,420      2,726
Provision for credit losses all other loans      4,341      9,756      17,622      22,251      11,714

  

  

  

  

  

Balance at end of year

   $ 53,977    $ 49,550    $ 53,821    $ 48,872    $ 35,125

  

  

  

  

  

 

45


Table of Contents
(dollars in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,  
     2004     2003     2002     2001     2000  

Ratio of net charge-offs to average loans outstanding

     0.36 %     0.72 %     0.50 %     0.48 %     0.46 %

Ratio of net charge-offs to average loans outstanding exclusive of RALs

     0.14 %     0.46 %     0.44 %     0.33 %     0.33 %

Peer ratio of net charge-offs to average loans outstanding

     0.37 %     0.59 %     0.88 %     1.03 %     0.70 %

Average RALs

   $ 102,769     $ 121,659     $ 67,991     $ 58,900     $ 60,437  

Average loans, net of RALs

     3,702,100       3,029,669       2,874,091       2,619,325       2,328,303  

  


 


 


 


 


Average loans

   $ 3,804,869     $ 3,151,328     $ 2,942,082     $ 2,678,225     $ 2,388,740  

  


 


 


 


 


RAL net charge-offs

   $ 8,468     $ 8,530     $ 2,105     $ 4,194     $ 3,167  

Net charge-offs, exclusive of RALs

     5,057       14,027       12,673       8,730       7,741  

  


 


 


 


 


Net charge-offs

   $ 13,525     $ 22,557     $ 14,778     $ 12,924     $ 10,908  

  


 


 


 


 


Recoveries to charge-offs, RALs

     32.32 %     37.79 %     68.18 %     51.90 %     49.13 %

Recoveries to charge-offs, other loans

     67.91 %     31.87 %     30.32 %     39.77 %     24.46 %

Recoveries to charge-offs

     52.16 %     34.24 %     40.42 %     44.55 %     33.78 %

 

*In prior years, multi-family residential loans were included in the nonresidential category.

 

There are only two other banks in the country that have national RAL programs. Therefore, for comparability, net charge-offs and the net charge-off ratios for the Company are shown both with and without the RAL net charge-offs. Exclusive of RALs, with the exception of 2003, the Company’s ratios have consistently been less than half of its FDIC peers (Note L). Net charge-offs for the Company increased in 2003 as a result of the charge-offs taken that were related to resolving two large nonaccrual loans.

 

Large pools of loans made up of numerous smaller loans tend to have consistent loss ratios. The Company’s concentration in loans secured by nonresidential real estate and other larger loans in the commercial category may cause a higher level of volatility in credit losses than would otherwise be the case. A group consisting of a smaller number of larger loans in the same industry is statistically less consistent and losses may tend to occur at roughly the same time. Because the amount of loss is not consistent period to period, the estimate of loss and therefore the amount of allowance adequate to cover losses inherent in the portfolio cannot be determined simply by reference to net charge-offs in the prior year or years.

 

During 1999 and 2000, the Company charged-off approximately $7 million related to one loan, but for which it had some prospect of recovery. In fact, the Company recovered approximately $3.3 million of this loan in 2001. Exclusive of RALs, this recovery resulted in the Company’s net charge-off ratio to total loans—0.33%—being slightly less than a third that of its peers—1.03%. In 2002, the Company’s net charge-off ratio to total loans exclusive of RALs—0.44%—increased as customers were impacted by the slower economy.

 

Table 9B shows a slightly higher ratio of net charge-offs to total loans (exclusive of RALs) for 2003—0.46%—compared to 2002. This ratio was substantially impacted by the partial charge-offs taken in resolving the two nonperforming loans mentioned above on page 44 and below on page 48. Aside from these two loans, the ratio would have been approximately 10 basis points lower.

 

The ratio of net charge-offs to total loans exclusive of RALs for 2004—0.14%—was substantially lower than prior years as both recoveries increased and charge-offs decreased in the more favorable economy.

 

The Company has exposure to credit losses from extending loan commitments and letters of credit as well as from loans and leases. Because funds have not yet been disbursed on these commitments

 

46


Table of Contents

and letters of credit, the face amount is not included in the amounts reported for loans and leases outstanding. Consequently, any amount provided for credit losses related to these instruments is not included in the allowance for credit losses reported in the table above, but is instead accounted for as a loss contingency. The recording of this separate liability is accomplished by a charge to other operating expense as explained in Note 17 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. During 2003 and 2004, the Company funded two of the letters of credit issued for one borrower for $5.9 million. The Company immediately wrote off these amounts because of concerns for the customer’s ability to repay.

 

TABLE 10—Off-balance Sheet Estimates

 

(dollars in thousands)    Years ended December 31,
       2004       2003       2002

Beginning estimate

   $ 3,942     $ 2,446     $ 302

Additions and other changes

     50       4,624       2,144

Funded and written-off

     (2,760 )     (3,128 )    

  


 


 

Ending estimate

   $ 1,232     $ 3,942     $ 2,446

  


 


 

 

NONACCRUAL, PAST DUE, AND RESTRUCTURED LOANS

 

Table 11 summarizes the Company’s nonaccrual and past due loans for the last five years.

 

Past Due Loans:  Included in the amounts listed below as 90 days or more past due are commercial and industrial, real estate, and a diversity of secured consumer loans. These loans are well secured and in the process of collection. These figures do not include loans in nonaccrual status.

 

Nonaccrual Loans:  If there is reasonable doubt as to the collectibility of principal or interest on a loan, the loan is placed in nonaccrual status, i.e., the Company stops accruing income from the interest on the loan and reverses any uncollected interest that had been accrued but not collected. These loans may or may not be collateralized. Collection efforts are being pursued on all nonaccrual loans. Consumer loans are an exception to this reclassification. They are charged-off when they become delinquent by more than 120 days if unsecured and 150 days if secured. Nonetheless, collection efforts are still pursued.

 

Restructured Loans:  The Company’s restructured loans have generally been classified as nonaccrual even after the restructuring. Consequently, they have been included with other nonaccrual loans in Table 11. There have been no restructured loans at the end of the last five years that have not been classified as nonaccrual.

 

The following table sets forth information regarding risk elements.

 

TABLE 11—Risk Elements

 

(dollars in thousands)    December 31,  
       2004       2003       2002       2001       2000  

Nonaccrual loans

   $ 21,701     $ 42,412     $ 59,818     $ 16,940     $ 15,975  

90 days or more past due

     820       763       1,709       3,179       2,427  

Restructured Loans

                              

  


 


 


 


 


Total noncurrent loans

     22,521       43,175       61,527       20,119       18,402  

Foreclosed collateral

     2,910             438              

  


 


 


 


 


Total nonperforming assets

   $ 25,431     $ 43,175     $ 61,965     $ 20,119     $ 18,402  

  


 


 


 


 


Total noncurrent loans as percentage of total loan portfolio

     0.55 %     1.36 %     2.04 %     0.72 %     0.73 %

Allowance for credit losses as a percentage of nonperforming loans

     240 %     115 %     87 %     243 %     191 %

 

47


Table of Contents

In 2002, there was an increase in nonaccrual loans. Approximately $30 million, or three quarters of this increase, related to two credit relationships. One of these was in the hospitality industry and the other in the wine industry. Weaknesses in the credit quality of these loans had been identified in the fourth quarter of 2001 and allowance was allocated to them in that quarter and additional amounts in the first and second quarters of 2002. While payments were still being made according to the contractual terms of notes, these loans were placed in nonaccrual in the second half of 2002. The amount of the estimated loss had not become greater, but the probability of loss became great enough to warrant stopping the recognition of interest income. These loans were classified as impaired. An allowance of $6.5 million was specifically established for them.

 

By the end of 2003, nonaccrual loans had declined substantially to $42.4 million. Much of this reduction is specifically attributed to the sale by the Company of the loan to the distressed hospitality entity mentioned in the preceding paragraph. The loan was sold for more than the outstanding amount of the loan less the allowance that had been provided. The balance of the reduction in nonaccrual loans during 2003 is attributable to substantial resolution or collection of a number of troubled loans representing different industries consistent with the improvement in our economy and the Company’s portfolio diversification. The nonaccrual loan total continues to include the large wine related credit referred to in the discussion of 2002 events above. However, that loan relationship has been restructured such that it has been upgraded to the substandard classification and is paying according to the restructured terms. The outstanding balance at the time of the restructure was $15.1 million. The amount of allowance that had been allocated to the loans in this relationship was $4.4 million. $3.5 million was charged-off in the restructuring and $0.9 million of allowance was made available for other loans, lowering provision expense by that amount from what otherwise would have needed to be provided. In 2004, $1.7 million of the amount charged-off on this loan was recovered.

 

Table 12 sets forth interest income from nonaccrual loans in the portfolio at year-end that was not recognized.

 

TABLE 12—Foregone Interest

 

(dollars in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,
       2004      2003      2002

Interest that would have been recorded under the loans’ original terms

   $ 1,411    $ 1,536    $ 1,550

Gross interest recorded

     241      657      711

  

  

  

Foregone interest

   $ 1,170    $ 879    $ 839

  

  

  

 

DEPOSITS

 

An important component in analyzing net interest margin and, therefore, the results of operations of the Company is the composition and cost of the deposit base. Net interest margin is improved to the extent that growth in deposits can be focused in the lower cost core deposit accounts—demand deposits, NOW accounts, and savings. The average daily amount of deposits by category and the average rates paid on such deposits is summarized for the periods indicated in Table 13.

 

48


Table of Contents

TABLE 13—Detailed Deposit Summary

 

(dollars in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,  
     2004

    2003

    2002

 
      
 
Average
Balance
   Rate      
 
Average
Balance
   Rate      
 
Average
Balance
   Rate  

NOW accounts

   $ 741,864    0.48 %   $ 469,122    0.13 %   $ 411,787    0.19 %

Money market deposit accounts

     761,469    0.84       853,890    1.01       748,258    1.29  

Savings accounts

     397,294    0.62       268,031    0.38       231,968    0.62  

Time certificates of deposit for $100,000 or more

     898,225    1.96       729,019    1.87       702,639    2.41  

Time certificates of deposit for less than $100,000 and IRAs

     548,983    2.20       511,296    2.40       525,043    3.45  

  

        

  

 

      

Interest-bearing deposits

     3,347,835    1.26 %     2,831,358    1.28 %     2,619,695    1.79 %

Demand deposits

     1,046,870            909,915            810,008       

  

        

        

      

Total Deposits

   $ 4,394,705          $ 3,741,273          $ 3,429,703       

  

        

        

      

 

Trends in Interest Expense Rates

 

The average rate paid on all deposits decreased from 1.79% in 2002 to 1.28% in 2003 and in 2004 to 1.26%. The decreases from 2002 to 2003 were primarily due to the changes in interest rates brought about by FOMC actions (Note M). The average rates that are paid on deposits generally trail behind these money market rate changes for three reasons: (1) financial institutions do not try to change deposit rates with each small increase or decrease in short-term rates; (2) in the low interest-rate environment of 2002 through 2004, banks were not able to decrease deposit rates as much as the FOMC decreased its Federal funds target rates; and (3) with time deposit accounts, even when new offering rates are established, the average rates paid during the year are a blend of the rates paid on individual accounts. Only new accounts and those that mature and are renewed will bear the new rate.

 

In late 2003, the Company introduced a suite of no-fee checking accounts. Most of the growth in 2004 in demand and NOW accounts comes from these products. One product in the suite is a high balance, high interest account, resulting in the increase in the average rate for the NOW category compared to 2003.

 

The relatively large increase in the balance of savings accounts during 2004 was the result of the acquisition of PCCI, which had about 40% of its deposits comprised of business savings accounts. These accounts pay a higher rate of interest than individual savings accounts resulting in an increase in the average rate paid for this category over the rate paid in 2003.

 

Through the date of this report, the FOMC raised its target rate again in 2005 in late January. Management expects that short-term interest rates will continue to increase during 2005. Deposit rates are expected to increase though they will lag the FOMC actions. Just as the Company was unable to decrease the rates on administered rate deposit accounts by the same amount as the FOMC decreased its target rate, it is unlikely that banks will increase their rates by as much as the FOMC increases its target rate.

 

Certificates of Deposit of $100,000 or More

 

Table 14 discloses the distribution of maturities of CDs of $100,000 or more at the end of each of the last three years.

 

49


Table of Contents

TABLE 14—Maturity Distribution of Time

Certificates of Deposit of $100,000 or More

 

(in thousands)    December 31,
     2004    2003    2002

Three months or less

   $ 250,406    $ 281,295    $ 251,004

Over three months through six months

     268,656      229,313      213,521

Over six months through one year

     196,523      135,326      123,222

Over one year

     275,224      188,885      136,055

  

  

  

     $ 990,809    $ 834,819    $ 723,802

  

  

  

 

FDIC insurance is available up to $100,000 per account relationship. Because amounts over $100,000 are not covered by insurance, it is generally thought that these deposits are more volatile, i.e., these accounts are not the result of on-going customer relationships. The lack of insurance also means for many banks that these accounts have relatively short maturities—depositors do not want to have uninsured funds locked up for longer periods—and that higher interest rates must be paid to compensate for the lack of insurance.

 

As shown in Table 13, the average rate earned on these accounts is actually less than the rate earned on accounts with balances less than $100,000. This has occurred despite the fact that the Company’s offering rate for new or renewing accounts of $100,000 or more is higher than for certificates with a lower balance. The reason for this relates to the decrease in interest rates from the end of 2000 through 2003. Depositors are more willing to have longer maturities with smaller amounts. Consequently, the larger balance accounts reprice more often. In a declining interest rate environment, these repricings will result in lower rates for the over $100,000 CDs.

 

As shown in Table 14, the proportion of the certificate accounts of $100,000 or more that have remaining maturities of more than one year is increasing. As rates have declined, some larger depositors have, even if reluctantly, extended the term of their certificates to get the higher offering rates. However, this increase in this proportion is due more to Management’s use of longer-term brokered certificates to assist in managing interest rate risk. Brokered certificates of deposit have similar interest rate risk characteristics to FHLB advances, but do not require collateralization. Included in the over one year maturity range for 2004 in Table 14 are $224 million of longer-term brokered certificates of deposit used for this purpose. The comparable figure for December 31, 2003 was $10 million. These factors cause Management to expect interest rates on these larger accounts to be similar or higher than the rate for smaller CDs in 2005.

 

SECURITIES SOLD UNDER AGREEMENTS TO REPURCHASE AND FEDERAL FUNDS PURCHASED

 

Just as the Company uses Federal funds sold and securities purchased under agreements to resell for the overnight investment of excess funds (described above in the section titled “Money Market Instruments”), the Company uses these same instruments for borrowing overnight from other banks to manage liquidity. When the Company is borrowing rather than lending, these instruments are called Federal funds purchased and securities sold under agreements to repurchase (“repos”). The repos are collateralized by securities owned by the borrower. Federal funds purchased are unsecured.

 

The Company also enters into repo agreements to provide business and other large customers with a secured alternative to deposits in excess of the $100,000 FDIC insured amount. These agreements are for terms of a few weeks to 90 days.

 

Information on the balances and rates paid for these two types of borrowings is disclosed in Note 12. Average interest rates paid during each year and at the end of each year declined from 2002 to 2003 and then increased in 2004. The average rates paid of 1.50% for 2002, 1.11% for 2003, and 1.32% for 2004 reflect the pattern of rate changes in Note M. The average combined amounts for these borrowings outstanding during the three years have increased from 1.90% in 2002 to 2.11%

 

50


Table of Contents

in 2004 of average assets. The maximum amount outstanding at any month-end during the year may be significantly different than the average amount outstanding during the year. For example, the largest amount borrowed by the Company through Federal funds purchased during 2004 was $187 million while the average amount borrowed during 2004 was $100.2 million.

 

During the first quarter when the RAL program requires large amounts of funding, repos and federal funds purchased are a significant source of liquidity to the Company. As explained below on page 63 in the discussion of the Company’s RAL program, overnight borrowing is the most cost efficient means of funding these loans, so the Company attempts to maximize this source on a few days during the first quarter of the year. With the RAL program larger in 2004 than in prior years, the Company borrowed more funds. In addition, as explained above on page 34 in the section on securities, Management decided to remain more fully invested in securities and rely more on borrowed funds. This caused a larger average balance in 2004 for these borrowings. To support this decision, the acceptability as collateral for borrowing is an important criterion for the selection of securities for the Company’s investment portfolio.

 

NONEARNING ASSETS

 

For a bank, nonearning assets are those assets like cash reserves, equipment, and premises that do not earn interest. The ratio of nonearning assets to total assets is important because it represents the efficiency with which funds are used. Locking up funds in nonearning assets either lessens the amount of interest that may be earned or it requires the investment of the smaller earning asset base in higher yielding but riskier assets to achieve the same income level. Management therefore believes that a low level of nonearning assets is part of a prudent asset/liability management strategy to reduce volatility in the earnings of the Company.

 

The ratio of average nonearning assets to average total assets has varied during the last three years with an average of 7.30% in 2002, 6.86% in 2003, and 7.15% in 2004. The reason for the rise relates to a larger increase in average nonearning assets (32% from 2003 to 2004) compared to an increase in average earning assets of 22.5%. Of the $95 million increase in average nonearning assets from 2003 to 2004, $80 million is the goodwill added in the purchase of PCCI. As of September 30, 2004, the latest date peer information is available, the average ratio of nonearning assets to total assets for bank holding companies of comparable size was 7.74%.

 

NONINTEREST REVENUE

 

Service Charges on Deposit Accounts

 

Service charges have increased with the growth in deposits and the Company’s efforts to be more effective in collecting fees that are assessed.

 

Trust Fees

 

Fees earned by the Trust and Investment Services Division are a large component of noninterest revenue, reaching $15.4 million in 2004. Fees increased by $1.0 million or 7.2% over fees for 2003 compared to an increase of $1.1 million in fees from 2002 to 2003. The market value of assets under administration on which the majority of fees are based increased from $1.9 billion at the end of 2002 to $2.1 billion at the end of 2003, and increased to $2.4 billion at the end of 2004. Most of the assets are held in equity securities, and the declining stock markets in 2002 had reduced the value of the assets. Recovery in the equity markets in 2003 along with new account relationships increased the value of the assets under administration.

 

Included within these fees in 2004 were $1.0 million from trusteeship of employee benefit plans and $1.9 million from the sales of mutual funds and annuities. In the case of the latter activity, the Company provides assistance to customers to determine what investments best match their financial goals and helps the customers allocate their funds according to the customers’ risk tolerance and need for diversification. The mutual funds and annuities are not operated by the Company, but instead are managed by registered investment companies.

 

51


Table of Contents

Other Service Charges, Commissions and Fees

 

This fee category has increased over the last three years and the Company continues to work on increasing other income and fees due to its importance as a potential contributor to profitability. Included within other service charges, commissions and fees are service fees arising from the processing of merchants’ credit card deposits, escrow fees, and a number of other fees charged for special services provided to customers. As shown in the table in Note 21, there was a decrease in broker fees from the sale of residential real estate loans. As mentioned in the section on loans above on page 37, loan sales declined in 2004 because the increase in interest rates slowed the market for refinancing.

 

Refund Transfer Fees and Net gain on Sale of Tax Refund Loans

 

These items of noninterest revenues are explained in the section below titled “Tax Refund Loan and Refund Transfer Programs” beginning on page 62.

 

Net Gain (Loss) on Sales and Calls of Securities

 

Gains and losses from sales and calls of securities are explained in the securities section above on page 35.

 

Other income

 

Losses on the tax credit partnerships increased in 2004 in part because of the sale of one partnership by the Company. The Company estimates the operating loss for the year for these partnerships based on the prior year because the actual loss is not known until the partnership tax reporting is sent to the Company later in the subsequent year. The Company had underestimated the losses in the prior years and as a result certain adjustments were made in the fourth quarter to appropriately reflect the carrying value. Such amounts were not material to prior year results of operation.

 

OPERATING EXPENSES

 

Total operating expenses have increased over the last three years as the Company has grown. These increases related to additional staff, improvements in technology to handle higher transaction volumes, and amortization of leasehold improvements on new facilities.

 

The ratio of operating expenses to average assets is often reported as a means of providing comparisons with other financial institutions. This ratio for the last three years is shown in the table below.

 

TABLE 15A—Operating Expense and Efficiency Ratios (Note N)

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2004     2003     2002  

Operating expense as a percentage of average assets

   3.15 %   3.49 %   3.45 %

Operating efficiency ratio

   52.76 %   53.53 %   50.51 %

 

Another ratio that is used to compare the Company’s expenses to those of other financial institutions is the operating efficiency ratio. This ratio takes into account the fact that for many financial institutions much of their income is not asset-based, i.e., it is based on fees for services provided rather than income earned from a spread between the interest earned on assets and interest paid on liabilities. The operating efficiency ratio measures what proportion of each dollar of net revenue is spent earning that revenue (Note O). With a significant proportion of the Company’s revenues coming from Trust and Investment fees and RT fees, management focuses more on this ratio than the operating expense to assets ratio. The ratios for the Company’s holding company peers were 60.0% for 2004, 59.2% for 2003, and 57.2% for 2002. The ratios for the Company without RAL are shown in Table 16G.

 

52


Table of Contents

Salaries and Benefits

 

Included within salaries and benefits are actual salaries, bonuses, commissions, retirement benefits, payroll taxes and workers’ compensation. The following table shows the amounts included for these components for the last three years.

 

TABLE 15B—Salaries and Benefits Detail

 

(in thousands)    Years ended December 31,
       2004      2003      2002

Salaries

   $ 64,072    $ 57,904    $ 51,489

Bonuses

     12,372      9,164      7,787

Retirement benefits

     10,904      9,729      9,656

Payroll taxes

     5,682      5,210      4,570

Workers compensation

     1,667      1,895      918

  

  

  

Total

   $ 94,697    $ 83,902    $ 74,420

  

  

  

 

Actual salaries have not increased significantly over the last three years compared to the growth in the Company’s loans and deposits. Average loans increased 29.3% and average deposits increased 28.1% from 2002 to 2004. The acquisition of PCCI in March accounts for $7.7 million of the increase in salaries.

 

Bonuses and other incentive pay are accrued during the year, but most payments are made at the end of February in the year following the year to which they relate. In 2003, the Company expanded its pay-for-performance plan to virtually all of the operating units. Goals for growth in loans and deposits and for sales of services or products were set at the beginning of the year and were, in many cases significantly exceeded, though profitability was not as high as planned because of the continued low interest rate environment. The RAL/RT program also exceeded expectations and bonuses to staff in those programs increased over the amounts paid for 2002.

 

Net income for 2004 exceeded that for 2003 by almost 16% due to significant internal growth, strong credit quality, and the acquisition of PCCI. Bonus amounts were increased correspondingly.

 

The workers’ compensation issue in California has received a significant amount of media attention. After researching its options and obtaining insurance quotations for the continuance of full coverage, Management concluded that the quoted premiums were too high and that it would be less expensive in the long run to self-insure for all but catastrophic levels of claims. This change requires the Company to establish a reserve for claims each year. The reserve is determined by independent actuaries and is based on past experience. The Company’s change became effective August 1, 2003. Claims for injuries that occurred prior to that date but have not yet been reported and further costs related to claims in process for injuries prior to that date are the responsibility of the insurance company from whom the Company had purchased coverage. Beginning August 1, 2003, the Company expensed a prorated share of the catastrophic coverage premium. It also recorded expenses related to claims for injuries incurred after the change to self-insurance and recorded a liability through a charge to this expense category for the estimated cost of injuries that occurred prior to December 31, 2003. For 2004, the Company recognized the cost of the catastrophic coverage and recognized a reserve for an estimate of the cost of injuries that occurred in 2004, both reported and unreported. Based on lower claims experience in 2003 and early 2004, the reserve set aside in 2004 was lower than that expensed in 2003.

 

Net Occupancy Expense

 

There were relatively small increases in occupancy expense in 2003 over 2002 and in 2004 over 2003, consistent with renewals of leases, office renovations, and increases in utilities. Note 27 describes an adjustment posted in the fourth quarter of 2004 to recognize the cumulative effect of rent escalation clauses on operating leases.

 

53


Table of Contents

Equipment Rental, Depreciation, and Maintenance

 

Variations in the accounts included on this line of the consolidated income statements are due to the continuing need to upgrade computers and processing equipment, offset by lower maintenance cost on newer equipment. On February 7, 2005, the Chief Accountant of the SEC sent a letter to the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants calling attention to several issues in the accounting for leases. One of issues is the requirement to recognize minimum or fixed rent increases on a straight-line basis. When the Company reviewed its lease accounting in response to the letter, it discovered that it had not followed the straight-line recognition in all cases. The Company determined that it had under-recognized lease expense over the terms of these leases by a cumulative amount of $885,000.

 

Other Expense

 

The major components of other expense are shown in Note 22 to the Consolidated Financial Statements on page 126.

 

Consultant Expense:  The increases from 2002 to 2003 and from 2003 to 2004 are due primarily to increases in auditing fees and fees incurred for assistance with implementing the Sarbanes Oxley Act. These costs do not include employee time spent on the project. In subsequent years, the external and internal costs are expected to be less.

 

Software Expense:  Software expense has increased over the three year period shown in the table in Note 22. The Company is installing new core banking data processing and customer relationship management systems. While many of the costs associated with these projects are capitalized as either purchases of software or software development, some costs must be expensed as incurred. Initial implementation is expected in the third quarter of 2005, and amortization of the capitalized costs will start at that time. Similar to computers, which must be upgraded when maintenance becomes more expensive than replacement, there is a continuing need to upgrade software as vendors no longer support earlier versions.

 

Off-balance Sheet Contingency Loss:  As explained in Notes 1, 7, and 17, the Company must establish a contingency loss for known or estimated losses relating to letters of credit or other unfunded loan commitments. In 2003, the Company was notified by one of its customers that the customer did not expect to be able to meet its contractual obligations regarding debt payments. The Company had guaranteed the obligations by means of standby letters of credit. As of the end of 2002, the Company had established a contingency loss reserve of $1.8 million for these letters of credit. With the new information received in 2003, the Company assumed that the third parties would eventually draw the letters of credit and, believing that reimbursement by the customer was unlikely, the Company increased the contingency loss reserve by another $4.3 million up to the whole amount of the letters of credit. One of the two letters of credit was in fact drawn in 2003, and the other in 2004. Because of doubts about collectibility, the whole amount of the draws, $5.9 million, was written off.

 

OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS

 

The Company has entered into a number of transactions, agreements, or other contractual arrangements whereby it has obligations that must be settled by cash or contingent obligations that must be settled by cash in the event certain specified conditions occur. These “off-balance sheet arrangements” are described in Note 17 to the Consolidated Financial Statements and a table is provided showing the estimated extent and timing of the payments required.

 

The Company has also entered into off-balance sheet arrangements that provide benefit to it in the form of sources of liquidity. These arrangements and any events, trends, or uncertainties that could limit the availability of these sources are described in the section below titled “Liquidity.”

 

CAPITAL RESOURCES

 

As of December 31, 2004, under current regulatory definitions, the Company and PCBNA were “well-capitalized,” the highest of the five categories defined under the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act (“FDICIA”).

 

54


Table of Contents

Capital Adequacy Standards

 

The primary measure of capital adequacy for regulatory purposes is based on the ratio of total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets. This method of measuring capital adequacy is meant to accomplish several objectives: 1) to establish capital requirements that are more sensitive to the differences in risk associated with various assets; 2) to explicitly take into account off-balance sheet exposure in assessing capital adequacy; and, 3) to minimize disincentives to holding liquid, low-risk assets. Risk-weighted assets include a portion of the nominal amount of off-balance sheet items based on the likelihood of them becoming funded or otherwise being recorded on-balance sheet.

 

The risk-based capital ratio is impacted by three factors: (1) the growth in assets compared to the growth in capital; (2) the relative size of the various asset categories; and (3) the composition of the securities and money market portfolios. If assets increase faster than capital, the ratios will decline. Because almost all loans are risk-weighted at 100% while most securities are risk-weighted as some percentage less than 100%, to the extent that loans increase as a proportion of total assets, the ratio will decline. Lastly, there are different risk-weightings within the securities and money market portfolios. As the proportion of securities or money market instruments with lower risk-weightings increase, the ratios will increase.

 

The Company, as a bank holding company, is required by the FRB to maintain a total risk-based capital to risk-weighted asset ratio of at least 8.0%. To be considered “well-capitalized”, the ratio must be at least 10%. At the end of 2004, the Company’s total risk-based capital to risk-weighted asset ratio was 12.1%. The Company also must maintain a Tier I capital to risk-weighted asset ratio of 6% and a Tier I capital to average assets of 5% to be considered well-capitalized. The actual ratios at December 31, 2004 for the Company were 8.2% and 6.3%, respectively. While the Company remained well-capitalized, the ratios decreased during 2004 because the acquisition of PCCI for cash only resulted in an increase in assets with no corresponding addition of capital.

 

Based on average balances the Company has maintained equity to asset ratios of 7.59%, 8.38%, and 8.40% for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002, respectively.

 

The composition of Tier I and Tier II capital, the minimum levels established by the FRB, the minimum levels necessary to be considered well-capitalized by regulatory definition and the Company’s ratios as of December 31, 2004 are presented in Note 20.

 

PCBNA is also required to maintain a total risk-based capital to risk-weighted asset ratio of 10.0% to be considered well-capitalized. PCBNA’s ratio at the end of 2004 was 12.50%. The Bank has issued a total of $121 million in subordinated debt. Each issue had a maturity of 10 years. While shown on the consolidated balance sheets as long-term debt, for the first half of their 10-year terms they are included as Tier II capital in the computation of the Total Capital to Risk-Weighted Asset ratio for both the Company and PCBNA. In the second half of their terms, one fifth of the balance will be excluded each year from capital in this computation. All issues are still within the first five years of their term. The subordinated debt issued by the Bancorp was issued in connection with the issuance of trust preferred debt as described in Note 13. Though the subsidiary trusts are not consolidated with the Company—see “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities”—the $30 million in trust preferred debt issued by them count as Tier 1 capital for the Company for their full term.

 

Share Repurchases

 

In prior years, the Company occasionally repurchased shares of its common stock to offset the increased number of shares issued as a result of the exercise of employee stock options. Shares were also repurchased as a means of managing capital levels. The purchases are generally conducted as open-market transactions. Occasionally the Company will purchase shares in private transactions as the result of unsolicited offers.

 

As mentioned in Note 18, the Company purchased shares in 2002 and 2003. No shares were repurchased in 2004 other than fractional shares resulting from the stock split. At December 31, 2004, there was approximately $18.6 million remaining to purchase outstanding shares from the most recent repurchase program authorized by the Board of Directors.

 

55


Table of Contents

Future Sources and Uses of Capital and Expected Ratios

 

Over the last five years, the Company’s assets have been increasing at a compound annual growth rate of 14.4%. To maintain its capital ratios, the Company must continue to increase capital at the same rate. Net income, the major source of capital growth for the Company, has been increasing at a compound annual growth rate of 13.6% over the same period of time, but this is reduced by dividends distributed to shareholders. The Company’s dividend payout ratio over the last three years has been 35.9% for 2004, 36.5% for 2003, and 32.7% for 2002. Though offset by some share repurchases, the retained earnings have resulted in capital increasing at a compound annual growth rate of 12.7%.

 

There are three primary considerations Management must keep in mind in managing capital levels and ratios. The first is that customers are attracted to the Company because of the relationship that is built with the customer, not the individual transaction. This requires the Company to be able to meet the credit needs of the borrower when they need to borrow. Therefore, it is essential that management maintain sufficient capital to avoid needing to alternate between being able to make loans and not able to make loans. If capital were not sufficient, the Company might not be able to lend.

 

The second consideration is that to maintain the ability to provide for those customers, the Company must be prepared to sell some of the loans it originates. This involves structuring loans to meet the purchase requirements of secondary markets, or charging an interest rate premium for those loans that cannot be sold. As mentioned above, the Company has sold loans both as a means of limiting the rate of asset increase and to test its ability to sell loans from different portfolios should more sales become necessary to manage capital.

 

The third consideration is that as loan demand picks up in an improving economy, raising additional capital is likely to be necessary. Because the capital ratios are primarily a regulatory issue, it is not always necessary for the Company to issue more common stock. There is generally less impact on the return on equity and on earnings per share by using other forms of regulatory capital like additional subordinated debt or trust preferred securities. Interest would need to be paid on this capital, but the current shareholders would not have their ownership diluted by additional shares. Management has had on-going discussions with investment bankers regarding the issuance of such capital and has been informed that amounts in addition to that issued in late 2004 could be accomplished with relative ease.

 

In addition to the capital generated from the operations of the Company, over the years a secondary source of capital growth has been the exercise of employee and director stock options. The extent of the growth from this source in any one year depends on a number of factors. These include the current stock price in relation to the price at the time options were granted and the number of options that would expire if not exercised during the year.

 

The net increase to capital from the exercise of options is lessened by the ability of option holders to pay the exercise price of options by trading shares of stock they already own, termed “swapping”. In 2004, the increase to capital from the exercise of options (net of shares surrendered as payment for exercises and taxes) was $8.9 million or 14.6% of the net growth in shareholders’ equity in the year. At December 31, 2004, there were approximately 1.1 million options outstanding and exercisable at less than the then-current market price of $33.99, with an average exercise price of $18.06. This represents a potential addition to capital of $19.9 million, if all options were exercised with cash. However, many options are likely to be exercised by swapping. Therefore, some amount less than the $19.9 million in new capital will result from the exercise of options. In addition, except for those options expiring in 2005, the options are likely to be exercised over a number of years.

 

The impact of the RAL program on the Company’s capital is discussed below.

 

Aside from the $18.6 million amount authorized for share repurchases and those commitments reported in Note 17, there are no material commitments for capital expenditures or “off-balance sheet” financing arrangements as of the end of 2004. There is no specified period during which the share repurchases must be completed.

 

56


Table of Contents

In any case, Management intends to take the actions necessary to ensure that the Company and the Bank will continue to exceed the capital ratios required for well-capitalized institutions.

 

Impact of RAL Program on Capital Adequacy

 

Formal measurement of the capital ratios for the Company and PCBNA are done at each quarter-end. However, the Company does more frequent estimates of its capital classification during late January and early February of each year because of the large amount of RAL loans. Management estimates that, were it to do a formal computation, on certain days during those weeks it and PCBNA may be classified as adequately-capitalized, rather than well-capitalized. The Company has discussed this with its regulators. Payments are received from the IRS each Friday during the RAL season and generally the Company and PCBNA move back into the well-capitalized classification with each payment.

 

In Note 10 is a description of the securitization that the Company utilizes as one of its funding sources for funding RALs. This securitization is a sale of some of the RALs to other financial institutions, and except for the capital that must be allocated for the small retained interest kept by the Company, it eliminates their impact on the capital ratios for the Company.

 

LEGISLATION AND REGULATION

 

The Company is strongly impacted by legislation and regulation. The Company and its subsidiaries may engage only in lines of business that have been approved by their respective regulators, and cannot open, close, or relocate offices without their approval. Disclosure of the terms and conditions of loans made to customers and deposits accepted from customers are both heavily regulated as to content. Among the important banking legislation are the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act (“FDICIA”), the Community Reinvestment Act (“CRA”), and the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (“GLBA”).

 

FDICIA specified capitalization standards, required stringent outside audit rules, and established stricter internal controls. There were also requirements to ensure that the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors is independent.

 

PCBNA is required by the provisions of CRA to make significant efforts to ensure that access to banking services is available to every segment of the community. It is also required to comply with the provision of various other consumer legislation and regulations.

 

The provisions of GLBA have been phased in over the last several years. These provisions permit banking organizations to enter into areas of business from which they were previously restricted. Similarly, other kinds of financial organizations are permitted to conduct business provided by banks. The act also imposed new restrictions on the sharing of customer information between financial institutions. The Company has responded to these new restrictions.

 

The Company and PCBNA must file periodic reports with the various regulators to keep them informed of their financial condition and operations as well as their compliance with all the various regulations.

 

Two regulatory agencies—the FRBSF for the Company and the OCC for PCBNA—conduct periodic examinations of the Company and the Bank to verify that their reporting is accurate and to ascertain that they are in compliance with regulations.

 

A banking agency may take action against a bank holding company or a bank should it find that the financial institution has failed to maintain adequate capital. This action has usually taken the form of restrictions on the payment of dividends to shareholders, requirements to obtain more capital from investors, and restrictions on operations. The FDIC may also take action against a bank that is not acting in a safe and sound manner. Given the strong capital position and performance of the Company and the banks, Management does not expect to be impacted by these types of restrictions in the foreseeable future.

 

57


Table of Contents

There are legal limitations on the ability PCBNA to declare dividends to the Bancorp as disclosed in Note 20.

 

In 2002, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act was enacted as Federal legislation. This legislation imposes a number of new requirements on financial reporting and corporate governance on all corporations. Among the new requirements is the inclusion in the Company’s Annual Report for 2004 of a report by Management on the Company’s internal controls over financial reporting and the safeguarding of assets. The report must be evaluated by the Company’s independent registered public accounting firm. The Company has documented these internal controls, evaluated their effectiveness, and conducted testing to determine if they are functioning as intended. The Company has also responded to all of the other new requirements.

 

IMPACT OF INFLATION

 

Inflation has been minimal for a number of years and has had little or no impact on the financial condition and results of operations of the Company during the periods discussed here.

 

LIQUIDITY

 

Liquidity is the ability to raise funds on a timely basis at an acceptable cost in order to meet cash needs. Adequate liquidity is necessary to handle fluctuations in deposit levels, to provide for customers’ credit needs, and to take advantage of investment opportunities as they are presented in the market place.

 

The Company’s objective is to ensure adequate liquidity at all times by maintaining liquid assets, by being able to raise deposits and liabilities, and by having access to funds via capital markets. Having too little liquidity can result in difficulties in meeting commitments and lost opportunities. Having too much liquidity can result in less income because liquid assets usually do not earn as high an interest rate as less liquid assets, and interest expense paid on unnecessarily borrowed funds reduces profitability.

 

As indicated in the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows principal sources of cash for the Company have included proceeds from the maturity or sale of securities, and the growth in deposits and other borrowings. The principal uses of cash have included increases in loans to customers and the purchase of securities. The use of cash for the purchase of securities was particularly high in 2003 due to the leveraging strategy described above on page 34. It is important to note that the purchase of securities is largely discretionary and the Company could reduce this use of cash if loan demand were to increase substantially.

 

To manage the Company’s liquidity properly, however, it is not enough to merely have large cash inflows; they must be timed to coincide with anticipated cash outflows. Also, the available cash on hand or cash equivalents must be sufficient to meet the exceptional demands that can be expected from time to time relating to natural catastrophes such as flood, earthquakes, and fire.

 

The Company manages the adequacy of its liquidity by monitoring and managing its immediate liquidity, intermediate liquidity, and long term liquidity.

 

Immediate liquidity is the ability to raise funds today to meet today’s cash obligations. Sources of immediate liquidity include cash on hand, the prior day’s Federal funds sold position, unused Federal funds and repurchase agreement lines and facilities extended by other banks and major brokers to the Company, access to the FHLB for short-term advances, and access to the FRB’s Discount Window. The Company has established a target amount for sources of available immediate liquidity. This amount is increased during certain periods to accommodate any liquidity risks of special programs like RALs.

 

At various times strong loan demand outpaces deposit growth. At these times, the Company draws down any excess funds invested in overnight money market instruments or uses overnight borrowings to maintain immediate liquidity. The rate paid on these borrowings is more than would be paid for transaction (NOW & MMDA) deposits, but aside from this, there have been no adverse

 

58


Table of Contents

consequences from relying more on borrowing ability than on holding liquid assets in excess of the immediate amounts needed. The Company’s strong capital position and earnings prospects have meant that these sources of borrowing have been readily available.

 

The Company has access to uncommitted lines at a variety of other financial institutions for overnight Federal funds purchases, each of which is used or tested at least annually.

 

Intermediate liquidity is the ability to raise funds during the next few months to meet cash obligations over those next few months. Sources of intermediate liquidity include maturities or sales of commercial paper and securities, term repurchase agreements, and term advances from the FHLB. The Company monitors the cash flow needs of the next few months and determines that the sources are adequate to provide for these cash needs.

 

PCBNA issues brokered CDs utilizing several brokers as a funding component for the RAL program and for interest rate risk management. PCBNA also used brokered CDs in late 2003 to provide the funds for the PCCI acquisition anticipated to close in the first quarter of 2004. PCBNA must be well-capitalized in order to issue brokered CDs.

 

Long-term liquidity is the ability to raise funds over the entire planning horizon to meet cash needs anticipated due to strategic balance sheet changes. Long-term liquidity sources include: initiating special programs to increase core deposits in expanded market areas; reducing the size of securities portfolios; taking long-term advances from the FHLB; securitizing loans; and accessing capital markets for the issuance of debt or equity. The fixed-rate advances the Company borrowed from the FHLB to fund the purchase of securities under the leveraging strategy, described on page 34, is an example of coordinating a source of long-term liquidity with asset/liability management. Similarly, while initiated to manage capital, the securitization of some of the Company’s auto loans in January 2001 provided $58.2 million to be used for making other loans.

 

For the Company, the most significant challenge relating to liquidity management is providing sufficient liquidity to fund the large amount of RALs in late January and early February of each year. As discussed in the “Funding and Liquidity Issues” sub-section of RAL section of this discussion above, the following considerations are kept in mind in providing the needed liquidity:

 

·   using a large number of other institutions so as to not become overly reliant on a particular source;
·   using a mixture of committed and uncommitted lines so as to assure a minimum amount of funding in the event of tight liquidity in the markets; and
·   arranging for at least a third more funding than it is anticipated will be needed.

 

The securitization of RAL loans assists in the management of the Company’s capital position during the RAL season by selling them to investor participants in the securitization. However, it also represents a significant source of liquidity as the proceeds from the sales of the loans are lent out to new RAL customers.

 

Banks’ largest sources and uses of operating liquidity arise from activities that are not defined as operating activities in the required format of the statement of cash flows, e.g. from deposits and loans. Therefore, looking at the cash flow statement of a bank is not of as much assistance nor is it evaluated the same way as for a commercial business. More emphasis must be placed on the investing and financing sections of the statement in assessing liquidity.

 

For the three years reported in the consolidated statements of cash flows, the Company has shown ample ability to maintain a significant amount of asset liquidity through financing activities at the same time as it increased its investing in loans, securities, and fixed assets.

 

In early 2004, the Company entered into a long term lease for some real property that includes one of its branches. To ensure the continued availability of this branch site, it was necessary to lease the larger parcel. The space not currently used by the Company is now leased to other commercial enterprises. These leases will continue for a variety of terms. The Company does not anticipate problems in maintaining tenants in these spaces because the property is in a high-traffic commercial area. The signing of this lease added approximately $46 million in contractual obligations. These

 

59


Table of Contents

obligations split between non-cancelable leases for the operating lease portion for the land and capital leases for the buildings in the first Table in Note 17. However, with the offsetting rents received from subtenants, the Company does not expect that net liquidity demands will be any larger than they would have been if the current individual lease arrangement could have been maintained.

 

INCOME TAX EXPENSE

 

Income tax expense is the sum of two components: the current tax expense or provision and the deferred tax expense or provision. Current tax expense is the result of applying the current tax rate to taxable income.

 

The deferred tax provision is intended to account for the fact that income on which the Company pays taxes with its returns differs from pre-tax income in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Income. Some items of income and expense are recognized in different years for income tax purposes than in the financial statements. For example, the Company is only permitted to deduct from Federal taxable income actual net loan charge-offs, irrespective of the amount of provision for credit loss (bad debt expense) recognized in its financial statements. This causes what is termed a temporary difference. Eventually, as loans are charged-off, the Company will be able to deduct for tax purposes what has already been recognized as an expense in the financial statements. Another example is the accretion of discount on certain securities. Accretion is the recognition as interest income of the excess of the par value of a security over its cost at the time of purchase. For its financial statements, the Company recognizes income as the discount related to these securities is accreted. For its tax return, however, the Company can defer the recognition of that income until the cash is received at the maturity of the security. The first example causes a deferred tax asset to be created because the Company has recognized as an expense for its current financial statements an item that it will be able to deduct from its taxable income in a future year’s tax return. The second example causes a deferred tax liability, because the Company has been able to delay until a subsequent year the paying of tax on an item of current year financial statement income.

 

There are some items of income and expense that create permanent differences. Examples of permanent differences would include:

 

·   tax-exempt income from municipal securities that is recognized as interest income for the financial statements but never included in taxable income; and
·   a portion of meal and entertainment expense that is recognized as an expense for the financial statements, but never deductible in computing taxable income.

 

The significant items of income and expense that create permanent differences are disclosed in the second table of Note 15 as amounts that cause a difference between the statutory Federal tax rate of 35% and the effective tax rate. The effective tax rate is the amount of the combined current and deferred tax expense divided by the Company’s income before taxes as reported in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

 

The amount of the deferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated by multiplying the temporary differences by the current tax rate. The Company measures all of its deferred tax assets and liabilities at the end of each year. The difference between the net asset or liability at the beginning of the year and the end of the year is the deferred tax provision for the year.

 

Most of the Company’s temporary differences involve recognizing substantially more expenses in its financial statements than it has been allowed to deduct for taxes in the return for the year. This results in a net deferred tax asset. Deferred tax assets are dependent for realization on past taxes paid, against which they may be carried back, or on future taxable income, against which they may be offset. If there were a question about the Company’s ability to realize the benefit from the asset, then it would have to record a valuation allowance against the asset to reflect the uncertainty. Given the amount and nature of the Company’s deferred assets, the past taxes paid, and the likelihood of future taxable income, realization is assured for the full amount of the net deferred tax asset and no valuation allowance is needed.

 

60


Table of Contents

The amounts of the current expense and deferred benefit, the amounts of the various deferred tax assets and liabilities, and the tax effect of the principal temporary differences between taxable income and pre-tax financial statement income are shown in Note 15.

 

Included in the reconciliation table is an item for state taxes. In addition to the 35% Federal income tax included in tax expense, the Company pays a California franchise tax. This tax is equivalent to a tax on the Company’s income. While the franchise tax rate is almost 11%, the Company may deduct its state franchise tax from its Federal taxable income. This reduces the effective tax rate for the state tax by 35%.

 

There are a number of differences between the Federal and state rules in the tax treatment of certain items of income and expense. For years prior to 2002, the Company was permitted to recognize a portion of its provision for credit losses as a deductible item for state taxes though it could recognize only actual charge-offs for Federal tax purposes. In effect, California permitted an allowance for credit losses for taxes. In 2002, California enacted legislation that would conform its tax accounting for provision expense to the Federal method and required Banks to recapture one half of this allowance as taxable income. The recaptured amount would be deductible again when the loans to which it related were charged off. The other half of the allowance became a permanent difference. This resulted in a one-time tax benefit that accounts for the lower reconciliation percentage for 2002 for state taxes in the reconciliation table than in 2003 and 2004.

 

The effective tax rate was higher in 2004 than 2003 as the Company’s tax exempt income has not increased the same rate as its taxable income. For example, very few of PCCI’s securities were tax exempt. The acquisition added taxable income with no corresponding increase in tax exempt income.

 

In December 2003, California’s Franchise Tax Board announced its position that would disallow certain transactions between certain types of subsidiaries and their parent companies. These subsidiaries are real estate investment trusts and regulated investment companies. The Company does not have subsidiaries of these types and there is no impact on the Company’s state tax provision due to this announcement.

 

COMMON STOCK AND DIVIDENDS

 

Stock prices and cash dividends declared for the last eight quarters are shown on page 7. The Company’s stock is listed on the Nasdaq National Market System. The trading symbol is PCBC. Stock prices represent trading activity through the Nasdaq National Market System.

 

For the years 2004, 2003, and 2002, the Company has declared cash dividends which were 35.9%, 36.5%, and 32.7%, respectively, of its net income. The Company’s policy is to pay dividends of approximately 35%-40% of net income. The most recent information for the Company’s peers shows an average payout ratio of 29.1%. The Board of Directors periodically increases the per share dividend rate in acknowledgment that earnings have been increasing by a sufficient amount to ensure adequate capital and also provide a higher return to shareholders. The last increase was declared in the first quarter of 2004.

 

MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS

 

In March 2002, the Company acquired certain assets and liabilities of two branches of another financial institution. The deposits and loans acquired in this transaction were combined with PCBNA’s existing branches in those communities of Monterey and Watsonville.

 

On March 5, 2004, the Company completed its acquisition of Pacific Crest Capital, Inc. (PCCI) in an all cash transaction valued at $135.8 million, or $26 per each diluted share of Pacific Crest Capital common stock. The assets and liabilities acquired and the goodwill recognized are disclosed in Note 2.

 

61


Table of Contents

TAX REFUND ANTICIPATION LOAN AND REFUND TRANSFER PROGRAMS

 

As indicated in the overall summary at the beginning of this discussion, part of the upward trend in earnings is attributable to the RAL and RT programs. The Company is one of three financial institutions which together provide over 90% of these products on a national basis. Management estimates that the Company has a 25%—30% share of the market. The Company provides these services to taxpayers that file their returns electronically. RALs are a loan product; RTs are strictly an electronic transfer service.

 

Description of the RAL and RT Products

 

For the RAL product, a taxpayer typically requests a loan from the Company through a tax preparer, with the anticipated tax refund as the source of repayment. The Company subjects the application to an automated credit review process. If the application passes this review, the Company advances to the taxpayer the amount of the refund due on the taxpayer’s return up to specified amounts based on certain criteria less the loan fee due to the Company and fees due for preparation of the return. Each taxpayer signs an agreement permitting the Internal Revenue Service (the “IRS”) to send their refund directly to the Company instead of to the taxpayer. The refund received from the IRS is used by the Company to pay off the loan. Any amount due the taxpayer above the amount of the RAL is then sent by the Company to the taxpayer. The fee is withheld by the Company from the advance, but the fee is recognized as income only after the loan is collected from the IRS payment. The fee varies based on the amount of the loan. However, unlike interest earned on most loans, it does not vary with the length of time the loan is outstanding. Nonetheless, because the taxpayer must sign a loan document, the advance on the refund is considered a loan and the fee is classified as interest income.

 

Generally, interest income earned on loans is a function of the outstanding balance multiplied by the rate specified in the loan agreement. For RALs, however, the interest income is unrelated to the length of time the loan is outstanding and there is no explicit interest rate. The flat fee charged is instead simply recognized as income when the loan is collected from the IRS. No late fees are charged to customers whose loans are not paid within the expected time.

 

The IRS closely scrutinizes returns where a major portion of the refund is based on a claim for Earned Income Tax Credit (“EIC”). The Company closely monitors and, in many cases, does not lend on those returns where EIC represents an overly large portion of the refund. Many taxpayers not qualifying for loans or not desiring to pay the loan fee still choose to receive their refunds more quickly by having the refund sent electronically by the IRS to the Company. The Company then prepares a check or authorizes the tax preparer to issue a check to the taxpayer. This service is termed a refund transfer. There is no credit risk associated with the RT product because funds are not sent to the customer until received by the Company from the IRS.

 

Many of the customers for these products do not have bank accounts into which they could have the IRS directly deposit their refund and do not have a safe or permanent mailing address at which to receive a check. These products provide not only quick access to funds, but also a safe delivery method in the form of hand delivery by the tax preparer to the taxpayer.

 

Many of the customers also do not feel comfortable preparing their own tax returns and these products provide a means for payment of the preparation fee by withholding from the remittance.

 

62


Table of Contents

The following table shows fees by product for the last three years and the percentage of growth:

 

TABLE 16A—RAL and RT Fees

 

(dollars in millions)     
 
RAL
Income
 
 
   
 
RT
Fees
 
 
   
 
Pre-tax
Income
 
 

2002

   $ 29.9     $ 16.6     $ 35.4  

$ change

   $ 9.8     $ 3.2     $ 5.0  

% change

     32.8 %     19.3 %     14.1 %

2003

   $ 39.7     $ 19.8     $ 40.4  

$ change

   $ (0.2 )   $ 1.3     $ 5.1  

% change

     -0.5 %     6.6 %     12.6 %

2004

   $ 39.5     $ 21.1     $ 45.5  

 

RAL Credit Losses

 

The IRS may reject or partially disallow the refund. The tax preparers participating in the program are located across the country and few of the taxpayers have any customer relationships with the Company other than their RAL. Many taxpayers make use of the service because they do not have a permanent and/or safe mailing address at which to receive their refund. Therefore, if a problem occurs with the return, collection efforts may be less effective than with local customers.

 

The Company has taken several steps to minimize losses from these loans. Preparers are screened before they are allowed to submit their electronic filings; procedures have been defined for the preparers to follow to ensure that the agreement signed by the taxpayer is a valid loan; and the preparers’ IRS reject rates are monitored very carefully. If a preparer’s rejects are above normal, he or she may be dropped from the program. If rejects are below expectations, the preparer may be paid an incentive fee.

 

If the taxpayer applies for a loan the following year, the unpaid proceeds from the prior year are deducted from the current year’s loan proceeds. In addition, the Company has entered into cooperative collection agreements with the other banks with RAL programs. Under those agreements, if a taxpayer owing money to one bank from a prior year applies for a loan from another bank, the second bank repays the delinquent amount to the first bank before remitting the refund to the taxpayer. As shown in Table 9B, these steps result in a relatively high rate of recovery on the prior year’s losses, but net losses nonetheless remain higher than for other loans.

 

Total net RAL charge-offs in 2004 were $8.4 million compared to $8.5 million in 2003 and $2.1 million in 2002. The charge-off rate was lower in 2002 than in any prior year. While the IRS made no official announcement to this effect, it seemed that fewer refund claims were selected for examination. In addition, there were some IRS processing problems encountered in the 2001 season which the Company took extra steps in 2002 to mitigate by using more consumer credit checks before approving loans. Net charge-offs were higher in 2003 and 2004 than in 2002 as it appeared a more normal level of returns was selected for review.

 

RAL/RT Product Mix and Impact on Pre-tax Income

 

The product mix remained relatively the same over the period 2002 through 2004—approximately one third RALs and two-thirds RTs. The fees for the RAL product are higher because there are funding and credit costs that must be covered in addition to the processing costs that are the only costs for the RT product. The Company anticipates that the total number of products sold will continue to grow as more taxpayers file their returns electronically. It is also expected that more of the increase will be in the RT product, because the self-prepared returns are more common in the RT product and self-prepared returns are the faster growing segment of the market. It appears that the preparer segment may be approaching saturation. This would suggest that revenues and pre-tax profitability will not increase at the same rate as the numerical volume.

 

Funding and Liquidity Issues

 

While RTs are strictly a processing business—the Company simply remits the refund to the taxpayer after it has received it from the IRS—RALs present the Company with some special funding or

 

63


Table of Contents

liquidity needs. Funds are needed for lending only the very short period of time that RAL loans are made. The season starts in the middle of January and continues into April, but even within that time frame, they are highly concentrated in the last week of January and first two weeks of February. The first issue then is that the Company must arrange for a significant amount of very short term borrowings. A portion of the need can be met by borrowing overnight from other financial institutions through the use of Federal funds purchased (unsecured) and repurchase agreements (borrowings collateralized by securities or loans). These two sources match the short term nature of the RALs and therefore are an efficient source of funding. However, they are not sufficient to meet the total need for funds, and once other sources must be utilized, funding becomes more expensive. The Company must make use of other less efficient sources, specifically some term advances from the FHLB and brokered deposits.

 

The IRS pays refunds to the Company each Friday. This frequently results in such a large amount of cash that the Company is able to pay back all of its overnight borrowing from the day before and still have an excess of cash that must be invested. Multi-day sources of funding like the FHLB advances and brokered deposits are less efficient because they involve borrowing on those days when the Company has the excess funds.

 

As mentioned in Note 10, the Company has also securitized some of the RALs. As explained below, this accounting has the effect of reclassifying interest income, interest expense, and provision expense related to the sold loans and recognizing the net amount as a gain on sale of loans.

 

Management is expecting that total volume of transactions will be higher in 2005 than in 2004 as the number of taxpayers filing their returns electronically increases. This has required the Company to add additional funding arrangements to the mix for 2005, but they are of the same types as used in prior years. The Company has arranged a larger securitization for 2005 and has arranged for increases in its overnight credit lines issued by other financial institutions a larger proportion of the more efficient overnight funds.

 

All of the direct costs of the funding are charged to the program in the segment results shown in Note 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, but some of the costs, specifically the opportunity cost of holding more liquid and therefore more easily pledged securities, are too difficult to allocate.

 

RAL Average and Period-end Balances

 

The balances of RALs outstanding during each tax-filing season are included in the average balance for consumer loans shown in Table 2, but there are no such loans included in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2004 and 2003, because all loans not collected from the IRS by the end of each year are charged-off.

 

Litigation and Regulatory Risk

 

Several suits have been filed against the Company relating to the RAL and RT programs. The two that are currently in litigation are disclosed in Note 17 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The Company is also aware that RALs are in disfavor among consumer advocacy groups for a variety of reasons. Among these reasons are claims that (1) customers are not adequately advised that a RAL is indeed a loan product, (2) that alternative, less expensive means of obtaining the proceeds from their refund such as RTs are available, and (3) that the interest rates, specifically the annualized percentage rates (“APR”), are too high.

 

Management has reviewed its loan documents with compliance counsel to ensure that the disclosure is complete and fair as to these claims. Its ratio of RTs to RALs—two-thirds to one third—suggests that alternatives are in fact explained. The APR on RALs is high because of the short time on average that they are outstanding. However, the funding, processing, and credit costs also need to be recovered over that very short period of time and computed as an APR, they too are high (Note P).

 

The Company has reviewed its RAL program in the context of the OCC’s guidelines as to what it holds to be “predatory lending practices,” and is confident that its practices are not predatory.

 

64


Table of Contents

Classification of RAL and RT Fees and the Effect of Securitization Accounting

 

Generally, the fees earned on the RALs are included in the accompanying Consolidated Income Statements for 2004, 2003 and 2002 within interest and fees on loans. The fees earned on the RTs are reported as a separate item within noninterest revenue.

 

The securitization changes how some of the income and expenses with the program are accounted for. All of the cash flows associated with the RALs sold to the Company’s securitization partners are reported net as a gain on sale of loans. This gain account is reported as a separate noninterest revenue line on the Consolidated Statements of Income. Based on the availability of other, cheaper sources of funds relative to the expected growth in the amount of funding needed, the amount of loans securitized each year varies significantly. This means that the cash flows and, therefore, the net gains associated with the sold RALs have also varied significantly. Specifically, in 2002 these cash flows included $14.0 million in fees, $1.9 million in interest expense and fees charged by the securitization partners, and $1.9 million in loans charged-off for a net gain of $10.2 million. In 2003 these cash flows included $12.5 million in fees, $1.4 million in interest expense and fees charged by the securitization partners, and $3.0 million in loans charged-off for a net gain of $8.0 million. In 2004, there were $5.9 million in fees, $840,000 in interest expense, and $2.1 million in loans charged-off for a net gain of $2.9 million. As noted in various sections of this discussion, this accounting had the effect of causing substantial differences between some items of income and expense for 2004, 2003, and 2002 despite there being no substantive differences in the economics or profitability between the years. In other words, a year with a large gain occurring because more loans were sold is not necessarily more profitable than a year with less gains, but more interest income. Therefore, the Company measures the performance of the segment without respect to the sale of loans, instead treating the securitization as if it were a secured borrowing.

 

To assist the reader in understanding how Management compares the profitability of one year to the last, the following pro forma table compares selected items of income and expense for the Company as if the securitization had not taken place, i.e. as if the Company had borrowed the funds from the securitization participants instead of selling the loans to them. It should be noted that there is no difference in the figures in the table below for income before taxes and the comparable figure for income before taxes in the Consolidated Statements of Income. Because all cash flows related to the securitization each year are completed during the first quarter, securitization accounting has the effect simply of moving items from one category of the income statement to another. The securitization does not have the effect of moving income or expense from one period to another. This pro forma table is not intended to be a presentation in accordance with GAAP.

 

65


Table of Contents

TABLE 16B—RAL Securitization Proforma

 

(in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,

      
 
 
 
In
accordance
with GAAP
2004
    
 
 
 
Pro
Forma
Amounts
2004
    
 
 
 
In
accordance
with GAAP
2003
    
 
 
 
Pro
Forma
Amounts
2003
    
 
 
 
In
accordance
with GAAP
2002
    
 
 
 
Pro
Forma
Amounts
2002

Interest income from loans

   $ 267,830    $ 273,750    $ 226,413    $ 238,886    $ 222,754    $ 236,777

Interest expense on other borrowed funds

   $ 25,480    $ 26,320    $ 17,029    $ 18,441    $ 14,711    $ 16,629

Net interest income

   $ 259,900    $ 264,980    $ 218,256    $ 229,317    $ 203,947    $ 216,052

Provision for credit losses

   $ 11,965    $ 14,100    $ 18,286    $ 21,315    $ 19,727    $ 21,662

Net gain on sale of tax refund loans

   $ 2,945    $    $ 8,031    $    $ 10,170    $

Income before income taxes

   $ 140,523    $ 140,523    $ 118,013    $ 118,013    $ 114,716    $ 114,716

 

(in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,

      
 
 
Pro Forma
Adjustments
2004
    
 
 
Pro Forma
Adjustments
2003
    
 
 
Pro Forma
Adjustments
2002

Interest income from loans

   $ 5,920    $ 12,473    $ 14,023

Interest expense on other borrowed funds

   $ 840    $ 1,412    $ 1,918

Provision for credit losses

   $ 2,135    $ 3,029    $ 1,935

 

The top portion of the table above shows amounts reported by the Company in its Consolidated Statements of Income and pro forma amounts showing the effect of treating the securitization as a borrowing arrangement. The bottom portion of the table discloses the pro forma adjustments used in preparing the pro forma amounts.

 

66


Table of Contents

Summary of Operating Results

 

The following table summarizes operating results for the RAL and RT programs for the three years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002.

 

TABLE 16C— Operating Results for the RAL and RT Programs

 

(dollars in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,  
       2004       2003       2002  

Interest income from RALs

   $ 36,673     $ 31,984     $ 19,846  

Interest expense on funding

     (1,118 )     (814 )     (1,604 )

Intersegment revenues

     4,704       1,824       4,046  

Internal charge for funds

           (2,684 )     (2,648 )
    


 


 


Net interest income

     40,259       30,310       19,640  

Provision for credit losses—RALs

     (8,468 )     (8,530 )     (2,105 )

Refund transfer fees

     21,049       19,841       16,645  

Collection Fees

     4,873       4,263       2,531  

Gain on sale of loans

     2,945       8,031       10,170  

Operating expense

     (19,814 )     (12,615 )     (12,888 )

Income before taxes

   $ 40,844     $ 41,300     $ 33,993  

  


 


 


Charge-offs

   $ 12,511     $ 13,712     $ 6,615  

Recoveries

     (4,043 )     (5,182 )     (4,510 )

  


 


 


Net charge-offs

   $ 8,468     $ 8,530     $ 2,105  

  


 


 


 

The four tables below show the balances and amounts of interest income and expense that are excluded in computing the without RAL or without RAL/RT amounts and ratios disclosed in various sections of Management’s Discussion and Analysis. These pro forma tables are not intended to be presentations in accordance with GAAP.

 

TABLE 16D—RAL Amounts Used in Computation of Net

Interest Margin and Other Ratios Exclusive of RALs

 

    Years Ended December 31,
(dollars in thousands)   2004

   2003

      Consolidated     RAL/RT     
 
Excluding
RAL/RT
     Consolidated      RAL/RT     
 
Excluding
RAL/RT

Average consumer loans

  $ 565,142   $ 102,769    $ 462,373    $ 523,033    $ 121,659    $ 401,374

Average loans

    3,804,869     102,769      3,702,100      3,151,328      121,659      3,029,669

Average total assets

    5,707,971     392,547      5,315,424      4,645,654      139,794      4,505,860

Average earning assets

    5,299,914     185,658      5,114,256      4,326,896      121,659      4,205,237

Average certificates of deposit

    1,447,208     11,718      1,435,490      2,831,358      11,604      2,819,754

Average interest

                                       

bearing liabilities

    4,188,768     225,992      3,962,776      3,267,652      11,604      3,256,048

Average equity

    433,268     65,049      368,219      389,269      49,815      339,454

Consumer loans interest income

    68,165     36,540      31,625      61,749      31,712      30,037

Loan interest income

    264,900     36,540      228,360      226,413      31,712      194,701

Interest income

    326,181     36,673      289,508      272,189      31,984      240,205

Interest expense

    69,211     1,118      68,093      53,933      814      53,119

 

*The Company does not keep separate equity accounts for the RAL/RT segment. The equity amount disclosed in this Table is computed by adding all pretax income for the segment, applying a statutory tax rate as there are no tax-advantaged assets in the program, and applying an assumed dividend payout ratio of 37.5%. As indicated in Note 26, no attempt is made to allocate indirect overhead.

 

67


Table of Contents

TABLE 16E—Calculation of Ratios of Net Charge-offs Including and Excluding RALs

 

(dollars in thousands)      2004       2003       2002       2001       2000  

Total Including RALs

                                        

Net charge-offs

   $ 13,525     $ 22,557     $ 14,778     $ 12,924     $ 10,908  

Average loans

   $ 3,804,869     $ 3,151,328     $ 2,942,082     $ 2,678,225     $ 2,388,740  

  


 


 


 


 


Ratio

     0.36 %     0.72 %     0.50 %     0.48 %     0.46 %

  


 


 


 


 


Total Excluding RALs

                                        

Net charge-offs

   $ 5,057     $ 14,027     $ 12,673     $ 8,730     $ 7,741  

Average loans

   $ 3,702,100     $ 3,029,669     $ 2,874,091     $ 2,619,325     $ 2,328,576  

  


 


 


 


 


Ratio

     0.14 %     0.46 %     0.44 %     0.33 %     0.33 %

  


 


 


 


 


 

TABLE 16F—Reconciliation of Other Amounts With and Without RAL/RT Amounts

 

     Years Ended December 31,
(dollars in thousands)    2004

   2003

       Consolidated      RAL/RT     
 
Excluding
RAL/RT
     Consolidated      RAL/RT     
 
Excluding
RAL/RT

Noninterest revenue

   $ 75,635    $ 28,867    $ 46,768    $ 80,281    $ 32,133    $ 48,148

Operating expense

     179,906      15,110      164,796      162,238      13,473      148,765

Provision for credit losses

     12,809      8,468      4,341      18,286      8,530      9,756

Income before income taxes

     139,890      40,844      99,046      118,013      41,300      76,713

Provision for income taxes

     51,946      17,175      34,771      42,342      17,367      24,975

Net Income

     87,944      23,669      64,275      75,671      23,933      51,738
(dollars in thousands)    Year Ended December 31, 2002

       Consolidated      RAL/RT     
 
Excluding
RAL/RT

Noninterest revenue

   $ 73,784    $ 28,999    $ 44,785

Operating expense

     143,288      11,143      132,145

Provision for credit losses

     19,727      2,105      17,622

Income before income taxes

     114,716      33,993      80,723

Provision for income taxes

     39,865      14,294      25,571

Net Income

     74,851      19,699      55,152

 

TABLE 16G—Ratios Including and Excluding RAL/RT Programs

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2004

    2003

    2002

 
     Consolidated     Excluding
RALs
 
 
  Consolidated     Excluding
RALs
 
 
  Consolidated     Excluding
RALs
 
 

Return on average assets

   1.54 %   1.21 %   1.63 %   1.15 %   1.80 %   1.39 %

Return on average equity

   20.30 %   17.46 %   19.44 %   15.24 %   21.46 %   17.57 %

Operating efficiency

   52.76 %   59.59 %   53.53 %   62.04 %   50.51 %   55.88 %

Net interest margin

   4.97 %   4.45 %   5.20 %   4.61 %   5.47 %   5.09 %

 

68


Table of Contents

FOURTH QUARTER 2004 ADJUSTMENTS

 

The Company identified three accounting errors that it corrected in the fourth quarter of 2004. These errors are described in the succeeding paragraphs. The portions of these adjustments that related to any prior period financial statements were immaterial.

 

On February 7, 2005, the Chief Accountant of the SEC sent a letter to the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants calling attention to several issues in the accounting for leases. One of the issues is the requirement to recognize minimum or fixed rent increases on a straight-line basis. When the Company reviewed its lease accounting in response to the letter, it discovered that it had not followed the straight-line recognition in all cases. The Company determined that it had under-recognized lease expense over the terms of these leases going back as far as 1993 by a cumulative amount of $885,000.

 

During the fourth quarter of 2004, the Company recognized that it had not posted all of the losses on its low income housing tax credit partnerships. The cumulative amount of the unrecognized losses was $1.4 million. Most of this amount relates to the years prior to 2002 and in no case would adjustment for any prior period financial statements be material.

 

During the fourth quarter of 2004, the Company recognized $1.4 million in stay pay bonuses, of which $980,000 was attributable to prior quarters in 2004. Adjustment to the financial statements for these prior quarters is not material.

 

These adjustments had an impact on net income for the fourth quarter of 2004 of $2.2 million or 5¢ per diluted share. For the year of 2004, the impact on net income was $1.3 million or 3¢ per diluted share.

 

69


Table of Contents

NOTES TO MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

NOTE A  EFFECTS OF ACQUISITION ACCOUNTING ON GROWTH

 

Offices obtained in purchase or acquisition transactions are included as a reason for growth in net income over the last five years, while offices obtained in pooling or merger transactions are not a reason for growth. This is because of the difference in the accounting for these two types of business combinations.

 

Accounting standards for business combinations accounted for as poolings required that the figures for prior years be restated as if the combination occurred at the beginning of the first year presented. Therefore, the assets, deposits, and net income obtained in pooling transactions are included in both the current numbers and the prior period numbers and a difference between the two would not be explained by the transaction. There is no such restatement for prior year figures for purchase transactions—the balances or net income are included only from the date of the acquisition. As indicated in “Accounting for Business Combinations” in Note 1, accounting for acquisitions as pooling of interest is no longer permitted.

 

NOTE B  TAX EQUIVALENCY

 

For Tables 1, 2, and 3, the yield on tax-exempt state and municipal securities and loans has been computed on a tax equivalent basis. The interest on these securities and loans is subject to California franchise tax no matter what the state of origin of the issuer. The California franchise tax rate is 10.84%. The Federal tax rate used for the computation is 35%. While the income from these securities and loans is taxable for California, the Company does receive a Federal income tax benefit of 35% of the California tax paid. That is, state taxes are deductible for Federal taxes, and to the extent that the Company pays California franchise tax on this income from these loans and securities, the deduction for state taxes on the Company’s Federal return is larger. The tax equivalent yield is also impacted by the disallowance of a portion of the underlying cost of funds used to support tax-exempt securities and loans. To compute the tax equivalent yield for these securities one must first add to the actual interest earned an amount such that if the resulting total were fully taxed, and if there were no disallowance of interest expense, the after-tax income would be equivalent to the actual tax-exempt income. This tax equivalent income is then divided by the average balance to obtain the tax equivalent yield. The dollar amount of the adjustment is shown at the bottom of Table 2 as “Tax equivalent income included in interest income from non-taxable securities and loans.”

 

NOTE C  AVERAGE BALANCES

 

When comparing interest yields and costs year to year, the use of average balances more accurately reflects trends since these balances are not significantly impacted by period-end transactions. The amount of interest earned or paid for the year is also directly related to the average balances during the year and not to what the balances happened to be on the last day of the year. Average balances are daily averages, i.e., the average is computed using the balances for each day of the year, rather than computing the average of the first and last day of the year.

 

NOTE D FAIR VALUE ADJUSTMENTS TO SECURITIES AND NONACCRUAL LOANS IN TABLE 2

 

The yield information in Table 2 does not give effect to changes in fair value that are reflected as a component of shareholders’ equity. Loans in a nonaccrual status are included in the computation of average balances in their respective loan categories.

 

70


Table of Contents

NOTE E  ALLOCATION OF CHANGES IN INTEREST BETWEEN RATE AND VOLUME

 

For purposes of the amounts in Table 3 relating to the volume and rate analysis of net interest margin, the portion of the change in interest earned or paid that is attributable to changes in rate is computed by multiplying the change in interest rate by the prior year’s average balance. The portion of the change in interest earned or paid that is attributable to changes in volume is computed by multiplying the change in average balances by the prior year’s interest rate. The portion of the change that is not attributable either solely to changes in volume or changes in rate is prorated on a weighted basis between volume and rate.

 

NOTE F  INTEREST RATE SENSITIVITY AND MATURITY

 

In general, the longer the period to maturity of a fixed-rate financial instrument, the more sensitive is its market value to changes in interest rates. This occurs because any difference between current market rates and the original rate at issuance will remain in place longer for a longer period. For example, if interest rates increase by 1%, then the investor in a bond or other financial instrument with 10 years remaining until maturity will receive 1% less than the current market rate for 10 times longer than an investor that holds a bond or other financial instrument with one year remaining until maturity. In other words, the second investor will be able to reinvest the proceeds from the maturing bond after only one year and consequently will incur less of an economic loss than the first investor when interest rates go up.

 

NOTE G  HYPOTHETICAL INTEREST RATE CHANGES

 

Although interest rates normally would not change in this sudden manner, the very steep decline in interest rates during 2001—a 4.75% decline in 10 months—make the 2% shock a more realistic scenario than most observers would have believed four years ago.

 

At December 31, 2003, the FOMC’s target rate for Federal funds sold between banks was 1.00%. It is clear that this target rate could not be decreased another 2.00% as modeled on page 30 of this discussion. Nonetheless the Company uses a hypothetical decrease of 2.00% along with an increase of 2.00% to show changes in the sensitivity to interest rates comparable with the prior year.

 

NOTE H  INTEREST RATE YIELD CURVES

 

A yield curve is a graphic representation of the relationship between the interest rate and the maturity term of financial instruments. Generally, interest rates on shorter maturity financial instruments are less than those for longer term instruments. For example, at December 31, 2004, 2 year U.S. Treasury notes sold at a price that yielded 3.08% while 10-year notes sold at a price that yielded 4.24%. A line drawn that plots this relationship for a whole range of maturities will be “steeper” when the rates on long-term maturities are substantially higher than those on shorter term maturities. The curve is said to be “flatter” when there is not as much of a difference. The following table shows rates for some selected maturities to demonstrate how the yield curve has changed over the last two years.

 

     Target
Fed
Funds
Rate
 
 
 
 
  3 Month
Treasury
Bills
 
 
 
  2 Year
Treasury
Notes
 
 
 
  10 Year
Treasury
Notes
 
 
 
  30 Year
Treasury
Notes
 
 
 
  Shape

December 31, 2002

   1.25 %   1.19 %   1.60 %   3.81 %   4.78 %   Steep but lower overall

December 31, 2003

   1.00 %   0.95 %   1.84 %   4.27 %   n/a     Steeper

December 31, 2004

   2.25 %   2.22 %   3.08 %   4.24 %   n/a     Less steep

 

71


Table of Contents

NOTE I  NATURAL OR ON-BALANCE SHEET HEDGES

 

A natural hedge is formed when two components of the balance sheet respond to changes in interest rates in an opposite manner. Assets and liabilities that have similar maturities and repricing characteristics form natural, i.e., non-derivative hedges to each other. For example, the market value of fixed rate Treasury securities with a remaining life of two years would tend to tend to increase the same amount as fixed-rate FHLB advances (borrowings) with the same maturity. Two assets or two liabilities can also hedge each other. For example fixed rate residential loans lose value when interest rates rise, but the servicing rights created when loans are sold with servicing retained will gain value when rates rise. The loans lose value because they earn less than the new market rate. The servicing rights increase in value because prepayments on the underlying loans will slow and the servicing fees will be received for a longer than expected period of time.

 

NOTE J  MORTGAGE-BACKED SECURITIES

 

A large number of home mortgage loans may be grouped together by a financial institution into a pool. Interest in this pool may then be sold to investors as securities. The payments received from the borrowers on their mortgages are used to pay the investors. The mortgage instruments themselves are the security or backing for the investors and the securities are termed mortgage-backed. The credit risk on the loans is not passed to the buyers of the securities.

 

Collateralized mortgage obligations are like mortgage-backed securities in that they involve a pool of mortgages. However, payments received from the borrowers are not equally paid to investors. Instead, investors purchase portions of the pool that have different repayment characteristics. This permits the investor to better time the cash flows that will be received.

 

Asset-backed securities are like mortgage-backed securities except that loans other than mortgages are the source of repayment. For instance, these might be credit card loans or auto loans.

 

NOTE K  RIDING THE YIELD CURVE

 

A common investment practice of financial institutions is called “riding the yield curve.” This technique relates to the normal shape of the yield curve explained in Note H. If a security maturing in five years is purchased when the shape of the yield curve is normal, it will provide a higher yield to the purchaser than a security with a remaining maturity of one year. If the five-year security is held for the full maturity it will be repaid at par. However, if it is sold a year prior to its maturity, it can likely be sold for a gain because it continues to earn a higher rate of interest over its remaining life than would be obtained by purchasing a one-year security just issued.

 

NOTE L  PEER DATA

 

In various places throughout this discussion, comparisons are made between ratios for the Company and for its holding company or FDIC peers.

 

The Bancorp or holding company peers are a group of 84 companies with an asset size of $3 billion to $10 billion. The peer information is reported in the Bank Holding Company Performance Report received from the FRB for the 3rd Quarter of 2004, the latest quarter for which the report has been distributed as of this writing.

 

The FDIC peer group comprises 300+ banks with an asset size of $1 billion to $10 billion, and the information set forth above is reported in or calculated from information reported in the FDIC Quarterly Banking Profile, Third Quarter 2004, which is the latest issue available. The publication does not report some of the statistics cited in this report by the separate size-based peer groups. In these instances, the figure cited is for all FDIC banks regardless of size.

 

The particular peer group used for comparison depends on the nature of the information in question. Company data like capital ratios and dividend payout are compared to other holding companies, because capital is generally managed at the holding company level and dividends to

 

72


Table of Contents

shareholders are paid from the holding company, not the individual banks. Expense and revenue ratios are also compared to other holding company data because many holding companies provide significant services to their subsidiary banks and may also provide services to customers as well. These items would not be included in FDIC bank-level data. Credit information relates to the making of loans, which is generally a bank-level activity. Therefore, FDIC data in this area is more pertinent.

 

NOTE M  CHANGES IN TARGET FEDERAL FUNDS RATES

 

From January 1, 2000 through December 31, 2004, the FOMC changed the target rates for Federal funds as follows:

 

Date

   Amount of
Change
 
 
  New Target
Rate
 
 

February 2000

   +0.25 %   5.75 %

March 2000

   +0.25 %   6.00 %

May 2000

   +0.50 %   6.50 %

January 2001

   -0.50 %   6.00 %

January 2001

   -0.50 %   5.50 %

March 2001

   -0.50 %   5.00 %

April 2001

   -0.50 %   4.50 %

May 2001

   -0.50 %   4.00 %

June 2001

   -0.25 %   3.75 %

August 2001

   -0.25 %   3.50 %

September 2001

   -0.50 %   3.00 %

October 2001

   -0.50 %   2.50 %

November 2001

   -0.50 %   2.00 %

December 2001

   -0.25 %   1.75 %

November 2002

   -0.50 %   1.25 %

June 2003

   -0.25 %   1.00 %

June 2004

   0.25 %   1.25 %

August 2004

   0.25 %   1.50 %

September 2004

   0.25 %   1.75 %

November 2004

   0.25 %   2.00 %

December 2004

   0.25 %   2.25 %

 

NOTE N COMPARISON OF CHANGES IN THE OPERATING EXPENSE TO AVERAGE ASSETS AND OPERATING EFFICIENCY RATIOS

 

The importance of not relying on one ratio or measurement to assess performance is illustrated by the changes from year to year in the two ratios in Table 15A. The two ratios changed dissimilarly from 2002 to 2003 and from 2003 to 2004. Operating expense as a percentage of assets increased 4 basis points or 1.2% of the 2002 ratio while the operating efficiency ratio increased by 302 basis points or 6.0% of the 2002 ratio. The reason for the different degree of change is the large growth in assets during 2003 arising from the leveraging program. A relatively large volume of assets was added which is the denominator in the first ratio, offsetting the increase in expenses. While adding net interest income, the lower yielding leverage assets did not increase income—the denominator of the operating efficiency ratio—by a comparable degree. Consequently, the increase in the numerator of this ratio increased proportionately more than the denominator and the ratio increased to a greater degree than did the operating expense to assets ratio. In 2004, the various components of the operating efficiency ratio remained in the same proportion as 2003, but assets increase in 2004 at a greater rate than expenses.

 

NOTE O  COMPUTATION OF THE OPERATING EFFICIENCY RATIO

 

The operating efficiency ratio is computed by dividing noninterest or operating expense by the sum of tax-equivalent (Note B) net interest income plus noninterest revenues exclusive of gains or losses on securities transactions.

 

73


Table of Contents

NOTE P  ANNUALIZED PERCENTAGE RATE OF CREDIT COSTS FOR RALS

 

To understand what appears to be a high APR for RALs, it may help to see the credit cost of the average RAL expressed as an APR. The average RAL is approximately $2,800. For 2004, the Company charged-off an average of about 105 basis points. 105 basis points for an average loan would be $29.40. Expressed as an APR, the $29.40 would be 38.3%. Funding and processing costs are incurred in addition to the credit costs.

 

NOTE Q  MARKET EFFICIENCY

 

In general, more active markets are more efficient, i.e., there is a narrower spread between the bid and asked price for a financial instrument the more frequently the instrument is traded. Consequently, if the Company is selling a thinly traded asset, it is not likely to get as high a price for the asset as it would for one that is widely traded. Similarly, the frequency of trading for a particular class of asset can vary and therefore the spread between bid and asked can increase or decrease for that same asset. Such variances can occur at different times of the year or based on economic news or conditions.

 

NOTE R  DERIVATIVE COSTS

 

Depending on the term and rate environment, there would likely be a difference in the starting rates between the two parties. For example, in an environment in which it is generally believed that rates will rise, to get another financial institution to enter into a swap contract under which it would receive fixed rate payments, the two rates would be set in a manner that the contract would start with the Company’s fixed rate obligation paying more than it received from the other institution on its variable rate obligation. Consequently, only if interest rates rose at least by the amount of that difference in initial rates would the swap have achieved its objective in the transaction.

 

74


Table of Contents
ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

 

We have provided the required quantitative and qualitative disclosures about market risk in Management’s Discussion and Analysis on pages 9 through 74.

 

ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA

 

Audited consolidated financial statements and related documents required by this item are included in this Annual Report on Form 10-K on the pages indicated:

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

   76

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2004 and 2003

   79

Consolidated Statements of Income for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002

   80

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002

   81

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002

   82

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002

   83

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

   84

 

The following unaudited supplementary data is included in this Annual Report on Form 10-K on the page indicated:

 

Quarterly Financial Data

   136

 

 

75


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Pacific Capital Bancorp:

 

We have completed an integrated audit of Pacific Capital Bancorp’s 2004 consolidated financial statements and of its internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004 and audits of its 2003 and 2002 consolidated financial statements in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Our opinions, based on our audits, are presented below.

 

Consolidated financial statements

 

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in shareholders’ equity and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Pacific Capital Bancorp and its subsidiaries (the Company) at December 31, 2004 and 2003, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2004 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit of financial statements includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

Internal control over financial reporting

 

Also, we have audited management’s assessment, included in Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting appearing under Item 9A, that Pacific Capital Bancorp did not maintain effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, because the Company did not maintain effective controls over the application of generally accepted accounting principles for leasing transactions and other non-routine transactions or over approval of general ledger journal entries, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission ( COSO ). The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Our responsibility is to express opinions on management’s assessment and on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.

 

We conducted our audit of internal control over financial reporting in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. An audit of internal control over financial reporting includes obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, evaluating management’s assessment, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control, and performing such other procedures as we consider necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinions.

 

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are

 

76


Table of Contents

recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

 

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

 

A material weakness is a control deficiency, or combination of control deficiencies, that results in more than a remote likelihood that a material misstatement of the annual or interim financial statements will not be prevented or detected. The following material weaknesses have been identified and included in management’s assessment.

 

1.    As of December 31, 2004, the Company did not maintain effective controls over the application of generally accepted accounting principles for leasing transactions and other non-routine transactions. The misapplications of generally accepted accounting principles involved: (a) initially recording a capital lease as an operating lease; (b) failing to record rental expense using a level expense in those instances where the lease terms included specific rent increases or minimum increases; (c) failing to record losses from the low-income housing tax credit limited partnerships in the appropriate accounting period; and (d) errors in the accounting for the purchase of Pacific Crest Capital, Inc. (PCCI) in March 2004 including errors in the accounting for stay-put bonuses. This control deficiency did not result in a misstatement of the 2004 annual or interim financial statements although it did result in adjustments to the 2004 consolidated financial statements. Additionally, this control deficiency could result in a material misstatement to leasing transactions or other non-routine transactions that could result in a material misstatement to the annual or interim consolidated statements that would not be prevented or detected. Accordingly, management has determined that this condition constitutes a material weakness.

 

2.    As of December 31, 2004, the Company did not maintain effective controls over approval of general ledger journal entries. Specifically, the Company has an open general ledger system in which journal entries can be processed without appropriate approval. Additionally, reconciliations of the general ledger that would detect unauthorized journal entries were not performed for general ledger accounts relating to prepaid and other expenses, accounts payable, cash, federal funds sold and general and administrative expense at the end of the accounting period. Furthermore, documentation surrounding the monitoring of monthly operating results that would detect unauthorized journal entries was either not prepared or retained. These control deficiencies in the aggregate did not result in any misstatements in the 2004 annual or interim consolidated financial statements; however, they could result in a material misstatement to the annual or interim consolidated statements that would not be prevented or detected. Accordingly, management has determined that these deficiencies aggregate to a material weakness.

 

These material weaknesses were considered in determining the nature, timing, and extent of audit tests applied in our audit of the 2004 consolidated financial statements, and our opinion regarding the effectiveness of the Company s internal control over financial reporting does not affect our opinion on those consolidated financial statements.

 

As described in Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting, Management excluded certain elements of internal control over financial reporting of PCCI from its evaluation of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004 because PCCI was acquired by the Company in a purchase business combination during 2004. We have also excluded certain elements of internal control over financial reporting of PCCI from our audit of internal control over financial reporting. PCCI’s loans and fixed assets and pre-tax income represent $439.8 million and $6.1 million, respectively, of the Company’s related consolidated financial statement amounts as of and for the year ended December 31, 2004. PCCI’s investment portfolio was integrated with the Company’s investment portfolio at the time of the closing of the acquisition and was included in management’s and our evaluation of internal control over financial reporting.

 

77


Table of Contents

In our opinion, management’s assessment that Pacific Capital Bancorp did not maintain effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, is fairly stated, in all material respects, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the COSO. Also, in our opinion, because of the effect of the material weaknesses described above on the achievement of the objectives of the control criteria, Pacific Capital Bancorp has not maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the COSO.

 

PRICEWATERHOUSECOOPERS LLP

 

San Francisco, CA

March 22, 2005

 

78


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

Pacific Capital Bancorp

and Subsidiaries

 

(amounts in thousands except per share amounts)    December 31,

   2004

   2003

Assets:

             

Cash and due from banks (Note 4)

   $ 133,116    $ 150,010

Federal funds sold and securities purchased under agreements to resell

          33,010
    

  

Total cash and cash equivalents

     133,116      183,020

Securities—available-for-sale at fair value (Note 5)

     1,524,874      1,317,962

Loans (Note 6)

     4,062,294      3,180,879

Less: allowance for credit losses (Note 7)

     53,977      49,550
    

  

Net loans

     4,008,317      3,131,329

Premises, equipment and other long-term assets (Note 8)

     100,282      73,959

Accrued interest receivable

     24,000      19,608

Goodwill (Note 9)

     109,745      30,048

Other intangible assets (Note 9)

     5,321      2,962

Other assets (Note 15)

     119,130      100,742

  

  

Total assets

   $ 6,024,785    $ 4,859,630

  

  

Liabilities:

             

Deposits: (Note 11)

             

Noninterest-bearing demand deposits

   $ 1,013,772    $ 924,106

Interest-bearing deposits

     3,498,518      2,930,611
    

  

Total deposits

     4,512,290      3,854,717

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase and Federal funds purchased (Note 12)

     179,041      58,339

Long-term debt and other borrowings (Note 13)

     823,122      499,548

Obligations under capital lease

     9,130     

Accrued interest payable and other liabilities (Notes 14, 15, and 16)

     41,520      47,978

  

  

Total liabilities

     5,565,103      4,460,582

  

  

Commitments and contingencies (Note 17)

             

Shareholders’ equity (Notes 16, 18 and 20):

             

Common stock—no par value; $0.25 per share stated value; shares authorized: 80,000; shares issued and outstanding:

             

45,719 in 2004 and 45,284 in 2003

     11,434      8,494

Preferred stock—no par value; shares authorized: 1,000; shares issued and outstanding: none

         

Surplus

     78,903      72,916

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     7,970      12,807

Retained earnings

     361,375      304,831

  

  

Total shareholders’ equity

     459,682      399,048

  

  

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

   $ 6,024,785    $ 4,859,630

  

  

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

79


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS

OF INCOME

Pacific Capital Bancorp

and Subsidiaries

 

(in thousands, except per share data)    Years Ended December 31,

   2004

    2003

   2002

Interest income:

                     

Loans (Note 6)

   $ 264,900     $ 226,413    $ 222,754

Securities

     60,533       44,713      42,596

Federal funds sold and securities purchased under agreement to resell

     748       1,050      1,346

Commercial paper

           13      50

  


 

  

Total interest income

     326,181       272,189      266,746

Interest expense:

                     

Deposits (Note 11)

     42,142       36,161      46,904

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase and Federal funds purchased

     1,589       743      1,184

Long-term debt and other borrowings (Note 13)

     25,480       17,029      14,711

  


 

  

Total interest expense

     69,211       53,933      62,799

Net interest income

     256,970       218,256      203,947

Provision for credit losses (Note 7)

     12,809       18,286      19,727

  


 

  

Net interest income after provision for credit losses

     244,161       199,970      184,220

  


 

  

Noninterest revenue:

                     

Service charges on deposit accounts

     16,529       15,464      14,138

Trust fees (Note 1)

     15,429       14,399      13,273

Refund transfer fees

     21,049       19,841      16,645

Other service charges, commissions and fees (Note 21)

     17,756       16,939      13,456

Net gain on sale of tax refund loans

     2,945       8,031      10,170

Net gain (loss) on sales and calls of securities

     (2,018 )     2,018      684

Other income (Note 21)

     3,945       3,589      5,418

  


 

  

Total noninterest revenue

     75,635       80,281      73,784

Operating expense:

                     

Salaries and benefits (Notes 1, 14, and 16)

     94,697       83,902      74,420

Net occupancy expense (Notes 8 and 17)

     15,970       14,744      13,782

Equipment rental, depreciation, and maintenance (Note 8)

     8,939       9,156      8,233

Other expense (Note 22)

     60,300       54,436      46,853

  


 

  

Total operating expense

     179,906       162,238      143,288

Income before provision for income taxes

     139,890       118,013      114,716

Provision for income taxes (Note 15)

     51,946       42,342      39,865

  


 

  

Net income

   $ 87,944     $ 75,671    $ 74,851

Basic earnings per share (Note 3)

   $ 1.93     $ 1.66    $ 1.61

Diluted earnings per share (Note 3)

   $ 1.92     $ 1.64    $ 1.60

Average number of shares—basic*

     45,535       45,646      46,393

Average number of shares—diluted*

     45,911       46,083      46,653

Dividends declared per share (Note 19)

   $ 0.69     $ 0.60    $ 0.53

Dividends paid per share (Note 19)

   $ 0.69     $ 0.60    $ 0.53

 

* Prior year shares were adjusted to account for stock split in June 2004.

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

80


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Pacific Capital Bancorp

and Subsidiaries

 

(in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,

   2004

    2003

   2002

Net income

   $ 87,944     $ 75,671    $ 74,851

  


 

  

Other comprehensive income—

                     

Unrealized gain on securities:

                     

Unrealized holding (losses) gains arising during period

     (10,364 )     4,168      12,359

Less: reclassification adjustment for (losses) gains included in net income

     (2,018 )     2,018      684

Less: income tax expense (income) related to items of other comprehensive income

     (3,509 )     904      4,909

  


 

  

Other comprehensive income

     (4,837 )     1,246      6,766

  


 

  

Comprehensive income

   $ 83,107     $ 76,917    $ 81,617

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

81


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF

CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Pacific Capital Bancorp

and Subsidiaries

 

(in thousands except per share
amounts)
                     Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income


    Retained
Earnings


       
     Common Stock                  

   Shares

    Amount

    Surplus

        Total

 

Balance, December 31, 2001

   34,942     $ 8,737     $ 106,929     $ 4,795     $ 205,415     $ 325,876  

Activity for 2002:

                                              

Exercise of stock options (Note 18)

   352       89       5,422                   5,511  

Retirement of common stock (Note 18)

   (744 )     (185 )     (18,037 )                 (18,222 )

Cash dividends declared at $0.53 per share

                           (23,707 )     (23,707 )

Changes in unrealized gain on securities available-for-sale, net

                     6,766             6,766  

Net income

                           74,851       74,851  

  

 


 


 


 


 


Balance, December 31, 2002

   34,550       8,641       94,314       11,561       256,559       371,075  

Activity for 2003:

                                              

Exercise of stock options (Note 18)

   337       84       6,579                   6,663  

Retirement of common stock (Note 18)

   (924 )     (231 )     (27,977 )                 (28,208 )

Cash dividends declared at $0.60 per share

                           (27,399 )     (27,399 )

Changes in unrealized gain on securities available-for-sale, net

                     1,246             1,246  

Net income

                           75,671       75,671  

  

 


 


 


 


 


Balance, December 31, 2003

   33,963       8,494       72,916       12,807       304,831       399,048  

Activity for 2004:

                                              

Exercise of stock options (Note 18)

   399       100       8,911                   9,011  

Stock split

   11,357       2,840       (2,840 )                  

Repurchase of fractional shares resulting from stock split

               (84 )                 (84 )

Cash dividends declared at $0.69 per share

                           (31,400 )     (31,400 )

Changes in unrealized gain on securities available-for-sale, net

                     (4,837 )           (4,837 )

Net income

                           87,944       87,944  

  

 


 


 


 


 


Balance, December 31, 2004

   45,719     $ 11,434     $ 78,903     $ 7,970     $ 361,375     $ 459,682  


 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

82


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS

OF CASH FLOWS

Pacific Capital Bancorp

and Subsidiaries

 

 

(dollars in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Cash flows from operating activities:

                        

Net Income

   $ 87,944     $ 75,671     $ 74,851  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operations:

                        

Depreciation and amortization

     10,582       9,920       9,685  

Provision for credit losses

     12,809       18,286       19,727  

Provision (benefit) for deferred income taxes

     2,497       2,708       4,801  

Net amortization of discounts and premiums for securities and commercial paper

     1,618       2,944       (2,539 )

Reverse amortization on capital leases

     200              

Amortization of net deferred loan fees

     5,298       3,854       3,357  

Change in accrued interest receivable and other assets

     (16,969 )     3,292       (17,598 )

Change in accrued interest payable and other liabilities

     5,666       1,796       (338 )

Net loss (gain) on sales and calls of securities

     2,018       (2,018 )     (684 )

Increase (decrease) in income taxes payable

     1,436       8,813       1,581  

  


 


 


Net cash provided by operating activities

     113,099       125,266       92,843  

  


 


 


Cash flows from investing activities:

                        

Purchase of banks or branches (Note 9)

     (123,282 )           48,678  

Proceeds from sale of securities

     86,745       145,926       74,848  

Proceeds from calls, maturities, and partial pay downs of AFS securities

     305,808       290,866       222,981  

Proceeds from calls and maturities of HTM securities

           3,987       9,661  

Purchase of AFS securities

     (492,847 )     (888,259 )     (390,874 )

Proceeds from sale or maturity of commercial paper

           15,000       50,000  

Purchase of commercial paper

           (14,987 )     (49,950 )

Net increase in loans made to customers

     (484,505 )     (187,470 )     (231,178 )

Purchase (sale) of tax credit investment

     (180 )     3,922       (8,409 )

Net purchase or investment in premises and equipment

     (25,362 )     (15,662 )     (12,952 )

  


 


 


Net cash used in investing activities

     (733,623 )     (646,677 )     (287,195 )

  


 


 


Cash flows from financing activities:

                        

Net increase in deposits

     366,202       338,640       90,065  

Net increase in borrowings with maturities of 90 days or less

     93,797       28,616       34,650  

Proceeds from long-term debt and other borrowing

     244,314       273,200       114,500  

Payments on long-term debt and other borrowing

     (111,220 )     (38,621 )     (87,862 )

Proceeds from issuance of common stock (Note 18)

     8,927       6,663       5,511  

Payments to retire common stock (Note 18)

           (28,208 )     (18,222 )

Dividends paid

     (31,400 )     (27,399 )     (23,707 )

  


 


 


Net cash provided by financing activities

     570,620       552,891       114,935  

  


 


 


Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     (49,904 )     31,480       (79,417 )

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     183,020       151,540       230,957  

  


 


 


Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

   $ 133,116     $ 183,020     $ 151,540  

  


 


 


Supplemental disclosure:

                        

Interest paid during the year

   $ 67,370     $ 53,906     $ 63,950  

Income taxes paid during the year

   $ 49,000     $ 33,000     $ 41,850  

Non-cash additions to other real estate owned (Note 1)

   $ 2,910     $     $ 438  

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

83


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Pacific Capital Bancorp

and Subsidiaries

 

1.    SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

Nature of Operations

 

Pacific Capital Bancorp (the “Company”) is a bank holding company organized under the laws of California. Through its banking subsidiary, Pacific Capital Bank, N.A. (“PCBNA”), the Company provides a full range of commercial banking services to individuals and business enterprises. The banking services include making commercial, leasing, consumer, commercial and residential real estate loans and Small Business Administration guaranteed loans. Deposits are accepted for checking, interest-bearing checking (“NOW”), money-market, savings, and time accounts. PCBNA also offers safe deposit boxes, travelers’ checks, money orders, foreign exchange services, and cashiers checks. A wide range of wealth management services is offered through the Trust and Investment Services division. PCBNA is also one of the largest nationwide providers of financial services related to the electronic filing of income tax returns.

 

PCBNA conducts its banking services under five brand names: Santa Barbara Bank & Trust (“SBB&T”), First National Bank of Central California (“FNB”), South Valley National Bank (“SVNB”), San Benito Bank (“SBB”), and Pacific Capital Bank (“PCB”). The offices using the SBB&T brand are located in Santa Barbara and Ventura Counties. Offices using FNB are located in the counties of Monterey and Santa Cruz. Offices in southern Santa Clara County use SVNB and offices in San Benito County are branded SBB. These brand names were formally the names of independent banks merged at various times into one another and eventually into PCBNA. The offices of the former Pacific Crest Bank that were acquired in the purchase by the Company of Pacific Crest Capital Inc. (“PCCI”) described in Note 2 were merged into PCBNA and use the brand name Pacific Capital Bank.

 

The Company uses two other subsidiaries for its securitization activities as explained in Note 10 below. Two other subsidiaries are essentially inactive.

 

Basis of Presentation

 

The accounting and reporting policies of the Company are in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States (“GAAP”) and conform to practices within the banking industry. The Consolidated Financial Statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries. All significant intercompany balances and transactions are eliminated.

 

The preparation of consolidated financial statements in accordance with GAAP requires Management to make certain estimates and assumptions which affect the amounts of reported assets and liabilities as well as contingent assets and liabilities as of the date of these financial statements. These estimates and assumptions also affect the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period(s). Although Management believes these estimates and assumptions to be reasonably accurate, actual results may differ.

 

GAAP requires that all amounts and figures presented in the Company’s financial statements be restated for any business combinations that occurred prior to July 1, 2001 that were accounted for as poolings of interest. GAAP does not permit business combinations after that date to be accounted for as poolings of interest.

 

Certain amounts in the 2002 and 2003 financial statements have been reclassified to be comparable with classifications used in the 2004 financial statements.

 

Securities

 

The Company purchases securities with funds that are not needed for immediate liquidity purposes and have not been lent to customers. Securities may be classified as held-to-maturity, as available-

 

84


Table of Contents

for-sale, or as trading securities. The appropriate classification is decided at the time of purchase. Only those securities that the Company both intends to hold and has the ability to hold until their maturity may be classified as held-to-maturity. Securities that might be sold prior to maturity because of interest rate changes, to meet liquidity needs, or to better match the repricing characteristics of funding sources are classified as available-for-sale. Securities purchased specifically for later resale at a gain are classified as trading securities. All securities currently held by the Company are classified as available-for-sale. The Company does not purchase trading securities.

 

For securities that are classified as available-for-sale, interest income is recognized based on the coupon rate increased by the accretion of discounts or decreased by the amortization of premiums using the effective interest method including the accretion of discounts and the amortization of premiums. Discount is the excess of the face value of the security over the cost, and accretion of the discount is the periodic recognition of interest income above any cash interest received to increase the carrying amount up to the face value that will be received at maturity. Accretion thus increases the effective yield for the security above the interest rate for its coupon. Premium is the excess of cost over the face value of the security, and amortization of the premium is a periodic charge to interest income to reduce the carrying amount to the face value that will be received at maturity. Amortization reduces the effective yield for the security below the coupon rate. Discounts are accreted and premiums are amortized using the effective yield method over its estimated life.

 

Securities classified as available-for-sale are reported on the consolidated balance sheets at their fair value. As the fair value of these securities changes, the changes are included as elements of comprehensive income in the consolidated statements of comprehensive income. The sum of the accumulated change since purchase for these securities is reported net of the income tax effect on the consolidated balance sheets as a separate component of equity captioned “Accumulated other comprehensive income.” Accounting for changes in market value for available-for-sale securities causes some volatility in the balance sheet.

 

In December 2003, the Company recognized that the flexibility to sell any of its securities prior to maturity to manage interest rate risk or to provide liquidity was more desirable than the avoidance of the balance sheet volatility and consequently reclassified all of its securities as available-for-sale. This reclassification prevents for at least two years any classification by the Company of subsequent purchases as held-to-maturity. When securities are sold, the unrealized gain or loss is reclassified from other comprehensive income to net income.

 

All investments reported by the Company as securities are debt securities. However, PCBNA is a member of both the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco (“FRBSF”) and the Federal Home Loan Bank of San Francisco (“FHLB”), and as a condition of membership in both organizations, it is required to purchase stock. In the case of the FRBSF, the amount of stock that is required to be held is based on PCBNA’s capital accounts. As PCBNA’s capital (and the capital of SBB&T and FNB before the merger of their charters) has increased, it has been required to purchase additional shares. In the case of the FHLB, the amount of stock required to be purchased is based on the borrowing capacity desired by PCBNA. While technically these are considered equity securities, there is no market for the FRBSF and FHLB stock. Therefore, the shares are considered as restricted investment securities and reported among other assets, on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. Such investments are carried at cost. The dividend income received from the stock is reported in the other income category within noninterest revenue.

 

A security may become impaired, i.e. there may be an unrecognized loss. The impairment may be temporary or other than temporary. In the case of debt securities, the impairment may imply a judgment by the market that the issuer will not be able to make interest and principal payments as contractually required. Alternatively, the impairment may be due only to changes in interest rates that do not impact the issuer’s ability to meet its contractual obligations. The Company periodically reviews impaired securities to determine whether the impairment is other than temporary. Factors that would be considered in deciding whether the impairment is other than temporary include:

 

·   the nature of the investment;

 

·   the cause(s) of the impairment;

 

·   the severity and duration of the impairment;

 

85


Table of Contents
·   the strength of the market for the security;

 

·   the length of time the Company intends and is able to hold the security; and

 

·   credit ratings for the security and its sector.

 

If the impairment is determined to be other than temporary, the Company will recognize this impairment by charging a realized loss to earnings.

 

The Company uses specific identification to determine the cost of securities sold.

 

Repurchase agreements

 

The Company occasionally enters into repurchase agreements where by it purchases securities or loans from another institution and agrees to resell them at a later date for an amount in excess of the purchase price. While in form these are agreements to purchase and resell, in substance they are short-term secured investments in which the excess of the sale price over the purchase price represents interest income. For security or collateral, the Company receives assets with a higher fair value than the amount invested. Depending on the type of asset, this excess may be from 102% to 105% of the funds invested.

 

Loans and Interest and Fees from Loans

 

Loans are carried at amounts advanced to the borrowers less principal payments collected. Interest on loans is calculated on a simple interest basis, that is, interest is not compounded. The Company collects loan origination and commitment fees. These fees are not recognized as income when they are collected. Instead they are offset by certain direct loan origination costs and then recognized over the contractual life of the loan as an adjustment to the interest earned using the effective interest method. The net unrecognized fees represent unearned revenue, and they are reported as reductions of the loan principal outstanding. If the deferred costs are greater than the deferred fees, the net amount will be an addition to the loan principal.

 

Included in loans are lease receivables, which are in substance loans.

 

Nonaccrual Loans:  When a borrower is not making payments as contractually required by the note, the Company must decide whether it is appropriate to continue to accrue interest. Generally, loans are placed in a nonaccrual status when the loan has become delinquent by more than 90 days. Nonaccrual status means that the Company stops accruing or recognizing interest income on the loan. The Company may decide that it is appropriate to continue to accrue interest on some loans more than 90 days delinquent if they are well-secured by collateral and collection efforts are being actively pursued. Nonetheless, such loans are included among noncurrent loans.

 

When a loan is placed in a nonaccrual status, any accrued but uncollected interest for the loan is written off against interest income from other loans of the same type in the period in which the status is changed. Subsequent payments received from the customer are applied to principal and no further interest income is recognized until the principal has been paid in full or until circumstances have changed such that payments are again consistently received as contractually required. In the case of commercial customers, the pattern of payment must also be accompanied by a change in the financial condition of the company such that there are strong prospects of continued timely payments.

 

Impaired Loans:  A loan is identified as impaired when it is probable that interest and principal will not be collected according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Because this definition is very similar to that of a nonaccrual loan, most impaired loans will be classified as nonaccrual. However, there are some loans that are termed impaired because of doubt regarding collectibility of interest and principal according to the contractual terms, but which are presently both fully secured by collateral and are current in their interest and principal payments. These impaired loans are not classified as nonaccrual. Under GAAP, the term “impaired” only applies to certain types or classes of loans. Consequently, there may be some nonaccrual loans that are not categorized as impaired.

 

86


Table of Contents

Consumer borrowers may generally prepay their loans. At various points in the interest rate cycle, the Company expects the rate of prepayments to increase. The effect of changes in the rate of prepayments impacts the amortization of deferred origination fees and costs. The Company recognizes the remaining unamortized amounts when a pay off occurs. Prepayment assumptions are developed from commonly available industry data.

 

Allowance for Credit Losses

 

If a borrower’s financial condition becomes such that he or she is not able to fully repay a loan or lease obligation extended by the Company, a loss to the Company has occurred. When the Company has determined that such a loss has occurred, the principal amount of the loan, or a portion thereof, is charged-off so that the value of the Company’s assets on the financial statements are not overstated by including within them an uncollectible loan. However, because loan officers cannot be in daily contact with each borrower, the Company almost never knows exactly when such a loss might have occurred, that is, when a loan becomes uncollectible. Therefore, in order to fairly state the value of the loan and leasing portfolios, it is necessary to make an estimate of the amount of loss inherent but unrecognized in these credit portfolios prior to the realization of such losses through charge-off.

 

GAAP, banking regulations, and sound banking practices require that the Company record this estimate of unrecognized losses in the form of an allowance for credit losses. When losses are recognized, they are charged-off against this allowance. When the Company recovers an amount on a loan previously charged-off, the recovery increases the amount of allowance available for future losses from other loans.

 

The Company’s estimate of unrecognized losses changes from period to period based on the size and composition of the loan portfolio, current economic conditions, information about specific borrowers, and a variety of other factors. The amount of the allowance is changed to reflect the change in this estimate. If the estimate of loss requires an increase in the allowance, it is recorded through the provision for credit losses, which is a charge to income in the current period. If the estimate of loss requires a decrease in the allowance, a negative provision or reversal of provision expense recognized in previous periods is recorded.

 

The allowance for credit losses consists of several components. The first component is that portion of the allowance specifically related to those loans that are categorized as impaired under provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 114, Accounting by Creditors for Impairment of a Loan (“SFAS 114”). The remaining components include a statistically determined portion assigned to groups or pools of loans, a specifically assigned portion relating to individual loans, and an allocated portion. These components are reported together in the allowance for credit loss in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and in Note 7. In total, the allowance for credit losses is maintained at a level considered adequate to provide for losses inherent in the loan portfolio. However, the allowance is based on estimates, and ultimate losses may vary from the current estimates. These estimates are reviewed periodically and, as adjustments become necessary, they are reported as provisions against earnings in the periods in which they become known.

 

Component for Impaired Loans:  GAAP recognizes that some impaired loans may have risk characteristics that are unique to the individual borrower and other impaired loans may have risk characteristics in common with other impaired loans. In the former case, the creditor is expected to apply the measurement methods mentioned in the preceding paragraph on a loan-by-loan basis. In the latter case, the creditor is allowed to aggregate those loans and use historical statistics in measuring the amount of the valuation allowance needed. Because the loans currently identified as impaired by the Company have unique risk characteristics, the valuation allowance disclosed in Note 5 for impaired loans is determined on a loan-by-loan basis. The amount of the valuation allowance for any particular impaired loan is determined by comparing the recorded investment in each loan with its value measured by one of three methods: (1) by discounting estimated future cash flows at the effective interest rate of the loan; (2) by observing the loan’s market price if it is of a kind for which there is a secondary market; or (3) by valuing the underlying collateral. A valuation allowance is established for any amount by which the recorded investment exceeds the value of the impaired loan. If the value of the loan, as determined by one of the above methods, exceeds the recorded investment in the loan, no valuation allowance for that loan is established.

 

87


Table of Contents

Statistical or Historical Loss Component:  The amount of this component is determined by applying loss estimation factors to outstanding loans and leases. The loss factors are based on the Company’s historical loss experience for each category of credits. Because historical loss experience differs for the various categories of credits, the loss estimation factors applied to each category also differ.

 

Component for Specific Credits:  There may be credits, even though not classified as impaired, for which an allowance computed by application of the appropriate historical or statistical loss estimation factor would not adequately provide for the unconfirmed loss inherent in the credit. This might occur for a variety of reasons such as the size of the credit, the industry of the borrower, or the terms of the credit. In these situations, Management will estimate an amount of allowance adequate to absorb the probable loss that has occurred. The specific component is made up of the sum of these specific amounts.

 

Allocated Component:  The allocated component of the allowance for credit losses relates to the statistical or historical loss component, in that the allocated component is used to modify the historical loss rates applied to different groups of loans. For example, the historical loss rates are the averages for the last five years of losses. This period includes periods of both strong and weak economic growth. If the current economy were strong, the historical loss rates used alone to estimate losses inherent in the portfolio would tend to overestimate the losses. In weak economic periods the average loss rate for the last five years would tend to underestimate the inherent losses.

 

Among the considerations addressed by this component are the following:

 

·   the historical loss estimation factors used for statistical allocation may not give sufficient weight to such considerations as the current general economic and business conditions that affect the Company’s borrowers or to specific industry conditions that affect borrowers in that industry;

 

·   the historical loss factors may not give sufficient weight to current trends in credit quality and collateral values and the duration of the current business cycle; and

 

·   the historical loss factors are not derived in a manner that considers loan volumes and concentrations and seasoning of the loan portfolio.

 

Allocation factors for these considerations are multiplied by the outstanding balances in the various loan categories to adjust the historical loss rates and thereby provide what the Company believes is a better estimate of the loss inherent in the loan portfolios.

 

Each of these considerations could perhaps be addressed by developing additional loss estimation factors for smaller, discrete groups of loans and for different phases of the economic cycle. However, the factors are used precisely so that the losses in smaller loans do not have to be individually estimated. Segmenting the loan portfolio and then developing and applying separate factors becomes impracticable and, with the smaller groups, the factors themselves become less statistically valid. Even for experienced reviewers, grading loans and estimating possible losses involves a significant element of judgment regarding the present situation with respect to individual loans and the portfolio as a whole. Therefore, Management regards it as both a more practical and prudent practice to allocate allowance for the above risk elements as modifications to the allowance assigned by specific or historical loss factors.

 

Allowance for credit loss from refund anticipation loans (RALs):  The process of estimating an allowance for credit losses related to RALs at the end of the first three quarters of the year is similar to that used for the other categories that have large numbers of small-balance loans, e.g. consumer and residential real estate. Specifically, the Company uses loss rates from prior years to estimate the inherent losses.

 

Payments in the current year on loans made in a prior year occur, but are dependent on the customer applying for a new loan. Therefore, the Company does not establish an allowance for credit loss for unpaid loans at the end of each year. Instead, all loans not repaid by December 31 are charged-off.

 

The computation of the allowance for credit losses related to RALs is similar to that used for the other categories that have large numbers of small-balance loans, e.g. consumer and residential real estate. Specifically, the Company uses loss rates from prior years to estimate the inherent losses.

 

88


Table of Contents

Credit loss from off-balance sheet instruments:  In addition to the exposure to credit loss from outstanding loans, the Company is also exposed to credit loss from certain off-balance sheet instruments like loan commitments and letters of credit. Losses are experienced when the Company is contractually obligated to make a payment under these instruments and must seek repayment from a financially weak borrower.

 

As with its outstanding loans, the Company determines an estimate of losses inherent in these contractual obligations. However, unlike the allowance for credit losses on outstanding loans that is reported as an offset to the balance of loans, the estimate for credit losses on off-balance sheet instruments is included within other liabilities. The charge to income that establishes this liability is included as a noninterest expense rather than as provision expense.

 

Income Taxes

 

The Company uses the accrual method of accounting for financial reporting purposes as well as for tax return purposes. However, there are still several items of income and expense that are recognized in different periods for tax return purposes than for financial reporting purposes. When items of income or expense are recognized in different years for financial reporting purposes than for tax return purposes, they represent “temporary differences.” Some of these temporary differences are resolved or unwound in the next year, while others take a number of years to unwind. The Company is required to provide in its financial statements for the eventual liability or deduction in its tax return for these temporary differences until the item of income or expense has been recognized for both financial reporting and for taxes. The provision is recorded in the form of deferred tax expense or benefit as the temporary differences arise. In Note 15 is a table identifying the temporary differences at the end of each of the last three years and the amount of the deferred tax asset or liability that applies to each. Deferred tax assets represent future deductions in the Company’s income tax return, while deferred tax liabilities represent future payments that must be made.

 

Premises, Equipment and Other Long-term Assets

 

Premises and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation is charged against income over the estimated useful lives of the assets. For most assets with longer useful lives, accelerated methods of depreciation are used in the early years, switching to the straight-line method in later years. Assets with shorter useful lives are generally depreciated by straight-line method. Generally, the estimated useful lives of other items of premises and equipment are as follows:

 

Buildings and improvements

   10-25 years

Furniture and equipment

   5-7 years

Electronic equipment and software

   3-5 years

 

Note 8 includes a table identifying the carrying amounts of the major classes of fixed assets.

 

The cost of developing or modifying software is capitalized in accordance with the provisions of Statement of Position 98-1 issued by American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (“AICPA”) and is included with the cost of purchased software in other assets. Amortization of these costs is included with software expense in other operating expense.

 

Leases

 

The Company leases most of its branch and support offices. Leases are accounted for as capital leases or operating leases based on the requirements of GAAP. Specifically, when the terms of the lease indicate that the Company is leasing the building for most of its useful economic life or the sum of lease payments represents most of the fair value of the building, the transaction is accounted for as a capital lease wherein the building is recognized as an asset of the Company and the net present value of the contracted lease payments is recognized as a long-term liability.

 

89


Table of Contents

Most of the Company’s leases have cost-of-living adjustments based on the consumer price index. Some of the leases have fixed increases provided for in the terms or increases based on the index but have a minimum increase irrespective of the change in index. In these cases, the lease expense is recognized on a straight-line basis over the terms of the lease.

 

Leasehold improvements are amortized over the terms of the leases or the estimated useful lives of the improvements, whichever is shorter.

 

Mortgage and Other Loan Servicing Rights

 

Included in other assets are mortgage and other loan servicing rights. Companies engaged in mortgage banking activities or in servicing loans for others are required to recognize the rights to service those loans for others as separate assets. Such rights may be purchased from another financial institution or may arise from the sale of loans where servicing is retained. The Company has no purchased servicing rights. When the Company sells loans the value of these rights is recorded as a gain on sale and as a receivable. The amount of the gain and receivable is determined by computing the net present value of the servicing fees to be received over the expected lives of the loans. The servicing rights are amortized in proportion to and over the estimated lives of the loans as a charge against income.

 

Estimates of the lives of the loans are based on several industry standard sources. These sources are tested periodically to determine how close to actual prepayment rates their estimates were. In applying the estimated prepayment rates, the Company segregates the rights into separate strata based on time to contractual maturity and coupon rate of the underlying loans.

 

Trust Fees

 

Fees for most trust services are based on the market value of customer assets, and the fees are accrued monthly. Fees for unusual or infrequent services are recognized when the fee can be determined.

 

Earnings Per Share

 

The computation of basic earnings per share for all periods presented in the Consolidated Statements of Income is based on the weighted average number of shares outstanding during each year retroactively restated for stock dividends, and stock splits.

 

Diluted earnings per share include the effect of common stock equivalents for the Company, which include only shares issuable on the exercise of outstanding options. The number of options assumed to be exercised is computed using the “Treasury Stock Method.” This method assumes that all options with an exercise price lower than the average stock price for the period have been exercised at the average market price for the period and that the proceeds from the assumed exercise have been used for market repurchases of shares at the average market price. The Company receives a tax benefit for the difference between the market price and the exercise price of non-qualified options when options are exercised. The treasury stock method also assumes that the tax benefit from the assumed exercise of options is used to retire shares.

 

A reconciliation of the computation of basic earnings per share and diluted earnings per share is presented in Note 3.

 

Statement of Cash Flows

 

For purposes of reporting cash flows, “cash and cash equivalents” include cash and due from banks, Federal funds sold, and securities purchased under agreements to resell. Federal funds sold and securities purchased under agreements to resell are one-day transactions, with the Company’s funds being returned to it the next business day.

 

90


Table of Contents

Postretirement Health Benefits

 

The Company provides eligible retirees with postretirement health care and dental benefit coverage. These benefits are also provided to the spouses and dependents of retirees on a shared cost basis. Benefits for retirees and spouses are subject to deductibles, co-payment provisions, and other limitations. The expected cost of such benefits is charged to expense during the years that the employees render service to the Company and thereby earn their eligibility for benefits. Details about the plan and the accounting for it are presented in Note 14.

 

Other Real Estate Owned and Other Foreclosed Property

 

Real estate acquired through foreclosure on a loan or by surrender of the real estate in lieu of foreclosure is called other real estate owned (“OREO”). OREO is carried in the Company’s financial records at the lower of the outstanding balance of the loan before acquisition or the fair value of the OREO less estimated costs to sell. If the outstanding balance of the loan is greater than the fair value of the OREO at the time of the acquisition, the difference is charged-off against the allowance for credit losses. Any senior debt to which other real estate owned is subject is included in the carrying amount of the property and an offsetting liability is reported along with other borrowings. Other collateral obtained through foreclosure proceedings is accounted for in a similar fashion.

 

During the time the property is held, all related operating or maintenance costs are expensed as incurred. Later decreases in the fair value of the property are charged to operating expense by establishing valuation allowances in the period in which they become known. Increases in the fair value may be recognized as reductions of operating expense but only to the extent that they represent recoveries of amounts previously written-down. Expenditures related to improvements are capitalized to the extent that they are realizable through increases in the fair value of the properties. Increases in market value in excess of the fair value at the time of foreclosure are recognized only when the property is sold.

 

At December 31, 2003, the Company held no real estate properties that had been acquired through foreclosure. At December 31, 2004, the Company held OREO that had a fair value, less estimated costs, of $2.9 million.

 

Foreclosed property other than real estate held by the Company at both December 31, 2003 and 2004 was immaterial in amount.

 

Stock-Based Compensation

 

While Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123R, Share Based Payment (“SFAS 123R”) will change the accounting for employee stock options effective for the first quarter beginning after June 30, 2005, GAAP currently permits the Company to use either of two methods for accounting for compensation cost in connection with employee stock options. The first method—termed the “fair value” method—requires issuers to record compensation expense over the period the options are expected to be outstanding prior to exercise, expiration, or cancellation. The amount of compensation expense to be recognized over this term is the “fair value” of the options at the time of the grant as determined by an option pricing model. The option pricing model computes fair value for the options based on the length of their term, the volatility of the stock price in past periods, and other factors. Under this method, the issuer recognizes compensation expense regardless of whether the officer or director eventually exercises the options.

 

The second method is termed the “intrinsic value” method. Under this accounting method, if options are granted at an exercise price equal to the market value of the stock at the time of the grant, no compensation expense is recognized. GAAP requires that issuers that elect the second method must present pro forma disclosures of net income and earnings per share as if the first method had been elected. The Company uses this second method.

 

Under the method of accounting for stock options used by the Company, no compensation expense is recorded if stock options are granted to employees at an exercise price equal to the fair market value of the stock at the time of the grant.

 

91


Table of Contents

Had the Company recognized compensation expense over the expected life of the options using the fair value method, the Company’s pro forma salary expense, net income, and earnings per share for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002 would have been as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Net Income, as reported

   $ 87,944     $ 75,671     $ 74,851  

Deduct: Total stock-based employee compensation expense determined under fair value based method for all awards, net of related tax effects

     (2,250 )     (618 )     (767 )

  


 


 


Pro forma net income

   $ 85,694     $ 75,053     $ 74,084  

  


 


 


Earnings Per Share:

                        

Basic—as reported

   $ 1.93     $ 1.66     $ 1.61  

Basic—pro forma

   $ 1.88     $ 1.64     $ 1.60  

Diluted—as reported

   $ 1.92     $ 1.64     $ 1.60  

Diluted—pro forma

   $ 1.87     $ 1.63     $ 1.59  

 

For purposes of this computation for 2004, the significant assumptions used, computed on a weighted average basis, were:

 

Risk free interest rate:

   3.53%

Expected life:

   4 years for 5-year options, 5 years for 10-year options

Expected volatility 2 years:

   0.2841

Expected volatility 4 years:

   0.2636

Expected volatility 5 years:

   0.2651

Expected dividend

   $0.72 per year

 

For purposes of this computation for 2003, the significant assumptions used, computed on a weighted average basis, were:

 

Risk free interest rate:

   2.62%

Expected life:

   4 years for 5-year options, 5 years for 10-year options

Expected volatility 2 years:

   0.2025

Expected volatility 5 years:

   0.2276

Expected dividend:

   $0.63 per year

 

For purposes of this computation for 2002, the significant assumptions used, computed on a weighted average basis, were:

 

Risk free interest rate:

   4.08%

Expected life:

   4 years for 5-year options, 5 years for 10-year options

Expected volatility 2 years:

   0.2019

Expected volatility 5 years:

   0.2234

Expected dividend:

   $0.54 per year

 

Derivative Financial Instruments

 

Derivative financial instruments may be constructed to act as hedges either (1) to protect against adverse changes in the fair value of assets, liabilities, firm commitments to purchase or sell specific assets or liabilities or (2) to protect against adverse cash flows associated with these items or other probable transactions. The asset, liability, or firm commitment is referred to as the hedged or underlying item. The hedge is constructed so that its fair value or the cash flows arising from the derivative transaction change in response to certain events in an offsetting manner to the changes in the fair value or cash flows of the underlying item.

 

GAAP requires that all derivatives be recorded at their current fair value on the balance sheet. A change in the fair value of the derivative results in a gain or loss for the holder, just like changes in

 

92


Table of Contents

the fair value of any underlying asset or liability results in a gain or loss for the holder. GAAP also specifies how and when the gains and losses relating to both the derivative itself and any hedged item are recognized. Recognition of the gains and losses depends on how the derivative is classified. If certain conditions are met, derivatives may be specifically classified or designated as fair value hedges or cash flow hedges.

 

Fair value hedges are intended to reduce or eliminate the exposure to adverse changes in the fair value of a specific underlying item. Gains or losses in the hedging instrument are recognized in the income statement during the period that the change in fair value occurred. The offsetting gain or loss on the hedged item which is attributable to the risk being hedged is also recognized in the income statement for the same period. Hedge ineffectiveness results if the changes in fair values of the derivative and the underlying item do not exactly offset. This ineffectiveness is included in earnings in the period in which it occurs.

 

Cash flow hedges are intended to hedge exposure to variable cash flows of a forecasted transaction or an underlying instrument. They are effective to the extent that the holder receives additional cash flows from the hedge when it receives lower cash flows from the hedged item and vice-versa. The effective portion of a hedge gain or loss is initially reported as a component of other comprehensive income and subsequently reclassified into earnings when the forecasted transaction affects earnings. The ineffective portion of the gain or loss is reported in earnings immediately.

 

Derivatives meeting certain other criteria may be classified as foreign exchange hedges. The Company does not currently make use of foreign exchange hedges.

 

If a derivative does not meet the requirements for designation as one of these specific categories of hedge, gains or losses associated with changes in its fair value are immediately recognized in the income statement. The accounting for the underlying instrument will follow normal accounting policies for the specific type of asset or liability.

 

The Company has used interest rate swaps to manage the Company’s exposure to interest rate risks. As of December 31, 2003 and 2004, the Company held one interest rate swap for this purpose. The notional amount is $9.5 million. This derivative does not qualify as a fair value or cash flow hedge and consequently changes in its fair value are recorded in earnings. As explained in Note 23, the Company has also entered into covered or offsetting interest rate swaps with customers and other financial institutions. The notional amount of these swaps at December 31, 2003 was $76.8 million and at December 31, 2004 was $61.1 million.

 

The term “notional amount” is a measure of quantity in a derivative instrument. In the case of a fair value or cash flow hedge, it will generally be the same amount as the balance of the underlying asset or liability. In the case of other derivatives, the amount may differ from the balance of any underlying instruments.

 

Goodwill

 

In connection with the acquisitions of other financial institutions prior to 2002, the Company recorded the excess of the purchase price over the estimated fair value of the assets received and liabilities assumed as goodwill. When originally recorded, this goodwill was amortized on the straight-line method over 15 years. Amortization of the goodwill was discontinued on January 1, 2002 under the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets (“SFAS 142”) that was issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) in June 2001.

 

The Company has recognized additional goodwill as a result of the purchase of PCCI also described in Note 9.

 

Management annually reviews the goodwill recorded for each acquisition in order to determine if facts and circumstances suggest that it is not recoverable. This is determined based on a multiples-of-revenue approach for the acquired entity, and consequently goodwill for the entity would be reduced by the estimated cash flow deficiency. The Company has determined the reporting units at which goodwill impairment will be assessed, specifically, one level below its operating segments as

 

93


Table of Contents

used in Note 26. The goodwill is allocated to these reporting units based on the perceived value of the acquired institution. Generally, this has meant allocation to the Branch Services unit within the Community Banking segment because the value of the acquisition was attributed to the deposit relationships. In the case of the PCCI acquisition, the value was attributed to the lending activities. No such reduction in goodwill had occurred as of December 31, 2004 or 2003.

 

Comprehensive Income

 

Comprehensive income includes all revenues, expenses, gains, and losses that affect the capital of the Company aside from issuing or retiring shares of stock. Net income is one component of comprehensive income. Based on the Company’s current activities, the only other components of comprehensive income consist of changes in the unrealized gains or losses on securities that are classified as available-for-sale.

 

The amounts of comprehensive income for the three years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002 are reported in the Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income. The net change in the cumulative total of the components of other comprehensive income that are included in equity are reported in the Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity for the three years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002.

 

Segment Reporting

 

GAAP requires that the Company disclose certain information related to the performance of various segments of its business. Segments are defined based on the segments within a company used by the chief operating decision-maker for making operating decisions and assessing performance. Reportable segments are to be based on such factors as products and services, geography, legal structure, management structure or any manner by which a company’s management distinguishes major operating units. While the Company’s products and services all relate to commercial banking, for the purposes of this disclosure, Management has determined that the Company has six reportable segments: Community Banking, Commercial Banking, Tax Refund Programs, Fiduciary, Pacific Capital Bank, and All Other. The basis for this determination and the required disclosure is included in Note 26.

 

Accounting for Business Combinations

 

Since January 1, 1997, the Company has completed six business combinations. Two were accounted for by the pooling of interests method of accounting for a business combination. Under this method, the assets and liabilities of the two parties were combined for each year presented in the financial statements. The effect of this presentation is as if the merger had occurred as of the beginning of the earliest period presented. The assets and liabilities were combined at the amounts carried in the predecessor company records; there was no restatement to their fair market value, and consequently no goodwill was recognized.

 

Four of the business combinations were accounted for by the purchase method of accounting for business combinations. Under this method, the assets and liabilities of the acquired company are combined with the acquirer as of the date of the acquisition at their fair market value. Any difference between the fair value of the assets and liabilities and the purchase price is recorded as goodwill. Prior to 2002, goodwill was amortized against earnings. The results of operations of the acquired company are included with those of the acquirer only from the transaction date forward.

 

In June 2001, the FASB issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 141, Business Combinations (“SFAS 141”), and as required, the Company adopted SFAS 141 immediately. Effective for transactions initiated after June 30, 2001, the statement requires all business combinations to be accounted for by the purchase method of accounting.

 

With the adoption of SFAS 142, on January 1, 2002, the Company ceased amortizing the goodwill that had resulted from purchase transactions entered into prior to the adoption of SFAS 142. However, as discussed above, goodwill is subject to at least an annual assessment for impairment by applying a fair-value-based test. Based on its annual assessment for impairment, Management does not believe that any material impairment of goodwill has occurred.

 

94


Table of Contents

In addition to goodwill, an acquired intangible asset will be separately recognized if the benefit of the intangible asset is obtained through contractual or other legal rights, or if the intangible asset can be sold, transferred, licensed, rented, or exchanged, regardless of the acquirer’s intent to do so. Such intangible assets are subject to amortization over their useful lives.

 

Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities

 

In January 2003, the FASB issued Interpretation No. 46, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities (“FIN 46”). Previously issued accounting pronouncements had required the consolidation of one entity in the financial statements of another if the second entity had a controlling interest in the first. Generally, controlling interest was defined in terms of a proportion of voting rights. FIN 46 applies broader criteria than just voting rights in determining whether a controlling financial interest in one entity by another exists. Specifically, if by design the owners of the entity have not made an equity investment sufficient to absorb its expected losses and the owners lack any one of three essential characteristics of controlling financial interest, the entity is termed a “variable interest entity” and is to be consolidated in the financial statements of its primary beneficiary. The three characteristics are the ability to make decisions about the entity’s activities, the obligation to absorb the expected losses of the entity, and the right to receive the expected residual returns of the entity.

 

Variable Interest Entities used for Securitizations:  The Company has two special-purpose entities used for the securitizations described in Note 10. The special-purpose entity that was used for the indirect auto loan securitization is exempt from this pronouncement because it is a qualifying special-purpose entity (“QSPE”) as described in Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 140 (“SFAS 140”), Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities. Instead of disclosing the Company’s rights and obligations related to this QSPE under the provisions of FIN 46, they are disclosed under the provisions of SFAS 140. These disclosures are made in Note 10.

 

The special-purpose entity used for the tax refund loan securitization is consolidated with the Company. In the structure of this securitization, the loans are sold by the special-purpose entity to multi-seller conduits. These conduits are established by other financial institutions to hold a variety of assets purchased from a number of other loan originators. These conduits are variable interest entities within the scope of FIN 46. However, they hold refund anticipation loans (“RALs”) originated by the Company only during one month of each year. They continue to function during the eleven months of the year holding the other types of loans purchased from other financial institutions. Therefore, Management concludes that consolidation of these conduits with the Company would not be required by FIN 46 because it is not the primary beneficiary of them and because it exercises no control over the other assets purchased or held.

 

Trust Preferred Subsidiaries:  In connection with the March 5, 2004 PCCI acquisition, Bancorp added three business trust subsidiaries which had been originally created by PCCI for the exclusive purpose of issuing trust preferred securities. The three subsidiaries are PCC Trust I, PCC Trust II, and PCC Trust III. The purchasers of the securities are the primary beneficiaries of these entities. Because Bancorp is not the primary beneficiary of these entities, in accordance with FIN 46 they are not consolidated with the Company. However, the Company has included the investments in these subsidiaries in “Other assets” and the subordinated debt owed by the Company to these subsidiaries is included in “Long-term debt and other borrowings” on its Consolidated Balance Sheets. This subordinated debt has exactly the same terms as the trust preferred securities owed by the trusts. In its Consolidated Statements of Income, the Company has reported dividend income from the subsidiaries in “Other income” and interest expense on the subordinated debt in “Other borrowed funds.”

 

Low income housing partnerships:  The Company has invested in several partnerships that promote the development of low cost housing. These partnerships are variable interest entities within the scope of FIN 46 because, as a group, the holders of the equity interests in these entities do not have the direct or indirect ability to make decisions about the entities’ activities through voting rights or similar rights. In December 2003, the FASB approved a partial deferral of the application of FIN 46 that allowed for later implementation than originally specified for variable interest entities established prior to February 1, 2003. The Company invested in all of these partnerships prior to

 

95


Table of Contents

that date and applied FIN 46 to these partnerships as of March 31, 2004. The investment in these partnerships represents less than one half of one percent of the Company’s assets and the impact of consolidating on its financial condition and results of operations these partnerships would be immaterial.

 

The Company owns more than 50% of the partnership interests in one of these partnerships. The Company has therefore consolidated the assets, liabilities, and operating results of that partnership with the assets, liabilities and operating results of the Company. Consolidation resulted in an additional $3.6 million in assets and a liability for the minority interest of $3.6 million. In 2004, the Company recognized the whole amount of the operating losses of this partnership which decreased noninterest revenue by $294,000 and recognized a reduction of other expense for $294,000 for the other partners’ share of the losses.

 

Management does not believe that the Company is the primary beneficiary of any other such entities.

 

Other Recent Accounting Pronouncements

 

In December 2003, the Accounting Standards Executive Committee of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants issued Statement of Position 03-3 (“SOP 03-3”). SOP 03-3 requires loans that are acquired in a transfer or business combination, the credit quality of which has deteriorated since origination, to be recorded at fair value. No allowance for loan losses or other valuation allowance is permitted for these loans at the time of acquisition. Valuation allowances for them should reflect only losses incurred after the acquisition. An allowance is permitted to be established at the time of acquisition for other loans purchased in the transaction.

 

Provisions of the SOP are required to be adopted for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2004. Early adoption is permitted. The Company adopted SOP 03-3 on January 1, 2005.

 

Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123R, Share-Based Payment (“SFAS 123R”) requires that the Company recognize in the income statement the fair value of stock options and other equity-based compensation issued to employees. The fair value is determined as of the date these equity instruments are granted. The compensation expense will be recognized as a charge against earnings over the requisite service period. The Statement is effective for interim periods beginning after June 15, 2005 and the Company will adopt the provisions of SFAS 123R in the interim statement for September 30, 2005.

 

SFAS 123R permits two alternative transition methods; the modified prospective method and the modified retrospective transition method. Under the modified prospective method, awards that are granted, modified, or settled after the date of adoption should be measured and accounted for in accordance with SFAS 123R. Unvested equity-classified awards that were granted prior to the effective date should continue to be accounted for in accordance with SFAS 123 except that amounts must be recognized in the income statement. Under the modified retrospective approach, the previously reported amounts are restated, either to the beginning of the year of adoption or for all periods presented, to reflect the SFAS 123 amounts in the income statement.

 

The Company has not, as yet, decided which of the two transition methods to use. Management expects the adoption of this statement will have an effect on its annual earnings approximately equivalent to the proforma adjustments disclosed above in this note for SFAS 123, i.e. a reduction of $2.25 million or $0.05 per share. This represents a reduction of 2.6%.

 

Fourth Quarter Adjustments

 

As explained in Note 27, during the fourth quarter of 2004, the Company identified two accounting errors. The adjustments needed to correct these errors were immaterial to all prior period financial statements.

 

96


Table of Contents

2.    MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS

 

On March 5, 2004, the Company acquired PCCI in an all cash transaction valued at $136 million, or $26 per each diluted share of PCCI common stock. PCCI was an Agoura Hills, California-based bank holding company that conducted business through its wholly-owned subsidiary, Pacific Crest Bank. The bank had three branches located in Beverly Hills, Encino and San Diego. Since its establishment in 1974, Pacific Crest Bank had operated as a specialized business bank serving small businesses, entrepreneurs and investors. Its products include customized loans on income producing real estate, business loans under the U.S. Small Business Administration (“SBA”) 7(a) and 504 programs, lines of credit and term loans to businesses and professionals, and savings and checking account programs. Pacific Crest Bank was an SBA-designated “Preferred Lender” in California, Arizona and Oregon. In addition to three branches, it operated six loan production offices in California and Oregon. The Company acquired PCCI primarily for its commercial real estate and SBA commercial business lending operations. The Company’s Consolidated Statements of Income include the operations of PCCI from March 6, 2004 through December 31, 2004.

 

The following table shows the condensed balance sheet of amounts assigned to assets and liabilities, including all purchase adjustments since acquisition, of Pacific Crest Capital as of March 5, 2004 (in millions):

 

Assets


            

Liabilities


    

Loans

   $ 419                 

Allowance

     (5 )               

Securities

     121         Deposits    $ 291

Goodwill

     80         Long-term debt      221

Other assets

     37         Other liabilities      4

  


     
  

Total    $ 652         Total    $ 516

  


     
  

 

The two sides of the table are not in balance because no equity was purchased. The difference between the assets and liabilities represents the purchase price.

 

None of the goodwill is expected to be deductible for taxes unless the acquired businesses are sold.

 

The following table presents pro forma combined information about results of operation as though the acquisition had occurred on January 1, 2003.

 

    

Twelve Months
Ended

December 31, 2004


  

January 1, 2004

Through

March 5, 2004


  

Twelve Months
Ended

December 31, 2004


  

Twelve Months Ended

December 31, 2003


(dollars in thousands except
per share amounts)


  

Pacific Capital

Bancorp


  

Pacific

Crest


   ProForma
Combined


  

Pacific Capital

Bancorp


   Pacific
Crest


  

ProForma

Combined


Revenues

   $ 401,816    $ 7,996    $ 409,812    $ 352,470    $ 43,406    $ 395,876

Income before extraordinary items and the cumulative effect of accounting changes

   $ 87,944    $ 1,694    $ 89,638    $ 75,671    $ 7,462    $ 83,133

Net income

   $ 87,944    $ 1,694    $ 89,638    $ 75,671    $ 7,462    $ 83,133

Earnings per share—diluted

   $ 1.92           $ 1.95    $ 1.64           $ 1.80

 

There were no extraordinary items or cumulative effects of accounting changes in the periods reported above for either company. The following nonrecurring items (pre-tax) are not included in the Pacific Crest column in the above table for the period of January 1 through March 5, 2004 (in thousands):

 

Compensation cost to buy out stock options including payroll tax expense

   $ 3,680

Investment banking fees

     1,018

Legal expenses

     172

Other costs related to the acquisition

     193

  

Total

   $ 5,063

  

 

97


Table of Contents

The Company recognized $2.9 million as a core deposit intangible and $0.9 million in loan servicing rights as part of the acquisition accounting. The core deposit intangible will be amortized over a period of 5 years or estimated useful life if less. The loan servicing rights will be amortized in proportion to and over the life of service fee revenue.

 

There were no material nonrecurring items included in the Company operating results for 2004 related to the acquisition other than the payment of the consideration.

 

The Company recognized and added $5.1 million to the allowance for loan losses in connection with the March 5, 2004 acquisition of PCCI.

 

3.    EARNINGS PER SHARE

 

The following table presents a reconciliation of basic earnings per share and diluted earnings per share. The denominator of the diluted earnings per share ratio includes the effect of dilutive securities. The only securities outstanding that are potentially dilutive are the stock options reported in Note 18. In the second quarter of 2004 the Company’s Board of Directors approved a 4 for 3 stock split. The share and per share amounts appearing in the following table have been restated to reflect this split (Note 18).

 

(amounts in thousands other than per share amounts)


   Basic
Earnings
Per Share


   Diluted
Earnings
Per Share


For the Year Ended December 31, 2004

             

Numerator—Net Income

   $ 87,944    $ 87,944
    

  

Denominator—weighted average shares outstanding

     45,535      45,535
    

      

Plus: net shares issued in assumed stock option exercises

            376
           

Diluted denominator

            45,911
           

Earnings per share

   $ 1.93    $ 1.92

Anti-dilutive options excluded

            28

Weighted average stock price during the year

          $ 29.17

For the Year Ended December 31, 2003

             

Numerator—Net Income

   $ 75,671    $ 75,671
    

  

Denominator—weighted average shares outstanding

     45,646      45,646
    

      

Plus: net shares issued in assumed stock option exercises

            437
           

Diluted denominator

            46,083
           

Earnings per share

   $ 1.66    $ 1.64

Anti-dilutive options excluded

            40

Weighted average stock price during the year

          $ 24.29

For the Year Ended December 31, 2002

             

Numerator—Net Income

   $ 74,851    $ 74,851
    

  

Denominator—weighted average shares outstanding *

     46,393      46,393
    

      

Plus: net shares issued in assumed stock option exercises *

            260
           

Diluted denominator *

            46,653
           

Earnings per share

   $ 1.61    $ 1.60

Anti-dilutive options excluded

            165

Weighted average stock price during the year

          $ 18.41

 

* Prior year shares were adjusted to account for stock split in June 2004.

 

98


Table of Contents

4.    CASH AND DUE FROM BANKS

 

All depository institutions are required by law to maintain reserves against their transaction deposits. The reserve must be held in cash or with the Federal Reserve Bank for their area. The amount of reserve may vary each day as banks are permitted to meet this requirement by maintaining the specified amount as an average balance over a two-week period. The average daily cash reserve balances required to be maintained by PCBNA at the FRBSF totaled approximately $5.6 million in 2004 and $3.3 million in 2003. In addition, PCBNA must maintain sufficient balances at the FRBSF to cover the checks written by bank customers that are clearing through the FRBSF because they have been deposited at other banks. This generally means that PCBNA holds substantially more than the $5.6 million minimum amount at FRBSF.

 

5.    SECURITIES

 

A summary of securities owned by the Company at December 31, 2004 and 2003, is as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)


   Amortized
Cost


  

Gross

Unrealized

Gains


  

Gross

Unrealized

Losses


    Estimated
Fair Value


December 31, 2004

      

Available-for-sale:

                            

U.S. Treasury obligations

   $ 112,401    $ 401    $ (576 )   $ 112,226

U.S. agency obligations

     209,353      1,513      (821 )     210,045

Collateralized mortgage obligations

     63,663      76      (486 )     63,253

Mortgage-backed securities

     916,987      4,598      (9,786 )     911,799

Asset-backed securities

     20,274      72      (39 )     20,307

State and municipal securities

     188,444      19,225      (425 )     207,244

  

  

  


 

     $ 1,511,122    $ 25,885    $ (12,133 )   $ 1,524,874

  

  

  


 


  

Amortized

Cost


  

Gross

Unrealized

Gains


  

Gross

Unrealized

Losses


    Estimated
Fair Value


December 31, 2003

                            

Available-for-sale:

                            

U.S. Treasury obligations

   $ 119,938    $ 2,114    $ (33 )   $ 122,019

U.S. agency obligations

     207,020      5,918      (19 )     212,919

Collateralized mortgage obligations

     12,327      83      (183 )     12,227

Mortgage-backed securities

     737,929      2,787      (7,211 )     733,505

Asset-backed securities

     26,804      227            27,031

State and municipal securities

     191,845      19,528      (1,112 )     210,261

  

  

  


 

     $ 1,295,863    $ 30,657    $ (8,558 )   $ 1,317,962

  

  

  


 

 

The amortized cost and estimated fair value of debt securities at December 31, 2004 and 2003, by contractual maturity, are shown in the next table. Expected maturities will differ from contractual maturities because issuers may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties. With interest rates on a number of the Company’s securities higher than the current rates on similarly rated securities, the Company expects that if the issuers have the right to call the security—pay it off early—they will do so.

 

Principal payments to be received from securities that do not have a single maturity date—asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed securities, and collateralized mortgage obligations—are included in the table below. The timing of those payments is estimated based on the contractual terms of the underlying loans adjusted for estimates of prepayments. However, similarly to security issuers that retained the right to call the security before maturity, homeowners may prepay their mortgages if interest rates have fallen to the extent that refinancing becomes advantageous. While

 

99


Table of Contents

not included in the above table based on contractual maturities, prepayments are estimated by the Company and reviewed at the end of each period in response to the then current interest rate environment. These estimates are used in valuing securities and in planning cash flows and managing interest rate risk.

 

(dollars in thousands)    December 31,

   2004

   2003

Available-for-Sale

             

Amortized cost:

             

In one year or less

   $ 137,209    $ 98,316

After one year through five years

     722,391      549,220

After five years through ten years

     400,647      341,054

After ten years

     250,875      307,273

  

  

Total Securities

   $ 1,511,122    $ 1,295,863

  

  

Estimated fair value:

             

In one year or less

   $ 138,017    $ 99,542

After one year through five years

     720,168      556,563

After five years through ten years

     401,657      342,757

After ten years

     265,032      319,100

  

  

Total Securities

   $ 1,524,874    $ 1,317,962

  

  

 

The proceeds received from sales and calls of debt securities and the gross gains and losses that were recognized for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002 are shown in the next table.

 

(in thousands)   2004

    2003

    2002

 

  Proceeds

  Gross
Gains


  Gross
Losses


    Proceeds

  Gross
Gains


  Gross
Losses


    Proceeds

  Gross
Gains


  Gross
Losses


 

Held-to-maturity:

                                                           

Sales

  $   $   $     $   $   $     $   $   $  

Calls

  $   $   $     $ 627   $ 12   $     $ 105   $   $  

Available-for-sale:

                                                           

Sales

  $ 86,745   $ 37   $ (2,055 )   $ 145,924   $ 2,420   $ (414 )   $ 74,848   $ 893   $ (211 )

Calls

  $ 1,869   $   $     $ 65   $   $     $ 1,556   $ 2   $  

 

As mentioned in Note 1, the Company reclassified all of its held-to-maturity securities to available-for-sale as of December 31, 2003. The amount reclassified was $65 million and the unrealized gain related to these securities was $10.8 million.

 

The fair value of securities can change due to credit concerns, i.e. whether the issuer will in fact be able to pay the obligation when due, and due to changes in interest rates. As explained in Note 1, all of the securities held by the Company are classified as available-for-sale, and all are therefore carried at their fair value. However, as also explained in that note, adjustments to the carrying amount for changes in fair value have not been recorded in the Company’s income statement. Instead, the after-tax effect of the change is shown in a special component of capital. Consequently, as shown in the first table in this note, there are unrealized gains and losses related to the securities held by the Company. The following table shows those securities for which there is an unrealized loss by category of security and for how long there has been an unrealized loss.

 

100


Table of Contents
    Less than 12 months

    12 months or more

    Total

 

As of December 31, 2004

(dollars in thousands)


  Fair Value

   Unrealized
Loss


    Fair Value

   Unrealized
Loss


    Fair Value

   Unrealized
Loss


 

US Treasury/US Agencies

  $ 161,519    $ (1,397 )   $    $     $ 161,519    $ (1,397 )

Mortgage Backed Securities

    379,722      (3,881 )     239,932      (5,905 )     619,654      (9,786 )

Municipal Bonds

    5,252      (69 )     8,066      (356 )     13,318      (425 )

Asset backed Securities

    6,282      (39 )                6,282      (39 )

Private CMO

    52,678      (486 )                52,678      (486 )

 

  


 

  


 

  


Subtotal, Debt Securities

    605,453      (5,872 )     247,998      (6,261 )     853,451      (12,133 )

Common Stock

                                

 

  


 

  


 

  


Total temporarily impaired securities

  $ 605,453    $ (5,872 )   $ 247,998    $ (6,261 )   $ 853,451    $ (12,133 )

 

  


 

  


 

  


    Less than 12 months

    12 months or more

    Total

 

As of December 31, 2003

(dollars in thousands)


  Fair Value

   Unrealized
Loss


    Fair Value

   Unrealized
Loss


    Fair Value

   Unrealized
Loss


 

US Treasury/US Agencies

  $ 21,032    $ (52 )   $    $     $ 21,032    $ (52 )

Mortgage Backed Securities

    514,653      (7,212 )                514,653      (7,212 )

Municipal Bonds

    30,933      (1,112 )                30,933      (1,112 )

Asset backed Securities

    9,011      (182 )                9,011      (182 )

 

  


 

  


 

  


Subtotal, Debt Securities

    575,629      (8,558 )                575,629      (8,558 )

Common Stock

                                

 

  


 

  


 

  


Total temporarily impaired securities

  $ 575,629    $ (8,558 )   $    $     $ 575,629    $ (8,558 )

 

  


 

  


 

  


 

As shown in the table, at December 31, 2004, some of the securities have had unrealized losses for more than twelve months. Generally these securities were purchased within the first half of 2003 when interest rates on securities with a maturity of longer than two years were slightly lower than at December 31, 2004. There are no credit concerns regarding any of these securities. As of December 31, 2004, the Company had both the ability and intent to hold these securities to their maturity or recovery. The Company has concluded that none of these securities is other than temporarily impaired.

 

The Mortgage Backed Securities in the two tables above primarily consist of securities issued by Government Sponsored Enterprises, specifically Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac and Federal Home Loan Banks.

 

At December 31, 2004, the Company had identified three of its securities with a market value of $23.0 million to be sold subsequent to year-end. Because of this intention to sell, the impairment in the case of these securities was other than temporary, and the Company recorded a loss by a charge against income to adjust the carrying amount of these securities to their fair value at December 31, 2004. The amount of the loss, totaling $501,000, is included in net gain or loss on sales and calls of securities on the Consolidated Statement of Income for the year ended December 31, 2004. These securities are not included in the table above because the losses have been realized through this adjustment.

 

The amounts of gain or loss reclassified from other comprehensive income to net income is disclosed in the Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income.

 

Securities with a carrying value of approximately $1.37 billion at December 31, 2004, and $1.12 billion at December 31, 2003, were pledged to secure public funds, trust deposits and other borrowings as required or permitted by law.

 

These amounts pledged are substantially in excess of the amount of such funds that are normally required to be supported by collateral. The Company borrows extensively during the first quarter of each year to fund its RAL program, and pledges securities not otherwise used as collateral in advance of the need for such borrowings.

 

 

101


Table of Contents

6.    LOANS

 

The loan portfolio consists of the following:

 

(dollars in thousands)    December 31,

   2004

   2003

Real estate:

             

Residential—1 to 4 family

   $ 892,705    $ 799,793

Multi-family residential

     182,936      121,750

Nonresidential

     1,114,114      732,231

Construction

     286,387      249,976

Commercial loans

     782,475      680,679

Home equity loans

     212,064      138,422

Consumer loans

     340,623      296,286

Leases

     230,035      148,504

Municipal tax-exempt obligations

     18,135      11,419

Other Loans

     2,820      1,819

  

  

Total loans

   $ 4,062,294    $ 3,180,879

  

  

 

The amounts above are shown net of deferred loan origination, commitment, and extension fees and origination costs of $7.1 million for 2004 and $5.4 million for 2003.

 

Impaired Loans

 

The table below discloses information about the loans classified as impaired and the valuation allowance related to them:

 

(dollars in thousands)    December 31,

   2004

   2003

Loans identified as impaired

   $ 35,966    $ 57,355

Impaired loans for which a valuation allowance has been established

   $ 7,476    $ 25,789

Amount of valuation allowance for impaired loans

   $ 4,821    $ 9,047

Impaired loans for which no valuation allowance has been established

   $ 28,490    $ 31,566

 

     Years Ended December 31,

   2004

   2003

   2002

Average amount of recorded investment in impaired loans for the year

   $ 42,803    $ 46,081    $ 19,769

Interest recognized during the year for loans identified as impaired at year-end

   $ 1,093    $ 372    $ 443

Interest received in cash during the year for loans identified as impaired at year-end

   $ 1,972    $ 983    $ 443

 

As indicated in Note 1, a valuation allowance is established for an impaired loan when the fair value of the loan is less than the recorded investment. As shown above, a valuation allowance has been determined for $7.5 million of the loans identified as impaired at December 31, 2004. However, approximately $28.5 million of impaired loans do not require an allowance. Collateral or cash flows are sufficient with these loans to give assurance that no loss will be taken. The valuation allowance amounts disclosed above are included in the allowance for credit losses reported in the balance sheets for December 31, 2004 and 2003 and in Note 7.

 

102


Table of Contents

Nonaccrual and Past Due Loans Still Accruing:

 

(dollars in thousands)    December 31,

   2004

   2003

Nonaccrual loans

   $ 21,701    $ 42,412

90 days or more past due and still accruing

     820      763

Restructured Loans

         

  

  

Total noncurrent loans

     22,521      43,175

Foreclosed collateral

     2,910     

  

  

Total nonperforming assets

   $ 25,431    $ 43,175

  

  

 

Refund Anticipation Loans

 

The Company offers tax refund anticipation loans (“RALs”) to taxpayers desiring to receive advance proceeds based on their anticipated income tax refunds. The loans are repaid when the Internal Revenue Service later sends the refund to the Company. The funds advanced are generally repaid within several weeks. Therefore, the processing costs and provision for loan loss represent the major costs of the loans. This is in contrast to other loans for which the cost of funds is the major cost to the Company. Because of their short duration, the Company cannot recover the processing costs through interest calculated over the term of the loan. Consequently, the Company has a tiered fee schedule for this service. The fee varies by the amount of funds advanced based on the increased credit risk rather than the length of time that the loan is outstanding. Nonetheless, because the customer signs a loan application and note, the Company reports the fees as interest income. These fees totaled $36.5 million in 2004, $31.7 million for 2003, and $19.8 million for 2002. The loans are all made during the tax-filing season of January through April of each year. Any loans for which repayment has not been received by the end of the year are charged off. Consequently, there were no RALs included in the above table of outstanding loans at December 31, 2004 or 2003.

 

As one of its sources of funding the RAL program in 2003 and 2004, the Company sold some of the loans through a securitization as described in Note 10. As a result of these sales, fees from these loans, offset by fees paid to the purchaser and provision expense for defaulted loans, are classified as a gain on sale of loans and are reported as such in noninterest revenue. RAL fees collected on loans but included in the gain on sale of these loans were $5.9 million in 2004 and $12.5 million in 2003. The net amounts of the fees from the loans, the fees paid, and the provision expense classified as gain on sale of loans in 2004 and 2003 were $2.9 million and $8.0 million, respectively.

 

Pledged Loans

 

At December 31, 2004 loans secured by first trust deeds on residential and commercial property with principal balances totaling $950.0 million were pledged as collateral to the FRBSF. At December 31, 2004, loans secured by first deeds on residential and commercial property with principal balances of $792.6 million were pledged to the FHLB.

 

These amounts pledged do not represent the amount of outstanding borrowings that are required to be supported by collateral. The Company borrows extensively during the first quarter of each year to fund its RAL program, and pledges loans not otherwise used as collateral in advance of the need for such borrowings.

 

Sale of Loans

 

Based on consideration of interest rates, concentrations, and size of loans, the Company may sell loans to other banks or financial institutions. The Company has no commitments to sell and does not hold loans for sale once the decision to sell has been made. The Company realized $5.3 million, $9.9 million, and $12.5 million of gains or (losses) from the sale of loans for 2004, 2003 and 2002 respectively.

 

103


Table of Contents

7.    ALLOWANCE FOR CREDIT LOSSES

 

The following summarizes the changes in the allowance for credit losses:

 

(in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Balance, beginning of year

   $ 49,550     $ 53,821     $ 48,872  

Tax refund anticipation loans:

                        

Provision for credit losses

     8,468       8,530       2,105  

Recoveries on loans previously charged-off

     4,043       5,182       4,510  

Loans charged-off

     (12,511 )     (13,712 )     (6,615 )

All other loans:

                        

Additions and adjustments from PCCI acquisition

     5,143              

Provision for credit losses

     4,341       9,756       17,622  

Recoveries on loans previously charged-off

     10,704       6,562       5,515  

Loans charged-off

     (15,761 )     (20,589 )     (18,188 )

  


 


 


Balance, end of year

   $ 53,977     $ 49,550     $ 53,821  

  


 


 


 

The ratio of losses to total loans for the RALs is higher than for other loans. As mentioned in Note 6, all RALs unpaid by the end of the year are charged-off. Therefore, no allowance for RALs is necessary, and the provision for credit loss, the loans charged-off, and the loans recovered are reported separately from the corresponding amounts for all other loans.

 

The Company has exposure to credit losses from extending loan commitments and letters of credit as well as from loans and leases. Because funds have not yet been disbursed on these commitments and letters of credit, the face amount is not included in the amounts reported for loans and leases outstanding. Consequently, any amount provided for credit losses related to these instruments is not included in the allowance for credit losses reported in the table above, but is instead accounted for as a loss contingency. The recording of this separate liability is accomplished by a charge to other operating expense as explained in Notes 1 and 17.

 

8.    PREMISES, EQUIPMENT AND OTHER LONG-TERM ASSETS

 

Premises and equipment consist of the following:

 

(in thousands)    December 31,  

   2004

    2003

 

Land

   $ 5,764     $ 5,764  

Buildings and improvements

     30,259       22,618  

Leasehold improvements

     32,263       27,996  

Furniture and equipment

     95,986       75,664  

Software in development

     33,340       22,015  

  


 


Total cost

     197,612       154,057  

Accumulated depreciation and amortization

     (97,330 )     (80,098 )

  


 


Net book value

   $ 100,282     $ 73,959  

  


 


 

Included within leasehold improvements in the table above as of December 31, 2004 is $9.1 million in assets under capital lease. The lease is described in Note 13.

 

Software purchased by the Company is included above in furniture and equipment. Approximately $3.5 million of the increase in furniture and equipment is due to the purchase of software and $3.8 million to the purchase of computer equipment. Developed software represents the cost of

 

104


Table of Contents

developing or modifying software that has been capitalized as explained in Note 1. The reason for the capitalized software is not that Company is in the business of developing software but rather that it is in the process of converting its core banking applications to a different platform as well as installing new customer relationship management software. The Company is working with the vendors of this software to modify it to meet its specifications. The software will provide new features, acquisition integration, and scalability not present with the current systems and will allow the Company to avoid significant support expenses that would be required by the current systems. Included in the development costs is capitalized interest. For the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002, the Company capitalized interest costs of approximately $250,000, $114,000, and $216,000, respectively.

 

Depreciation and amortization on fixed assets included in operating expenses totaled $8.9 million in 2004, $9.1 million in 2003, and $8.7 million in 2002. This amount for 2004 includes the amortization of the capital lease for the year.

 

Total rental expense, net of sublease income, made under operating leases for premises for the years 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $8.2 million, $7.0 million, and $6.6 million, respectively.

 

9.    GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS

 

Goodwill is recorded on the balance sheets in connection with acquisitions of other financial institutions or branches of other institutions that qualify as a business. The Company recognizes the excess of the purchase price over the estimated fair value of the assets received less the fair value of the liabilities assumed as goodwill. The balance at December 31, 2004 was $109.7 million and at December 31, 2003 was $30.0 million. Of the balance of goodwill at December 31, 2004, $79.7 million is related to the acquisition of PCCI on March 5, 2004 and $30.0 million is related to previous acquisitions as explained in Note 1.

 

Goodwill is allocated to the unit(s) of the acquired company that are deemed by Management to have provided the value in the acquisition. PCCI was acquired primarily for the lending units. In the case of the prior purchases, the perceived value was in the deposit relationships and the consumer and small business lending. The goodwill arising from the PCCI acquisition is recorded in the “Pacific Capital” segment, which represents the former PCCI lending units, while the remaining goodwill is recorded on the “Community Banking” segment which includes the Company’s deposit activities and consumer and small business lending. Goodwill is not amortized but is periodically reviewed for impairment as discussed in Note 1.

 

In addition to the goodwill recorded in the PCCI acquisition, the Company recognized a separate intangible for the value of the core deposit relationships. Similar intangible assets were recorded at the time of the purchase of the deposits and/or branches from other financial institutions. The Company has allocated these intangible assets in the business units within the Community Banking segment. The total amount of these core deposit intangibles at December 31, 2004 was $3.6 million.

 

Unlike goodwill, these intangible assets are amortized. The amortization expense is recognized over the expected life using effective yield of the deposit relationships. Amortization expense over the next five years on this core deposit intangible is expected to be:

 

Year    (Dollars in thousands)

2005

   $ 725

2006

   $ 1,074

2007

   $ 352

Thereafter

   $ 1,492

 

Intangible assets, including goodwill, have been and will be reviewed at least each year to determine if circumstances related to their valuation have been materially affected. In the event that the current market values are determined to be less than the current book values (impairment), a charge against current earnings will be recorded. The Company adjusted the value of the core deposit intangible recognized in the purchase of PCCI during 2004 as the deposits decreased more than expected. No further impairment existed at December 31, 2004 or 2003.

 

105


Table of Contents

10.    TRANSFERS AND SERVICING OF FINANCIAL ASSETS

 

The Company has entered into two securitization transactions. The required disclosures related to securitizations are presented below.

 

Indirect Auto Securitization

 

During the first quarter of 2001, PCBNA securitized $58.2 million in automobile loans resulting in a gain on sale of approximately $566,000. Retained interest held by PCBNA upon completion of this securitization was $3.5 million. The transaction was conducted through the SBB&T Automobile Loan Securitization Corporation, a wholly owned subsidiary of PCBNA. The securities offered consisted of two classes, entitled 6.13% Asset-Backed Notes, Class A, Series 2000-A and 6.90% Asset-Backed Notes, Class B, Series 2000-A.

 

As of December 31, 2003, pertinent data related to this securitization was as follows: (in thousands)

 

Principal amount outstanding

   $ 7,409

Retained interest

   $ 2,076

Principal amount of delinquencies greater than 30 days

   $ 271

 

As is typical of a securitization like this one, the transfer agreement permitted the Company to purchase back the remaining loans when the outstanding balance fell below 10% of the original sale amount. The Company exercised this option in April of 2004. The balance of the loans on that date was $6.2 million, the retained interest was $2.0 million, and the principal amount of delinquencies greater than 30 days was $241,000.

 

From inception and for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002:

 

(dollars in thousands)  

From

Inception


   Years Ended December 31,


     2004

   2003

   2002

Net credit losses

  $ 615    $ 22    $ 67    $ 293

Cash flows received for servicing fees

  $ 465    $ 8    $ 69    $ 143

Cash flows received on retained interest

  $ 2,180    $ 98    $ 510    $ 597

 

The figures reported above for delinquencies and net credit losses relate to the total principal amount outstanding.

 

Refund Anticipation Loan Securitization

 

The Company established a special purpose subsidiary corporation in November 2000 named SBB&T RAL Funding Corporation and during the first quarters of 2002, 2003 and 2004 securitized RALs into multi-seller conduits, backed by commercial paper. PCBNA acted as the servicer for all such RALs during the securitization periods. Generally, the securitization has loans in it for only three or four weeks during January and February of each year. As of March 31, 2003, all 2003 loans sold into the securitization had been fully repaid and no securitization-related balances were outstanding. As of March 31, 2004, all 2004 loans sold into the securitization had been fully repaid and no securitization-related balances were outstanding.

 

In December 2004, the Company entered into an agreement with other financial institutions to again make use of SBB&T RAL Funding Corporation for the 2005 RAL season by selling RALs into their multi-seller conduit or to them directly. The terms of this agreement are substantially the same as the agreements used in prior years.

 

106


Table of Contents

Mortgage and Other Loan Servicing Rights

 

As explained in Note 1, the Company recognizes an asset for the value of the fees it will receive for the services of loans for others.

 

(in thousands)    As of and for the years ended
December 31,


 

   2004

       2003

       2002

 

Servicing rights recognized

   $ 1,139        $ 995        $ 455  

Servicing rights added in year, net

     272          541          820  

PCCI Servicing rights acquired

     866                    

Servicing rights amortized

     (488 )        (397 )        (280 )

  


    


    


Servicing rights at end of period, gross

   $ 1,789        $ 1,139        $ 995  

Valuation allowance beginning of year

   $ (602 )      $        $  

Aggregate additions to the allowance

     (75 )        (602 )         

Aggregate direct write downs charged against allowance

                        

Aggregate reductions of the allowance

     566                    

  


    


    


Valuation allowance end of year

   $ (111 )      $ (602 )      $  

  


    


    


Servicing rights at end of period, net

   $ 1,678        $ 537        $ 995  

  


    


    


 

11.    DEPOSITS

 

Deposits and the related interest expense consist of the following:

 

(in thousands)   

Balance

December 31,

  

Interest Expense

Years Ended December 31,


   2004

   2003

   2004

   2003

   2002

Noninterest-bearing deposits

   $ 1,013,772    $ 924,106    $    $    $

Interest-bearing deposits:

                                  

NOW accounts

     887,874      556,740      3,527      631      772

Money market deposit accounts

     703,889      803,554      6,420      8,638      9,629

Other savings deposits

     408,101      272,883      2,482      1,030      1,430

Time certificates of $100,000 or more

     990,809      834,819      18,547      14,525      18,053

Other time deposits

     507,845      462,615      11,166      11,337      17,020

  

  

  

  

  

Total

   $ 4,512,290    $ 3,854,717    $ 42,142    $ 36,161    $ 46,904

  

  

  

  

  

 

107


Table of Contents
12. SECURITIES SOLD UNDER AGREEMENTS TO REPURCHASE AND FEDERAL FUNDS PURCHASED

 

The Company enters into certain transactions, the legal form of which is a sale of securities under an agreement to repurchase at a later date at a set price. The substance of these transactions is a secured borrowing by the Company. These agreements are for terms of a few weeks to 90 days.

 

The Company also purchased Federal funds from correspondent banks. These transactions are all one-day borrowings. The following information is presented concerning these transactions:

 

(dollars in thousands)  

Repurchase Agreements

Years Ended December 31,

  

Fed Funds Purchased

Years Ended December 31,


  2004

   2003

   2002

   2004

   2003

   2002

Weighted average interest rate at year-end

    2.04%      0.88%      0.71%      2.20%      0.85%      1.06%

Weighted average interest rate for the year

    1.22%      0.65%      1.35%      1.34%      1.26%      1.63%

Average outstanding for the year

  $ 20,188    $ 16,510    $ 35,668    $ 100,229    $ 50,489    $ 43,100

Maximum outstanding at any month-end during the year

  $ 31,254    $ 20,601    $ 72,272    $ 186,600    $ 328,000    $ 289,900

Amount outstanding at end of year

  $ 20,941    $ 14,139    $ 21,723    $ 158,100    $ 44,200    $ 8,000

Interest expense

  $ 246    $ 107    $ 480    $ 1,343    $ 636    $ 704

 

13.    LONG-TERM DEBT AND OTHER BORROWINGS

 

Long-term debt and other borrowings include the following items:

 

(dollars in thousands)    December 31,

   2004

   2003

Long term debt and other borrowings:

             

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

   $ 619,143    $ 380,100

Treasury Tax & Loan amounts due to Federal Reserve Bank

     14,888      8,448

Subordinated debt issued by the Bank

     121,000      71,000

Senior debt issued by the Bancorp

     37,000      40,000

Subordinated debt issued by the Bancorp

     31,091     

  

  

Total Long term debt and other borrowings

     823,122      499,548

Obligation under capital lease

     9,130     

  

  

Total long term debt and other borrowing and obligations under capital lease

   $ 832,252    $ 499,548

  

  

 

To supplement deposits when loan demand is high and as part of the Company’s asset and liability management strategy, fixed rate term advances are borrowed from the FHLB. As of December 31, 2004, total outstanding balances to the FHLB were $619.1 million. There were $234.0 million in scheduled maturities of the advances of 1 year or less, $289.1 million in 1 to 3 years, and $96.0 million in more than 3 years.

 

In July 2001, the Company issued $40 million in senior notes and SBB&T issued $36 million in subordinated debt. The senior notes bear an interest rate of 7.54%, payable semi-annually and mature in July 2006. The subordinated notes bear an interest rate of 9.22%, payable semi-annually and mature in July 2011. As subordinated notes, they are included as Tier II capital for the risk-based capital ratio computations of the Company and PCBNA as discussed in Note 20. The proceeds of the senior note were used to repay a short-term note the Company had issued in 2000

 

108


Table of Contents

in connection with the purchase of the stock of Los Robles Bancorp and for other corporate purposes. At the time of the acquisition of PCCI, it had held $3 million of these notes. The acquisition of these notes in the transaction effectively retired this portion of the debt.

 

In December 2003, PCBNA issued $35 million in subordinated debt. The debt was issued as part of a pool of debt issued by a number of financial institutions. The notes mature in December 2013 and are priced at a floating rate of 2.60% over the 90 day LIBOR rate. At issuance LIBOR was 1.17% for resulting in a note rate of 3.77%. The notes are callable at par after 5 years. The proceeds of the debt will be used as part of the funding of the acquisition of PCCI mentioned in Note 2. The notes qualify as Tier 2 capital for PCBNA and the Company in the computation of capital ratios discussed in Note 20.

 

The “Subordinated debt issued by Bancorp” was assumed in connection with the March 5, 2004 PCCI acquisition. This debt is owed to the three business trust subsidiaries of Bancorp that were added in the PCCI acquisition and is comprised of the following: $13,750,000 owed to PCC Trust I, $6,190,000 owed to PCC Trust II, and $10,310,000 owed to PCC Trust III. Each of the three pieces of this subordinated debt will mature in 2033, but is callable by the Company in part or in total in 2008. The PCC Trust I debt has a fixed interest rate of 6.335% until 2008, after which the interest rate will float and reset quarterly at the three-month LIBOR rate plus 3.25%. The PCC Trust II debt has a fixed interest rate of 6.58% until 2008, after which the interest rate will float and reset quarterly at the three-month LIBOR rate plus 3.15%. The PCC Trust III debt has a fixed interest rate of 6.80% until 2008, after which the interest rate will float and reset quarterly at the three-month LIBOR rate plus 3.10%.

 

In December 2004, PCBNA issued $50 million in subordinated debt. The note matures in 2015. The note bears a fixed interest rate of 5.42% for the first five years when it becomes callable by the Company. During the next five years the debt reprices every three months to 1.75% over the LIBOR rate.

 

The obligation under capital lease was incurred at the beginning of 2004 when the Company assumed the master lease on a shopping center in which one of its branch offices is located. Based on the payments and term of the lease, the net present value of the portion of the payments related to the buildings is recorded as a capital lease. The amount of lease payments for 2004 was $875,000. This amount was determinable by the lease agreement. There are no contingent amounts. During the early years of the lease, the payments made by the Company will be less than the interest expense that will be recognized on the obligation and therefore the obligation will increase. The amount of the increase in 2004 was $200,000. In later years, as the payments increase under the terms of the lease, they will exceed the interest expense and the obligation will be reduced each year. The portion of the payments related to the land is accounted for as an operating lease. As of December 31, 2004, the total minimum sublease rent to be received under non-cancelable subleases is $2.7 million.

 

The Treasury tax and loan amounts are payroll deposits made by employers to PCBNA for eventual payment to the I.R.S. PCBNA may hold these deposits and pay interest on them until called by the Treasury Department.

 

With respect to each of the above debt instruments, there are no significant restrictive covenants as to the issuance of other debt or that would require payment in full prior to the scheduled maturity.

 

During the course of 2004, 2003, and 2002, the Company occasionally borrowed funds for liquidity purposes from the discount window at the FRBSF.

 

14.    OTHER POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS

 

All eligible retirees may obtain health insurance coverage through the Company’s Retiree Health Plan (“the Plan”). The coverage is provided through the basic coverage plan provided for current employees. Based on a formula involving date of retirement, age at retirement, and years of service prior to retirement, the Plan provides that the Company will pay a portion of the health insurance premium for the retiree. The portion varies from 60% to 100% of the premium amount at the time the employee retires, with the stipulation that the portion paid by the Company shall not increase by more than 5% per year for retirees. Though the premiums for a retiree’s health coverage are not paid until after the employee retires, the Company is required to recognize the cost of those benefits as they are earned rather than when paid.

 

109


Table of Contents

The Accumulated Postretirement Benefit Obligation

 

The commitment the Company has made to provide these benefits results in an obligation that must be recognized in the financial statements. This obligation, termed the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation (“APBO”), is the actuarial net present value of the obligation for: (1) already retired employees’ expected postretirement benefits; and (2) the portion of the expected postretirement benefit obligation earned to date by current employees. The net present value is that amount which if compounded at an assumed interest rate would equal the amount expected to be paid in the future.

 

This obligation must be re-measured each year because it changes with each of the following factors: (1) the number of employees working for the Company; (2) the average age of the employees working for the Company as this impacts how soon it would be expected that the Company will begin making payments; (3) increases in expected health care costs; and (4) prevailing interest rates. In addition, because the obligation is measured on a net present value basis, the passage of each year brings the eventual payment of benefits closer, and therefore, like the compounding of interest, causes the obligation to increase. The following tables disclose the reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances of the APBO; the reconciliation of beginning and ending balances of the fair value of the plan assets; and the funding status of the Plan as of December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002.

 

(in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Benefit obligation, beginning of year

   $ (13,243 )   $ (9,857 )   $ (9,852 )

Service cost

     (1,462 )     (991 )     (747 )

Interest cost

     (795 )     (666 )     (692 )

New participants

     (275 )     (160 )     (79 )

Actuarial (losses) gains

     (199 )     (1,768 )     1,357  

Benefits paid

     219       199       156  

  


 


 


Benefit obligation, end of year

     (15,755 )     (13,243 )     (9,857 )

  


 


 


Fair value of Plan assets, beginning of year

     6,085       3,465       4,940  

Actual return on Plan assets

     627       1,191       (1,399 )

Employer contribution

     2,000       1,543       32  

Benefits paid

     (159 )     (114 )     (108 )

  


 


 


Fair value of Plan assets, end of year

     8,553       6,085       3,465  

  


 


 


Funded Status

     (7,202 )     (7,158 )     (6,392 )

Unrecognized net actuarial loss (gain)

     4,568       4,777       4,116  

Unrecognized prior service cost

     275       160       79  

  


 


 


Accrued benefit cost

   $ (2,359 )   $ (2,221 )   $ (2,197 )

  


 


 


 

Accrued benefit costs of $2.4 million for December 31, 2004, and $2.2 million for December 31, 2003, are included within the category for accrued interest payable and other liabilities in the consolidated balance sheets.

 

The Components of the Net Periodic Postretirement Benefit Cost

 

Each year the Company recognizes a portion of the change in the APBO as an expense. This portion is called the net periodic postretirement benefit cost (the “NPPBC”). The NPPBC, is made up of several components:

 

·       Service cost

  Each year employees earn a portion of their eventual benefit. This component is the net present value of that portion.

·       Interest cost

  Each year the benefit obligation for each employee is one year closer to being paid and therefore increases in amount closer to the eventual benefit payment amount. This component represents that increase resulting from the passage of another year.

 

110


Table of Contents

·       Return on assets

  Income is earned on any investments that have been set aside to fund the eventual benefit payments. This component is an offset to the first two components.

·       Amortization cost

  Significant estimates and assumptions about interest rates, trends in health care costs, plan changes, employee turnover, and earnings on assets are used in measuring the APBO each year. Actual experience may differ from the estimates and assumptions may change. Differences will result in what are termed experience gains and losses. These may be increases or decreases in the APBO or in the value of plan assets. This component recognizes a portion of the experience gains and losses.

·       Prior service
cost

  At the adoption of the Plan, the Company fully recognized the net present value of the benefits credited to employees for service provided prior to the adoption of the plan. Had the Company not recognized this amount, a portion of it would be included as a fifth component.

 

The following table shows the amounts for each of the components of the NPPBC. The total amount is included with the cost of other employee benefits in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

 

(in thousands)    Years Ended December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Service cost

   $ 1,462     $ 991     $ 747  

Interest cost

     795       666       690  

Return on assets

     (389 )     (291 )     (337 )

Amortization cost

     330       267       237  

  


 


 


Net periodic postretirement cost

   $ 2,198     $ 1,633     $ 1,337  

  


 


 


 

The Use of Estimates and the Amortization of Experience Gains and Losses

 

The following table discloses the assumed rates that have been used for the factors that may have a significant impact on the APBO.

 

     December 31,

   2004

  2003

  2002

Discount rate

   5.84%   6.07%   6.85%

Expected return on plan assets

   6.50%   6.50%   6.50%

Health care inflation rate

   Graded rates   Graded rates   Graded rates

 

The discount rate is used to compute the present value of the APBO. It is selected each year by reference to the current rates of investment grade corporate bonds, specifically Moody’s Aa corporate bond yield as of November 30. Higher discount rates result in a lower APBO at the end of the year and the NPPBC to be recognized for the following year, while lower rates raise both.

 

While the discount rate has fluctuated with market rates, the Company had continued to use 7.00% as its estimate of the long-term rate of return on plan assets until 2002 when it used 6.50% to better reflect recent lower returns in the markets. The APBO is a long-term liability of 30 years or more. The 6.50% rate is the assumed average earning rate over an equally long investment horizon. If the rate of return in any year is greater than this estimate, the Company will have an experience gain, and an experience loss if the rate of return is less. Earnings (losses) on the plan’s assets were (28.50%), 28.50%, and 9.00%, for the years ended December 31, 2002, 2003, and 2004, respectively.

 

As noted above, the Company’s contribution for insurance premiums for retirees is limited to an annual increase of 5%. Should insurance premiums increase at a higher rate, the retirees are

 

111


Table of Contents

required to contribute a larger portion of the total premium cost. Because of this limitation, an increase of more than 5% in the actual cost of health care will have no impact on the portion of the APBO that relates to retired employees. However, increases in health insurance costs do impact the portion of the APBO for current employees, because there is no specified limit to the increases in health insurance costs for them. In other words, for current employees, the projected health insurance cost for them may rise at a rate greater than 5%. If costs rise at a greater rate, the Company will have an experience loss. If they rise at a lesser rate, there will be an experience gain.

 

For the health care inflation rate for current employees, the Company has assumed 9% for 2005 with rates gradually decreasing each year to 5% in 2008 and thereafter.

 

The Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act was enacted in 2003. The APBO and NPPBC disclosed in the above tables do not reflect any amount associated with the federal subsidy provided by the act because the Company is unable to conclude whether the benefits provided by the Plan are actuarially equivalent to those provided by the act.

 

Assumed health care cost trend rates have a significant effect on the amounts reported for the health care plans. A one-percentage-point change in assumed health care cost trend rates would have the following effects:

 


   1-Percentage-Point
Increase


   As
Estimated


   1-Percentage-Point
Decrease


Effect on total of service and interest cost components

   $ 2,681    $ 2,094    $ 1,634

Effect on postretirement benefit obligation

   $ 18,714    $ 15,755    $ 13,243

 

Rather than recognizing the whole amount of the experience gains or losses in the year after they arise, under GAAP they are recognized through amortization over the average remaining service lives of the employees. Amortization over time is used because many of these changes may be partially or fully reversed in subsequent years as further changes in experience and/or assumptions occur. At December 31, 2004, and December 31, 2003, the Company had unamortized or unrecognized losses of $4,568,000 and $4,777,000, respectively. These amounts are reported in the first table of this note.

 

Plan Assets

 

The Company established a Voluntary Employees’ Beneficiary Association (“VEBA”) to hold the assets that will be used to pay the benefits for participants of the plan other than key executive officers. Most of the plan assets have been invested in insurance policies on the lives of various employees of the Company. In turn, the premiums paid on these policies in excess of the mortality costs of the insurance and the administrative costs are invested in mutual funds. This investment practice is followed in order to accumulate assets that can earn a nontaxable return because the mutual funds are “wrapped” in the insurance policies. The following table shows the allocation of plan assets by asset category.

 

The weighted-average assets allocation for the VEBA assets were as follows:

 

     As of December 31,  

   2004

    2003

 

Asset category:

            

Equity securities

   96 %   99 %

Debt securities

   4 %   1 %

Real estate

   0 %   0 %

Other

   0 %   0 %

  

 

Total

   100 %   100 %

  

 

 

112


Table of Contents

Funded Status

 

If the assets of the VEBA are more than the APBO related to employees of the Company not defined as key employees, the VEBA is overfunded. If the assets of the VEBA are less than the APBO related to employees of the Company not defined as key employees, the VEBA is underfunded. The funded status of the plan is shown in the first table in this note as the amount by which the plan assets are more or less than the APBO. As of December 31, 2004, the VEBA was underfunded by $5,210,000. The APBO related to the key employees of $1,992,000 is totally unfunded.

 

Employers are allowed wide discretion as to whether and how they set aside funds to meet the obligation they are recognizing. However, while GAAP requires assumed increases in the rate of future health care costs to be used in computing the amount of APBO and the funded status of the such plans, the Internal Revenue Code (“IRC”) does not permit the Company to deduct the portion of the NPPBC for non-key employees that relates to assumed increases in the rate of future health care costs. Consequently, so long as future health care costs are projected to increase, the Company could not deduct a contribution of the whole amount necessary to fully fund the non-key employee obligation. In addition, the IRC specifically prohibits funding of the obligation relating to the key employees.

 

Cash Flows

 

Contributions: The current funding policy of the Company with respect to the non-key employee plan is to contribute assets to the VEBA at least sufficient to pay the costs of current medical premiums of retirees. In some years the Company also contributes assets to pay the costs of the life insurance premiums and to provide additional earning assets for the VEBA to reduce any underfunded condition. Generally, these additional contributions will not exceed the amount that can be deducted in the Company’s current income tax return, but if they do, the tax effect of the amount in excess of deductible amount will be recognized as a deferred tax asset (See Note 15). In those years that the Company does not contribute assets for the payment of the life insurance premiums, assets in the VEBA are used to pay the premiums. Proceeds from the life insurance policy payoffs will fund benefits and premiums in the future. Such proceeds are included in the assumed 6.5% rate of return on the assets of the plan. If the Company’s Employee Benefits Advisory Committee has made a formal decision on the contribution to be made for the year prior to year-end, the contribution will be recognized as a receivable in the plan assets of the VEBA. The decision on the amount of the contribution for 2003 was not made prior to year-end. Subsequent to year-end, the committee decided to contribute $1 million to the VEBA in 2004 for 2003. This contribution was made in the first quarter of 2004. Another $1 million was contributed during the remainder of 2004. The Company estimates that it will make contributions in the range of $1.0 to $2.0 million in 2005.

 

Estimated Future Benefit Payments: The Company has estimated that it will make the following benefit payments. These estimates reflect expected future service as appropriate.

 


   Health Benefits

2005

   $ 348

2006

     401

2007

     435

2008

     511

2009

     574

Years 2010-2014

     4,554

 

15.    INCOME TAXES

 

The provisions (benefits) for income taxes related to operations and the tax benefit related to stock options that is credited directly to shareholders’ equity are disclosed in the next table.

 

Current tax expense is the amount that is estimated to be due to taxing authorities for the current year. Some of this amount was paid during each year in the form of estimated payments. Deferred tax expense or benefit represents the tax effect of changes in the temporary differences due to an item of income or expense being recognized for financial statement purposes in a different period than it is recognized in the Company’s tax return.

 

113


Table of Contents

The total current provision for income taxes includes a net credit of $849,000 for securities losses realized in 2004, a debit of $849,000 for securities gains realized in 2003, and a debit of $288,000 for securities gains realized in 2002.

 

(in thousands)   Year Ended December 31,  

  2004

    2003

    2002

 

Federal:

                       

Current

  $ 35,540     $ 28,211     $ 24,662  

Deferred

    1,462       1,782       4,707  

 


 


 


      37,002       29,993       29,369  

 


 


 


State:

                       

Current

    13,909       12,062       10,402  

Deferred

    1,035       287       94  

 


 


 


      14,944       12,349       10,496  

 


 


 


Total tax provision

  $ 51,946     $ 42,342     $ 39,865  

 


 


 


Reduction in taxes payable associated with exercises of stock options

  $ (2,851 )   $ (1,637 )   $ (1,460 )

Tax credits included in the computation of the tax provision

  $ (2,382 )   $ (2,648 )   $ (1,750 )

 

Although not affecting the total provision, actual income tax payments may differ from the amounts shown as current provision as a result of the final determination made during the preparation of the Company’s tax returns as to the timing of certain deductions and credits. The total tax provision differs from the Federal statutory rate of 35 percent for the reasons shown in the following table.

 

    Year Ended
December 31,
 

  2004

    2003

    2002

 

Tax provision at Federal statutory rate

  35.0 %   35.0 %   35.0 %

Interest on securities and loans exempt from Federal taxation

  (2.8 )   (3.2 )   (3.7 )

State income taxes, net of Federal income tax benefit

  6.9     6.9     5.8  

ESOP dividends deductible as an expense for tax purposes

  (0.3 )   (0.4 )   0.4  

Tax Credits

  (1.6 )   (1.6 )   (1.1 )

Other, net

  (0.1 )   (0.8 )   0.9  

 

 

 

Tax provision at effective rate

  37.1 %   35.9 %   37.3 %

 

 

 

 

The following table shows the amount of deferred tax asset or liability related to the major temporary differences as of December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002. As disclosed in the following table, net deferred tax assets as of December 31, 2004, and 2003, totaled $12.2 million and $13.6 million, respectively. These amounts are included within other assets on the balance sheet.

 

As mentioned in Note 1, the net unrealized gain or loss on securities that are available-for-sale is included as a component of equity. This amount is reported net of the related tax effect. The tax effect is a deferred tax asset if there is a net unrealized loss because the Company would have received a deduction for the loss had the securities been sold as of the end of the year. The tax effect would be a deferred tax liability if there were a net unrealized gain, because the Company would owe additional taxes had the securities been sold as of the end of the year. However, changes in the unrealized gains or losses are not recognized either in net income or in taxable income, and therefore they do not represent temporary differences between reported financial statement income and taxable income reported on the Company’s tax return. Consequently, the

 

114


Table of Contents

change in the tax effect of the net unrealized gain or loss is not included as a component of deferred tax expense or benefit, but is disclosed separately in the table below.

 

(in thousands)    December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Deferred tax assets:

                        

Allowance for credit losses

   $ 24,743     $ 22,888     $ 23,945  

State taxes

     4,630       4,032       4,368  

Loan fees

     1,102       1,102       831  

Nonaccrual interest

     128       59       65  

Accretion on securities

     154       28        

Accrued salary continuation plan

     1,274       1,400       1,534  

Change in control payments

     1,570       1,371       864  

Deferred Compensation

     3,290       2,971       2,685  

Accrual for BOLI

     508       508       508  

Premium on Acquired Liabilities

     1,138              

Other

     51       25       25  

  


 


 


       38,588       34,384       34,825  

  


 


 


Deferred tax liabilities:

                        

Loan costs

     3,098       2,755       2,487  

FHLB Stock

     1,550       573        

Fixed Assets

     9,331       6,810       5,339  

Postretirement benefits

     10       619       417  

Accretion on securities

                 214  

Gain on demutualization of of insurance company

                 160  

Premium on Acquired Loans

     2,159              

Federal effect of state tax asset

     1,407       1,756       1,870  

Other

     3,070       1,409       1,809  

  


 


 


Total deferred tax liabilities

     20,625       13,922       12,296  

  


 


 


Net deferred tax asset before unrealized gains and losses on securities

     17,963       20,462       22,529  

Unrealized (gains) and losses on securities

     (5,782 )     (6,896 )     (6,228 )

  


 


 


Net deferred tax asset

   $ 12,181     $ 13,566     $ 16,301  

  


 


 


 

The Company is permitted to recognize deferred tax assets only to the extent that they are able to be used to reduce amounts that have been paid or will be paid to tax authorities. Management reviews this each year by comparing the amount of the deferred tax assets with amounts paid in the past that might be recovered by carryback provisions in the tax code and with anticipated taxable income expected to be generated from operations in the future. If it does not appear that the deferred tax assets are usable, a valuation allowance would be established to acknowledge their uncertain benefit. Management believes a valuation allowance is not needed to reduce any deferred tax asset because there is sufficient taxable income within the carryback periods to realize all material amounts.

 

16.    EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

 

The Company’s Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“ESOP”) was initiated in January 1985. As of December 31, 2004, the ESOP held 1,983,677 shares.

 

The Company’s profit-sharing plan, initiated in 1966, has two components. The Salary Savings Plan component is authorized under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code. An employee may

 

115


Table of Contents

defer up to 10% of pre-tax salary in the plan up to a maximum dollar amount set each year by the Internal Revenue Service. The Company matches 100% of the first 3% of the employee’s compensation that the employee elects to defer and 50% of the next 3%, but not more than 4.5% of the employee’s total compensation. In 2004, 2003, and 2002, the employer’s matching contributions were $2.4 million, $2.2 million and $2.0 million, respectively. The other component is the Incentive & Investment Plan (“I&I Plan”) which permits contributions by the Company to be invested in various mutual funds chosen by the employees.

 

Until several years ago, the Company’s practice had been to make total contributions to the employee benefit plans equal to the smaller of (1) 10% of pre-tax profits prior to this employer contribution, or (2) the amount permitted by the IRC as a deductible expense on its income tax return. The latter is defined as a percentage of eligible compensation. With the increase in the Company’s pre-tax profits and compensation expense over the last two years and revisions to the IRC that permitted a larger percentage of eligible compensation to be contributed, the Company has elected to contribute less than either of the amounts that would have been determined by the two formulae above to avoid the extra expense. After providing for the Company’s contribution to the Retiree Health Plan discussed in Note 14 and the matching contribution to the Salary Savings Plan, the remaining contribution may be made either to the ESOP or to the Incentive & Investment Plan.

 

Total contributions by the Company to the above profit-sharing plans were $4,901,000 in 2004, $4,371,000 in 2003, and $4,579,000 in 2002. Only a portion of the contributions for 2002 and 2003 were actually paid within the respective calendar years so that the ESOP would not be competing against the Company in the market during a period when the Company was repurchasing stock for retirement. Accordingly the balance of the 2002 contribution was paid in 2003 and the balance of the 2003 contribution was paid in 2004. The contribution for 2004 will be paid in 2005. Aside from the employer’s matching contribution to the Salary Savings Plan or 401(k) component of the profit-sharing plan, the contributions went to the ESOP in 2004, to the ESOP in 2003, and both to the I&I Plan and the ESOP in 2002.

 

17.    COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

 

Table of Contractual Obligations

 

The following table shows the contractual obligations the Company is committed to make. The nature, business purpose, and significance of the items are discussed in separate sections below the table.

 

(dollars in thousands)   As of December 31, 2004

   As of
December 31,
2003



  Less than
one year


   One to
three
years


   Three to
five years


   More
than five
years


   Total

  
     

Deposits *

  $ 4,132,232    $ 280,375    $ 98,269    $ 1,414    $ 4,512,290    $ 3,854,717

Borrowings

    463,765      326,148      144,250    $ 77,130    $ 1,011,293      557,887

Purchase obligations

    2,983                     2,983      1,682

Non-cancelable leases

    9,763      16,343      10,784      8,536      45,426      86,000

Capital leases

    247      495      604      22,377      23,723     

 

  

  

  

  

  

Total

  $ 4,608,990    $ 623,361    $ 253,907    $ 109,457    $ 5,595,715    $ 4,500,286

 

  

  

  

  

  

 

* Only certificates of deposit have a specified maturity. The balances of other deposit accounts are assigned to the Less Than One Year time range.

 

Deposits:  As a commercial bank, deposits are the primary funding source for the Company’s business. Deposits are accepted from both retail customers and business entities. In addition to representing the largest funding source, they are also generally lower in cost than any other source of funding because of the deposit insurance that is made available through the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (the “FDIC”) to depositors of banks. The Company continuously solicits new deposit customers and frequently uses special promotions to attract them.

 

116


Table of Contents

While the Company is contractually obligated to repay all depositors, only the certificates of deposits have specific maturities. There are some legal limitations on the ability of customers to withdraw funds from savings and other non-transaction accounts and the Company monitors activity on non-transaction accounts, limiting withdrawal activity to less than six transactions per month. Checking and NOW accounts are demand accounts which may be withdrawn at anytime.

 

The table above shows the maturity of the certificates of deposit, with non-term deposits all showing as due in the less than one year time range.

 

In Note 11 is a table that shows the balances of the various categories of deposits and the associated interest expense.

 

Borrowings:  Non-deposit borrowings constitute the other source of funding for bank operations. These borrowings include short and long-term obligations. The short-term obligations include securities sold under agreements to repurchase and Federal funds purchased (see Note 12). The long-term obligations include FHLB advances, PCBNA’s and Bancorp’s subordinated debt, and Bancorp’s senior debt (see Note 13). There are no specific triggering events associated with this debt other than defaulted payments that cause the total amounts to become due and payable prior to the contractual maturity.

 

Purchase obligations:  The amounts shown in the table for purchase obligations represent payments the must be made for the new computer software system the Company is installing.

 

Leasing of Premises:  The Company leases most of its office locations and substantially all of these office leases contain multiple five-year renewal options and provisions for increased rentals, principally for property taxes and maintenance. As of December 31, 2004, the minimum rentals under non-cancelable leases for the next five years and thereafter are shown in the above table. The amounts in the table for minimum rentals are not reported net of the contractual obligations of sub-tenants. Sub-tenants leasing space from the Company under these operating leases are contractually obligated to the Company for approximately $2.7 million. Approximately 54% of these payments are due to the Company over the next three years.

 

Capital lease obligation:  This obligation is explained in Note 13.

 

Total rental expense, net of sublease income, for premises included in operating expenses are $8.2 million in 2004, $7.0 million in 2003, and $6.6 million in 2002.

 

As explained in Note 14, the Company has an unfunded obligation for its post retirement health program. There is no specific required date by which this obligation must be funded. The Company is specifically prohibited from funding the portion that is related to key employees. Management expects to make contributions during the next several years, but expects that in subsequent years the funding will be provided by proceeds from the life insurance policies that previous contributions have been used to purchase.

 

Related Parties

 

In the ordinary course of business, the Company has extended credit to directors and executive employees of the Company totaling $7.1 million at December 31, 2004 and $5.8 million at December 31, 2003. Such loans are subject to ratification by the Board of Directors, exclusive of the borrowing director. Federal banking regulations require that any such extensions of credit not be offered on terms more favorable than would be offered to borrowers of similar credit worthiness that are not related parties.

 

Letters and Lines of Credit

 

In order to meet the financing needs of its customers in the normal course of business, the Company is a party to financial instruments with “off-balance sheet” risk. These financial instruments consist of commitments to extend credit and standby letters of credit.

 

117


Table of Contents

The maximum non-discounted exposure to credit risk is represented by the contractual notional amount of those instruments. The majority of the commitments are for one year or less. The majority of the credit lines and commitments may be withdrawn by the Company subject to applicable legal requirements. As of December 31, 2004 and 2003, the contractual notional amounts of these instruments are as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)   As of December 31, 2004

  As of
December 31,
2003



  Less than
one year


   One to
three
years


   Three
to five
years


   More
than five
years


   Total

 

Commercial lines of credit

  $ 297,178    $ 86,788    $ 39,068    $ 62,340    $ 485,374   $ 455,991

Consumer lines of credit

    2,739      5,981      8,097      230,966      247,783     173,888

Standby letters of credit

    54,270      29,663      14,469      4,229      102,631     89,535

 

  

  

  

  

 

Total

  $ 354,187    $ 122,432    $ 61,634    $ 297,535    $ 835,788   $ 719,414

 

  

  

  

  

 

 

Commitments to extend credit—lines of credit—are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. The Company has not usually charged fees in connection with loan commitments.

 

Changes in market rates of interest for those few commitments and undisbursed loans which have fixed rates of interest represent a possible cause of loss because of the contractual requirement to lend money at a rate that is no longer as great as the market rate at the time the loan is funded. To minimize this risk, if rates are quoted in a commitment, they are generally stated in relation to the Company’s prime or base lending rate. These rates vary with prevailing market interest rates. Fixed-rate loan commitments are not usually made for more than three months.

 

The Company anticipates that a majority of the above commitments will not be fully drawn on by customers. Consumers do not tend to borrow the maximum amounts available under their home equity lines and businesses typically arrange for credit lines in excess of their expected needs to handle contingencies.

 

Standby letters of credit are conditional commitments issued by the Company to guarantee the performance of a customer to a third party. The Company charges a fee for these letters of credit. Both lines of credit and standby letters of credit involve, to varying degrees, exposure to credit risk in excess of the amounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets.

 

In the case of lines of credit, this arises from the Company being obligated to lend money to a borrower whose financial condition may indicate less ability to pay than when the commitment was originally made. In the case of standby letters of credit, this risk arises from the possibility of the failure of the customer to perform according to the terms of a contract. In such a situation the third party might draw on the standby letter of credit to pay for completion of the contract and the Company would have to look to its customer to repay these funds to the Company with interest. To minimize the risk, the Company uses the same credit policies in making commitments and conditional obligations as it would for a loan to that customer. The decision as to whether collateral should be required is based on the circumstances of each specific commitment or conditional obligation. Because of these practices, Management does not generally anticipate that any significant losses will arise from such draws. In 2003 and 2004, however, the third party for two letters of credit issued for one customer made several draws on the letters of credit because of the borrower’s inability to meet its financial commitment. The Company has not recognized a receivable for the amount of the draw because of doubts regarding the borrower’s ability to pay the Company.

 

The Company has established an estimate for credit loss on letters of credit. In accordance with GAAP, this estimate is not included as part of the allowance for credit loss reported on the consolidated balance sheets for outstanding loans. Instead, the $1.2 million estimate is included in other liabilities.

 

118


Table of Contents

The table below shows charges in this estimate for the last three years. The funding of the letters of credit mentioned above are included in the table for 2003 and 2004.

 

(dollars in thousands)    Years ended December 31,


   2004

     2003

     2002

Beginning estimate

   $ 3,942      $ 2,446      $ 302

Additions and other changes

     50        4,624        2,144

Funded and written-off

     (2,760 )      (3,128 )     

  


  


  

Ending estimate

   $ 1,232      $ 3,942      $ 2,446

  


  


  

 

Concentration of Lending Activities

 

With the exception of the RAL program mentioned in Note 6, the Company has concentrated its lending activity primarily with customers in the market areas served by its branch offices. Mergers and acquisitions have introduced some geographical diversity as each market area now represents only a portion of the whole Company. The business customers are in widely diversified industries, and there is a large consumer component to the portfolio. The Company monitors concentrations within four broad categories: industry, geography, product, and collateral. One significant concentration in the loan portfolio is represented by loans collateralized by real estate. The nature of this collateral, however, is quite varied, namely 1-4 family residential, multifamily residential, and commercial buildings of various kinds. The Company has considered this concentration in evaluating the adequacy of the allowance for credit loss in the allocated component.

 

Trust Activities

 

The Company has a trust department that has fiduciary responsibility for the assets that it holds on behalf of its trust customers. These assets are not owned by the Company and accordingly are not reflected in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets.

 

Legal

 

The Company is a defendant in a class action lawsuit brought on behalf of persons who entered into a refund anticipation loan application and agreement (the “RAL Agreement”) with the Company from whose tax refund the Company deducted a debt owed by the applicant to another RAL lender. The lawsuit was filed on March 18, 2003 in the Superior Court in San Francisco, California as Canieva Hood and Congress of California Seniors v. Santa Barbara Bank & Trust, Pacific Capital Bank, N.A., and Jackson-Hewitt, Inc. The Company is a party to a separate cross-collection agreement with each of the other RAL lenders by which it agrees to collect sums due to those other lenders on delinquent RALs by deducting those sums from tax refunds due to its RAL customers and remitting those funds to the RAL lender to whom the debt is owed. This cross-collection procedure is disclosed in the RAL Agreement with the RAL customer and is specifically authorized and agreed to by the customer. The plaintiff does not contest the validity of the debt, but contends that the cross-collection is illegal and requests damages on behalf of the class, injunctive relief against the Company, restitution of sums collected, punitive damages and attorneys’ fees. Venue for this suit has been changed to Santa Barbara. The Company has filed an answer to the complaint and has also filed a cross-complaint seeking indemnity from the other RAL lenders for which the funds were cross-collected. The Company believes that there is no merit to the claims made in this action and intends to vigorously defend itself.

 

The Company is a defendant in a class action lawsuit brought on behalf of persons who entered into a refund transfer application and agreement (the “RT Agreement”) with the Company from whose tax refund the Company deducted a debt owed by the applicant to another RAL lender. The lawsuit was filed on May 13, 2003 in the Superior Court in San Francisco, California as Alana Clark, Judith Silverstine, and David Shelton v. Santa Barbara Bank & Trust. The cross-collection procedures mentioned in the description above of the Hood case is also disclosed in the RT Agreement with each RT customer and is specifically authorized and agreed to by the customers. The plaintiffs do

 

119


Table of Contents

not contest the validity of the debt, but contend that the cross-collection is illegal and request damages on behalf of the class, injunctive relief against the Company, restitution of sums collected, punitive damages and attorneys’ fees. The Company filed a motion for a change in venue from San Francisco to Santa Barbara. The plaintiffs’ legal counsel stipulated to the change in venue. Thereafter, the plaintiffs have dismissed the complaint without prejudice. The plaintiffs have filed a new complaint in San Francisco limited to a single cause of action alleging a violation of the California Consumer Legal Remedies Act. The Company has filed an answer to the complaint and has also filed a cross-complaint seeking indemnity from the other RAL lenders for which the money was cross-collected. The Company believes that there is no merit to the claims made in this action and intends to vigorously defend itself.

 

The Company is a defendant in a class action law suit brought on behalf of residents of the State of New York who engaged Jackson Hewitt, Inc (“JHI”) to provide tax preparation services and who through JHI entered into an agreement with the Company to receive a RAL. JHI is also a defendant. The lawsuit was filed on June 18, 2004, in the Supreme Court of the State of New York, County of New York as Myron Benton v. Jackson Hewitt, Inc. and Santa Barbara Bank & Trust Co. As part of the RAL documentation, the customer receives and signs a disclosure form which discloses that the Company may share a portion of the federal refund processing fee and finance charge with JHI. The plaintiffs allege that the failure of JHI and the Company to disclose the specific amount of the fee which JHI receives is unlawful and request damages on behalf of the class, injunctive relief, punitive damages and attorneys’ fees. Following the filing of a motion to dismiss the complaint by the Company, the plaintiff has filed an amended complaint. The amended complaint has added three new causes of action: 1) a cause of action for an alleged violation of California Business and Professions Code Sections 17200, and 17500, et seq, as a result of alleged deceptive business practices and false advertising; 2) a cause of action for an alleged violation of the California Legal Remedies Act, California Civil Code Section 1750, et seq; 3) a cause of action for an alleged negligent misrepresentation. The Company believes that there is no merit to the claims made in this action and intends to vigorously defend itself.

 

The Company is involved in various litigation of a routine nature which is being handled and defended in the ordinary course of the Company’s business. Expenses are being incurred in connection with defending the Company, but in the opinion of Management, based in part on consultation with legal counsel, the resolution of this litigation will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position, results of operations, or cash flows.

 

18.    SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

 

Stock Repurchases

 

In early 2002, the Company repurchased 225,000 shares with $5.0 million remaining from $20 million authorized by the Board of Directors in 2001. In March 2002 the Board of Directors authorized the use of another $20 million for the repurchase of shares under the same terms, i.e. shares could be repurchased from time to time as Management deemed the price to be favorable. During 2002, approximately 519,000 shares were purchased for $13.2 million from this second authorization.

 

In early 2003, the Company repurchased 284,000 shares with the remaining $6.8 million. The Board of Directors authorized an additional $40 million of repurchases. Approximately $21.4 million of this was spent during the remainder of 2003 to repurchase 640,000 shares.

 

With the growth in assets from the PCCI acquisition and because no stock was issued as consideration, Management elected not to repurchase any shares in 2004.

 

Stock Splits

 

In April 2002, the Company’s Board of Directors approved a 4 for 3 stock split. The additional stock was distributed in June 2002. All share and per share amounts appearing in these notes and in the Consolidated Financial Statements which these notes accompany have been restated to reflect this split.

 

120


Table of Contents

In June 2004, the Company’s Board of Directors approved another 4 for 3 stock split. The additional stock was distributed in June 2004. All share and per share amounts appearing in these notes and in the Consolidated Financial Statements which these notes accompany have been restated to reflect this split.

 

In both instances, the Company paid cash for fractional shares resulting from the stock split. For the year ended December 31, 2002, the amount paid is included with other retirements.

 

Stock Option Plans

 

The Company’s stock option plans offer key employees and directors an opportunity to purchase shares of the Company’s common stock. The Company has four stock option plans. Options are granted from only two of these.

 

The first of these is the Directors Stock Option Plan established in 1996. Only non-qualified options may be granted under this plan. The second is the 2002 Stock Plan for employees established in January 2002. Either incentive or non-qualified options may be granted under this plan. Under the original provisions of the Directors plan, stock acquired by the exercise of options granted under the plans could not be sold for five years after the date of the grant or for two years after the date options are exercised, whichever was later. In 1998, the Board of Directors of the Company eliminated this restriction.

 

The remaining two plans are active now only for the exercise of options held by employees and directors.

 

All options outstanding in these plans were granted with an option price set at 100% of the market value of the Company’s common stock on the date of the grant. The grants for most of the employee options specify that they are exercisable in cumulative 20% annual installments and will expire five years from the date of grant. The Board has granted some options that expire ten years from the date of grant. The options granted under the directors’ plan are exercisable after six months.

 

The option plans permit employees and directors to pay the exercise price of options they are exercising and the related tax liability with shares of Company stock they already own. The owned shares are surrendered to the Company at current market value. Shares with a current market value of $4,338,000, $3,230,000, and $2,887,000 were surrendered in the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002, respectively. These surrendered shares are netted against the new shares issued for the exercise of stock options in the Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity.

 

121


Table of Contents

The following table presents information relating to all of the stock option plans as of December 31, 2004, 2003, and 2002 (adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends).

 

     Options

   Per Share
Price Ranges


  Weighted
Average Price


  Weighted
Average Expiration
Date in Years


2004

                     

Granted

   1,034,698    $ 23.16 to $33.02   $ 28.79    

Exercised

   597,118    $ 4.77 to $28.19   $ 17.11    

Cancelled and expired

   35,282    $ 15.41 to $30.22   $ 26.22    
    
                

Outstanding at end of year

   15,220    $ 6.49 to $  9.49   $ 8.04   2.06
     192,421    $ 9.50 to $13.49   $ 11.18   2.72
     831,162    $ 13.50 to $20.49   $ 15.91   5.13
     1,074,031    $ 20.50 to $30.49   $ 27.77   7.92
     8,744    $ 30.50 to $33.02   $ 32.94   5.81
    
                

Total outstanding at end of year

   2,121,578                 
    
                

Exercisable at end of year

   1,099,639    $ 6.49 to $30.49   $ 18.06    

Shares available for future grant

   5,381,491                 

2003

                     

Granted

   158,244    $ 19.46 to $27.29   $ 23.51    

Exercised

   584,432    $ 3.71 to $20.54   $ 14.17    

Cancelled and expired

   20,735    $ 14.93 to $19.31   $ 15.50    
    
                

Outstanding at end of year

   6,124    $ 4.77 to $  7.02   $ 5.65   1.53
     14,211    $ 7.03 to $10.02   $ 8.48   3.30
     369,972    $ 10.03 to $15.27   $ 12.66   2.71
     1,218,850    $ 15.28 to $22.77   $ 16.47   5.06
     110,123    $ 22.78 to $27.29   $ 24.62   4.08
    
                

Total outstanding at end of year

   1,719,280                 
    
                

Exercisable at end of year

   1,158,241    $ 4.77 to $23.52   $ 15.20    

2002

                     

Granted

   923,253    $ 15.41 to $21.08   $ 16.13    

Exercised

   553,825    $ 3.88 to $23.46   $ 13.76    

Cancelled and expired

   19,855    $ 9.60 to $22.49   $ 19.58    
    
                

Outstanding at end of year

   5,864    $ 3.71 to $  5.21   $ 4.40   1.59
     128,188    $ 5.22 to $  7.46   $ 7.11   3.86
     99,841    $ 7.47 to $10.46   $ 10.23   4.85
     363,719    $ 10.47 to $14.96   $ 13.31   2.68
     1,568,591    $ 14.97 to $21.08   $ 16.40   5.50
    
                

Total outstanding at end of year

   2,166,203                 
    
                

Exercisable at end of year

   1,417,849    $ 3.71 to $21.08   $ 15.11    

 

122


Table of Contents

GAAP requires the Company to disclose, separately for compensation plans approved by shareholders and plans not approved by shareholders, the number of shares to be issued upon exercise of outstanding options, the weighted average price of these outstanding options, and the number of shares remaining available for future issuance. The following table provides this disclosure. All equity compensation plans have been approved by shareholders.

 

Plan category


   Number of
securities to be issued
upon exercise of
outstanding options,
warrants and rights
(a)


   Weighted-average
exercise price of
outstanding options,
warrants and rights
(b)


   Number of
securities remaining
available for future
issuance under equity
compensation plans
(excluding securities
reflected in column (a))
(c)


Equity compensation plans approved by security holders

   2,121,578    $ 21.50    5,381,491

Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders

          

Total

   2,121,578    $ 21.50    5,381,491

 

19.    DIVIDENDS DECLARED

 

The Company declares cash dividends to its shareholders each quarter. Its policy is to declare and pay dividends of between 35% and 40% of its net income to shareholders. During 2003, the Company increased the amount of dividends paid to $0.16 per share per quarter and during 2004, the Company increased the amount of dividends paid to $0.18 per share per quarter.

 

20.    REGULATORY CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS

 

The Company and PCBNA are subject to various regulatory capital requirements administered by the Federal banking agencies. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements as specified by the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action could cause the regulators to initiate certain mandatory or discretionary actions that, if undertaken, could have a direct material effect on the Company’s financial statements.

 

The table below sets forth the actual capital amounts and ratios for the Company as of December 31, 2004 and 2003. It also shows the minimum amounts and ratios that it must maintain under the regulatory requirements to meet the standard of “adequately capitalized” and the minimum amounts and ratios required to meet the regulatory standards of “well capitalized.”

 

123


Table of Contents

For the Company, Tier I capital consists of common stock, surplus, and retained earnings. Tier II capital includes a portion of the allowance for credit losses and the subordinated debt mentioned in Note 13. Risk-weighted assets are computed by applying a weighting factor from 0% to 100% to the carrying amount of the assets as reported in the balance sheet and to a portion of off-balance sheet items such as loan commitments and letters of credit. The definitions and weighting factors are all contained in the regulations. However, the capital amounts and classifications are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings, and other factors.

 

(dollars in thousands)    Pacific Capital
Bancorp Actual


   Minimums for
Capital
Adequacy
Purposes


   Minimums to be
Well-Capitalized



   Amount

   Ratio

   Amount

   Ratio

   Amount

   Ratio

As of December 31, 2004

                                   

Total Tier I & Tier II Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)

   $ 543,696    12.1%    $ 359,472    8.0%    $ 449,341    10.0%

Tier I Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)

   $ 367,487    8.2%    $ 179,736    4.0%    $ 269,604    6.0%

Tier I Capital (to Average Tangible Assets)

   $ 367,487    6.3%    $ 232,108    4.0%    $ 290,135    5.0%

Risk Weighted Assets

   $ 4,493,406                             

Average Tangible Assets

   $ 5,802,708                             

As of December 31, 2003

                                   

Total Tier I & Tier II Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)

   $ 468,851    13.3%    $ 281,730    8.0%    $ 352,162    10.0%

Tier I Capital (to Risk Weighted Assets)

   $ 353,714    10.0%    $ 140,865    4.0%    $ 211,297    6.0%

Tier I Capital (to Average Tangible Assets)

   $ 353,714    7.4%    $ 190,000    4.0%    $ 237,500    5.0%

Risk Weighted Assets

   $ 3,521,619                             

Average Tangible Assets

   $ 4,749,992                             

 

As of December 31, 2004, both PCBNA and the Company met the requirements as well capitalized under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action. To be categorized as well capitalized, an institution must maintain minimum total risk-based, Tier 1 risk-based and Tier 1 leverage ratios as set forth in the above table.

 

The following table shows the three capital ratios for PCBNA at December 31, 2004 and 2003. There are no conditions or events since December 31, 2004 that Management believes have changed or will change PCBNA’s category for other than temporary conditions related to the RAL program.

 

As of December 31,


   Total Tier I
and Tier II
Capital to
Risk Weighted
Assets


   Tier I
Capital to
Risk Weighted
Assets


   Tier I
Capital to
Average
Tangible
Assets


2004

   12.50%    8.57%    6.64%

2003

   13.31%    10.04%    7.45%

 

Bancorp is the parent company and sole owner of PCBNA. However, there are legal limitations on the amount of dividends which may be paid by PCBNA to Bancorp. The amounts which may be paid as dividends by a bank are determined based on the bank’s capital accounts and earnings in prior years. As of December 31, 2004, PCBNA would have been permitted to pay up to $159.0 million to Bancorp.

 

124


Table of Contents

21.    NONINTEREST REVENUE

 

The major grouping of noninterest revenue on the consolidated income statements includes several specific items: service charges on deposits accounts, trust fees, refund transfer fees, gains on sale of tax refund loans, and gain or loss on sales and calls of securities.

 

The refund transfer fees are earned from the companion program of the Company’s refund loan program described in Note 6. When customers do not choose or do not qualify for the loan product, they may still benefit from an expedited payment of their income tax refund. After receiving the customer’s refund from the IRS, the Company either authorizes the tax preparer to provide a check directly to the customer or the Company deposits the check in the customer’s account. There is no loan involved with this product, and consequently the income is not classified as interest income.

 

The Company recorded a net gain on sale of tax refund loans of $2.9 million in 2004 and $8.0 million in 2003. These gains relate to the sale of RALs through the securitization vehicle discussed in Note 10.

 

Noninterest revenue also includes several general categories: other service charges, commissions, and fees and other income. Other service charges, commissions, and fees include a variety of revenues earned by providing services to customers.

 

(in thousands)    December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Included in other service charges, commissions and fees:

                        

Merchant bankcard fees

   $ 1,182     $ 1,027     $ 936  

Standby letter of credit fees

     1,288       556       642  

Real estate loan broker fees

     1,460       2,700       2,501  

Debit card fees

     2,318       1,495       1,768  

Collection fees

     4,781       4,244       2,563  

Included in other income:

                        

Loss on tax credit investments

   $ (3,644 )   $ (1,513 )   $ (911 )

Interest/dividends on other securities

     2,100       1,268       1,050  

Gain on SBA loans

     2,069       415       110  

Gain on sale of residential real estate loans

     263       1,424       1,855  

 

The CRA qualified investment losses result from the Company’s investments in limited partnerships that are set up to build or renovate low-income housing. Given the generally higher income demographics in the Company’s market areas, the Company does not have many opportunities to make the direct investments in low-income housing that are required for the Company to comply with the provisions of the Community Reinvestment Act. These partnerships operate at a loss but generate Federal and state income tax credits in excess of the after-tax impact of the losses. Note 27 describes an adjustment for the cumulative amount of losses from prior periods that was recognized in the fourth quarter of 2004.

 

The interest/dividends on other securities represent the income from the FHLB and FRB stock held by the Company.

 

125


Table of Contents

22.    OTHER OPERATING EXPENSE

 

The table below discloses the largest items included in other operating expense. Consultant expense include the Company’s independent accountants, attorneys, and other management consultants used for special projects.

 

(in thousands)    December 31,


   2004

   2003

   2002

Noninterest expense

                    

Software expense

   $ 9,814    $ 8,205    $ 5,875

Consultants—other

     4,731      4,600      2,836

Consultants—accounting

     3,872      2,214      921

Telephone—voice

     2,870      2,628      2,854

Postage and freight

     2,251      1,957      1,727

Developers performance fees

     2,233      2,413      2,085

Off-balance sheet contingency loss

     50      4,624      2,144

Workers compensation insurance

     1,667      1,895      918

 

23.    DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS

 

The Company has established policies and procedures to permit limited use of off-balance sheet derivatives to help manage interest rate risk.

 

Interest Rate Swaps to Manage the Company’s Interest Rate Risk

 

At various times beginning in 1999, the Company has entered into several interest rate swaps to mitigate interest rate risk. Under the terms of these swaps, the Company pays a fixed rate of interest to the counterparty and receives a floating rate of interest. Such swaps have the effect of converting fixed rate financial instruments into variable or floating rate instruments. Such swaps may be related to specific instruments or specifically specified pools of instruments—loans, securities, or deposits with similar interest rate characteristics or terms. Other types of derivatives are permitted by the Company’s policies, but have not been utilized.

 

There was one such swap in place at the end of 2004. The notional amount of this hedge at December 31, 2004 was $9.6 million with a fair value loss of approximately $30,000. This swap agreement expires in February of 2005.

 

Matching Interest Rate Swaps with Customers

 

The Company has entered into interest rate swaps with some of its customers to assist them in managing their interest rate risks. As of December 31, 2004, there were swaps with a notional amount of $61.0 million. To avoid increasing its own interest rate risk by entering into these swap agreements, the Company enters into offsetting swap agreements with other larger financial institutions. The effect of the offsetting swaps to the Company is to neutralize its position. A fee is charged to the Company’s customer that is in excess of the fee paid by the Company to the other financial institution.

 

24.    GUARANTEES

 

Guarantees include contracts that obligate the guarantor to pay the guaranteed party because of: (1) changes in a specified interest rate, security price, commodity price, or other variable that relate to an asset, liability, or equity security of the guaranteed party; or (2) a third party’s failure to perform on an obligation to the guaranteed party. The Company has determined that its standby letters of credit and financial guarantees are guarantees within this definition.

 

126


Table of Contents

Standby letters of credit and financial guarantees are conditional commitments issued by the Company to guarantee the performance of a customer to a third party in borrowing arrangements. At December 31, 2004, the maximum undiscounted future payments that the Company could be required to make was $102.6 million. Approximately 85% of these arrangements mature within one year. The Company generally has recourse to recover from the customer any amounts paid under these guarantees. Most of the guarantees are fully collateralized by the same types of assets used as loan collateral, however several are unsecured. The Company has a $360,000 liability recorded that is associated with the fair market value of the guarantees at December 31, 2004. As indicated in Note 17, as of December 31, 2004, the Company had established a contingency loss reserve for letters of credit of $1.2 million.

 

25.    DISCLOSURES ABOUT FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

 

GAAP requires companies to disclose the fair value of those financial instruments for which it is practicable to estimate that value and the methods and significant assumptions used to estimate those fair values. This must be done irrespective of whether or not the instruments are recognized on the balance sheets of the Company.

 

There are several factors that users of these financial statements should keep in mind regarding the fair values disclosed in this note. First, there are uncertainties inherent in the process of estimating the fair value of certain financial instruments. Second, the Company must exclude from its estimate of the fair value of deposit liabilities any consideration of its on-going customer relationships that provide stable sources of investable funds.

 

The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of each class of financial instruments for which it is practicable to estimate that value:

 

Cash and Cash Equivalents

 

The face value of cash, Federal funds sold, and securities purchased under agreements to resell are their fair value.

 

Securities and Money Market Instruments

 

For securities and commercial paper, fair value equals quoted market price, if available. If a quoted market price is not available, fair value is estimated using quoted market prices for similar securities. As explained in Note 1, because all securities are classified as available-for-sale, they are all carried at fair value.

 

Loans

 

The fair value of loans is estimated by discounting the future contractual cash flows using the current rates at which similar loans would be made to borrowers with similar credit ratings and for the same remaining maturities. These contractual cash flows are adjusted to reflect estimates of uncollectible amounts.

 

Mortgage Servicing Rights

 

Mortgage servicing rights are carried at the lower of cost or estimated fair value.

 

Deposit Liabilities

 

The fair value of demand deposits, money market accounts, and savings accounts is the amount payable on demand as of December 31 of each year. The fair value of fixed-maturity certificates of deposit is estimated using the rates currently offered for deposits of similar remaining maturities.

 

Long-term Debt and FHLB Advances

 

For FHLB advances, the fair value is estimated using rates currently quoted by the FHLB for advances of similar remaining maturities. For the senior and subordinated debt issues, the fair value is estimated using approximately the same interest rate spread to treasury securities of comparable term as the notes had when issued.

 

127


Table of Contents

Repurchase Agreements, Federal Funds Purchased, and Treasury Tax and Loan

 

For Federal funds purchased and treasury tax and loan instruments, the carrying amount is a reasonable estimate of their fair value. The fair value of repurchase agreements is determined by reference to rates in the wholesale repurchase market. The rates paid to the Companies customers are slightly lower than rates in the wholesale market and, consequently, the fair value will generally be less than the carrying amount.

 

Derivatives

 

Fair values for derivative financial instruments are based upon quoted market prices where available, except in the case of certain options and swaps where pricing models are used.

 

Financial Guarantees, Commitments, and Other Off-balance-sheet Instruments

 

The fair value of guarantees and letters of credit is based on fees currently charged for similar agreements. The Company does not believe that its loan commitments have a fair value within the context of this note because generally fees have not been charged, the use of the commitment is at the option of the potential borrower, the commitments are being written at rates comparable to current market rates, and the committed rate floats to an index that makes the eventual borrowing rate comparable to then current market rates.

 

Fair values for off-balance-sheet, credit related financial instruments are based on fees currently charged to enter into similar agreements, taking into account the remaining terms of the agreements and the counterparties’ credit standing.

 

The fair value of these instruments is immaterial and consequently they are omitted from the table.

 

The carrying amount and estimated fair values of the Company’s financial instruments as of December 31, 2004 and 2003 are as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)    As of December 31,
2004


   As of December 31,
2003



   Carrying
Amount


  

Fair

Value


   Carrying
Amount


  

Fair

Value


Financial assets:

                           

Cash and due from banks

   $ 133,116    $ 133,116    $ 150,010    $ 150,010

Federal funds sold

               33,010      33,010

Securities available-for-sale

     1,524,874      1,524,874      1,317,962      1,317,962

Net loans

     4,008,317      3,969,200      3,131,329      3,185,813

Mortgage servicing rights

     1,679      1,679      537      537

Derivatives

     501      501      1,436      1,436

  

  

  

  

Total financial assets

     5,668,487      5,629,370      4,634,284      4,688,768

  

  

  

  

Financial liabilities:

                           

Deposits

     4,512,290      4,508,135      3,854,717      3,861,008

Long-term debt, FHLB advances, and capital lease obligations

     817,364      807,081      491,100      502,822

Repurchase agreements,

                           

Federal funds purchased, and

                           

Treasury, Tax & Loan

     193,929      193,927      66,787      66,784

Derivatives

     531      531      2,334      2,334

  

  

  

  

Total financial liabilities

     5,524,114      5,509,674      4,414,938      4,432,948

  

  

  

  

Net financial assets

   $ 144,373    $ 119,696    $ 219,346    $ 255,820

  

  

  

  

 

128


Table of Contents

26.    SEGMENT REPORTING

 

While the Company’s products and services are all of the nature of commercial banking, the Company has six reportable segments. There are five specific segments: Community Banking, Commercial Banking, Tax Refund Programs, Fiduciary, and Pacific Capital. The remaining activities of the Company are reported in a segment titled “All Other.”

 

Factors Used to Identify Reportable Segments

 

The Company uses a combination of internal reporting, products, services provided, and customers served to determine its reportable segments. The segments also reflect the specific management structure in which loan and deposit products are handled by different organizational units.

 

Types of Customers and Services from Which Revenues are Derived

 

Community Banking:  Business units in this segment engage in small business lending (including Small Business Administration guaranteed loans) and leasing, consumer installment loans, home equity lines, and 1-4 family residential mortgages. The segment also includes all of the activities carried out in the Company’s branches. In addition to deposit-related services, these include safe deposit box rentals, foreign exchange, electronic fund transfers, and other ancillary services to businesses and individuals.

 

Commercial Banking:  Business units in this segment make loans to medium-sized businesses and their owners. Loans are made for the purchase of business assets, working capital lines, investment, and the development and construction of nonresidential or multi-family residential property. Letters of credit are also offered to customers both to facilitate commercial transactions and as performance bonds.

 

Fiduciary:  This segment provides trust and investment services to its customers. The Trust and Investment Services Division may act as both custodian and manager of trust accounts as directed by the client. In addition to securities and other liquid assets, the division manages real estate held in trust. The division also sells third-party mutual funds and annuities to customers.

 

Refund Programs:  The loan products provided in this segment are described in Note 6. The other product, refund transfers, consists of receipt of tax refunds from the Internal Revenue Service on behalf of individual taxpayers and authorizing the local issuance of checks to the taxpayers so that they do not need a mailing address or to wait for the refund check to be mailed to them. Both of these businesses relate to the filing of income tax returns and consequently are highly seasonal. Approximately 90% of the activity occurs in the first quarter of each year.

 

Pacific Capital:  In connection with the March 5, 2004 PCCI acquisition, the operations of the three branch offices acquired were included in the “Community Banking” segment along with the other branch activities of the Company. During 2004, the operations of PCCI’s commercial real estate and SBA lending areas reported to the former CEO of PCCI, who reported to the CEO of the Company and, consequently, they have been identified as a reportable segment.

 

All Other:  This segment consists of other business lines and support units. The administrative support units include the Company’s executive administration, data processing, marketing, credit administration, human resources, legal and benefits, treasury, and finance and accounting. The primary revenues are from PCBNA’s securities portfolios.

 

Change to the Reportable Segments

 

There were no changes in reportable segments from 2002 to 2003. The only changes from 2003 to 2004, as mentioned above, are the addition of Pacific Capital lending units as a separate segment and the inclusion of the three former PCCI branch offices in the Community Banking segment.

 

Charges and Credits for Funds and Income from the Investment Portfolios

 

As noted above, loans and deposits are handled by staff in different business units. Loans are handled by staff in both the Community Banking and Commercial Banking segments. Without recognizing the cost lending units would have to pay for the funds they lend if they were not part of

 

129


Table of Contents

a depository institution and the value of deposits gathered at less than the rates paid for borrowed funds, it would appear that the lending units were all profitable because they had only interest income while the deposit units had only interest expense. Deposit servicing is primarily the responsibility of the customer service staff in the Community Banking segment. To give a fair picture of profitability at the segment level, it is therefore necessary to charge the lending units for the cost of the funds they use while crediting the branch units in the Community Banking segment for the funds they provide.

 

Included within the All Other segment is the Treasury Department that manages the securities portfolios and borrowing funds as needed to supplement deposit growth and manage interest rate risk. The securities portfolios provide liquidity to the Company and earn income from funds received from depositors that are in excess of the amounts lent to borrowers. In other words, while some of the funds borrowed by Treasury are used within the segment to purchase securities, they are also used in the lending segments to fund loans. The interest rates applicable to securities are lower than for loans because there is little or no credit risk. Foregoing the higher rates earned by loans is, in a sense, a cost of maintaining the necessary liquidity, and may be an opportunity cost for being unable to generate sufficient loans to make full use of the available funds. However, there is no one lending unit to which it is appropriate to charge the liquidity and opportunity costs related to the investment portfolios. Instead, each segment that uses funds through lending or investing is charged for its funds at the same rates based solely on the maturity terms or repricing characteristics of the assets funded. The Community Banking and All Other segments are credited for the funds they provide based on the maturity term or repricing characteristics of those funds.

 

To better measure the profitability of the consumer lending and treasury activities and to reflect that the funds used and provided are not of the same maturity, the charges and credits for funds within the Community Banking and All Other segments are not netted.

 

Measure of Profit or Loss

 

In assessing the performance of each segment, the chief executive officer reviews the segment’s contribution before tax. Taxes are excluded because the Company has permanent tax differences (see Note 15) that do not apply equally to all segments. In addition, if segments were measured by their net-of-tax contribution, they would be advantaged or disadvantaged by any enacted changes in tax rates even though such changes are not reflective of the performance of the segments.

 

Interest Income and Revenues from External Customers

 

In the All Other segment, interest income exceeds revenues from external customers. This occurs because there are a number of negative amounts, specifically losses on securities and the tax credit partnerships, that originate with external customers that offset the interest income received from other external customers.

 

130


Table of Contents

Specific Segment Disclosure

 

The following table presents information for each specific segment regarding assets, profit or loss, and specific items of revenue and expense that are included in that measure of segment profit or loss as reviewed by the chief executive officer. Also included is the sum of the other operating and support units in the All Other column.

 

(dollars in thousands)


   Community
Banking


   Commercial
Banking


   Refund
Programs


   Fiduciary

   Pacific
Capital*


   All Other

    Total

Twelve months ended December 31, 2004

                                                 

Revenues from external customers

   $ 130,358    $ 97,393    $ 65,541    $ 15,665    $ 25,734    $ 73,472     $ 408,163

Intersegment revenues

     101,443           4,704      1,519           19,541       127,207

  

  

  

  

  

  


 

Total revenues

   $ 231,801    $ 97,393    $ 70,245    $ 17,184    $ 25,734    $ 93,013     $ 535,370

  

  

  

  

  

  


 

Profit (Loss)

   $ 115,512    $ 66,780    $ 45,548    $ 10,643    $ 6,103    $ (98,349 )   $ 146,237

Interest income

     101,872      94,871      36,674           23,906      75,205       332,528

Interest expense

     33,512           1,119      369      40      34,171       69,211

Internal charge for funds

     33,283      23,248           9      9,703      60,964       127,207

Depreciation

     4,174      149      731      76      24      5,428       10,582

Total assets

     1,824,744      1,695,544      133,511      2,199      439,781      1,929,006       6,024,785

Capital expenditures

                              25,362       25,362

   Community
Banking


   Commercial
Banking


   Refund
Programs


   Fiduciary

   Pacific
Capital*


   All Other

    Total

Twelve months ended December 31, 2003

                                                 

Revenues from external customers

   $ 124,152    $ 96,544    $ 64,117    $ 14,682    $    $ 61,018     $ 360,513

Intersegment revenues

     70,850           1,824      1,416           34,380       108,470

  

  

  

  

  

  


 

Total revenues

   $ 195,002    $ 96,544    $ 65,941    $ 16,098    $    $ 95,398     $ 468,983

  

  

  

  

  

  


 

Profit (Loss)

   $ 87,744    $ 60,221    $ 40,440    $ 9,540    $    $ (73,353 )   $ 124,592

Interest income

     95,875      94,559      31,984                56,350       278,768

Interest expense

     31,997           814      467           20,655       53,933

Internal charge for funds

     30,788      27,650      2,684      10           47,338       108,470

Depreciation

     3,665      169      547      106           5,433       9,920

Total assets

     1,529,344      1,595,788      24,008      1,206           1,709,284       4,859,630

Capital expenditures

                              15,662       15,662

   Community
Banking


   Commercial
Banking


   Refund
Programs


   Fiduciary

   Pacific
Capital*


   All Other

    Total

Twelve months ended December 31, 2002

                                                 

Revenues from external customers

   $ 120,509    $ 107,089    $ 48,845    $ 13,660    $    $ 57,081     $ 347,184

Intersegment revenues

     98,709           4,046      2,020           36,798       141,573

  

  

  

  

  

  


 

Total revenues

   $ 219,218    $ 107,089    $ 52,891    $ 15,680    $    $ 93,879     $ 488,757

  

  

  

  

  

  


 

Profit (Loss)

   $ 64,672    $ 61,138    $ 35,391    $ 9,571    $    $ (49,402 )   $ 121,370

Interest income

     96,027      105,284      19,846                52,243       273,400

Interest expense

     42,661           1,604      934           17,600       62,799

Internal charge for funds

     49,033      38,146      2,648      14           51,732       141,573

Depreciation

     4,084      213      511      267           4,610       9,685

Total assets

     1,419,320      1,572,506      18,935      980           1,207,472       4,219,213

Capital expenditures

                              12,952       12,952

 

*As explained in the text, this segment represents the lending areas for the former PCCI, not Pacific Capital Bancorp, the holding company.

 

131


Table of Contents

The following table reconciles total revenues and profit for the segments to total revenues and pre-tax income, respectively, in the Consolidated Financial Statements. For purposes of performance measurement and therefore for the segment disclosure above, income from tax-exempt securities, loans, and leases is reported on a fully taxable equivalent basis. Under this method of disclosure, the income disclosed is increased to that amount which, if taxed, would result in the amount included in the financial statements. While useful to management, this increase to recognize the tax-exempt nature of these instruments is not in accordance with GAAP. Consequently, the table below includes the tax equivalent adjustment as a reconciling item between total revenues and pre-tax profit or loss for the segments and the corresponding amounts reported in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

 

(dollars in thousands)    Twelve months ended December 31,  

   2004

     2003

     2002

 

Total revenues for reportable segments

   $ 535,370      $ 468,983      $ 488,757  

Elimination of intersegment revenues

     (127,207 )      (108,470 )      (141,573 )

Elimination of taxable equivalent adjustment

     (6,347 )      (6,579 )      (6,654 )

  


  


  


Total consolidated revenues

   $ 401,816      $ 353,934      $ 340,530  

  


  


  


Total profit or loss for reportable segments

   $ 146,237      $ 124,592      $ 121,370  

Elimination of taxable equivalent adjustment

     (6,347 )      (6,579 )      (6,654 )

  


  


  


Income before income taxes

   $ 139,890      $ 118,013      $ 114,716  

  


  


  


 

With respect to the disclosure of total assets for the individual segments, fixed assets used by the other segments are all nonetheless recorded as assets of the All Other segment that manages most of them. Depreciation expense of these assets is charged to the segment that uses them.

 

The Company has no operations in foreign countries to require disclosure by geographical area. The Company has no single customer generating 10% or more of total revenues.

 

For the Company, the process of disaggregating its businesses into these segments is somewhat arbitrary. Many of the Company’s customers do business with more than one segment. In these cases, the Company may use relationship pricing, whereby customers may be given a favorable price on one product because the other products they use are very profitable for the Company. To the extent that these products are in different segments as defined above, one segment may be sacrificing profitability to another for the sake of the overall customer relationship.

 

27.    FOURTH QUARTER 2004 ADJUSTMENTS

 

The Company identified three accounting errors that it corrected in the fourth quarter of 2004. These errors are described in the succeeding paragraphs. The portions of these adjustments that related to any prior period financial statements were immaterial.

 

On February 7, 2005, the Chief Accountant of the SEC sent a letter to the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants calling attention to several issues in the accounting for leases. One of the issues is the requirement to recognize minimum or fixed rent increases on a straight-line basis. When the Company reviewed its lease accounting in response to the letter, it discovered that it had not followed the straight-line recognition in all cases. The Company determined that it had under-recognized lease expense over the terms of these leases going back as far as 1993 by a cumulative amount of $885,000.

 

During the fourth quarter of 2004, the Company recognized that it had not posted all of the losses on its low income housing tax credit partnerships. The cumulative amount of the unrecognized losses was $1.4 million. Most of this amount relates to the years prior to 2002 and in no case would adjustment for any prior period financial statements be material.

 

During the fourth quarter of 2004, the Company recognized $1.4 million in stay pay bonuses, of which $980,000 was attributable to prior quarters in 2004. Adjustment to the financial statements for these prior quarters is not material.

 

132


Table of Contents

These adjustments had an impact on net income for the fourth quarter of 2004 of $2.2 million or 5¢ per diluted share. For the year 2004, the impact on net income was $1.3 million or 3¢ per diluted share.

 

28.    SUBSEQUENT EVENT

 

On February 28, 2005, the Company and First Bancshares, Inc. of San Luis Obispo (“FSLO”) jointly announced that the Company would be acquiring all of the outstanding stock of FSLO for approximately $60.8 million in cash. They announced that the acquisition was subject to various regulatory approvals and FSLO shareholder approval. The transaction is expected to close in July 2005. No balances or results of operations of FSLO are included in the consolidated financial statements of the Company as of or for the year ended December 31, 2004. The Company incurred immaterial expenses in 2004 in connection with the consideration and execution of this business combination.

 

29.    PACIFIC CAPITAL BANCORP

 

The condensed financial statements of the Bancorp are presented on the following two pages.

 

PACIFIC CAPITAL BANCORP

(Parent Company Only)

Balance Sheets

(in thousands)

 

     December 31,

   2004

   2003

Assets

             

Cash

   $ 2,549    $ 3,261

Investment in and advances to subsidiaries

     506,772      425,540

Loans, net

          26

Premises and equipment, net

     747      2,485

Other assets

     28,921      14,655

  

  

Total assets

   $ 538,989    $ 445,967

  

  

Liabilities

             

Senior debentures

   $ 68,091    $ 40,000

Other liabilities

     11,216      6,919

  

  

Total liabilities

     79,307      46,919

  

  

Equity

             

Common stock

     11,434      8,494

Surplus

     78,903      72,916

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     7,970      12,807

Retained earnings

     361,375      304,831

  

  

Total shareholders’ equity

     459,682      399,048

  

  

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

   $ 538,989    $ 445,967

  

  

 

133


Table of Contents

PACIFIC CAPITAL BANCORP

(Parent Company Only)

Income Statements

(in thousands)

 

     Years Ended December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Equity in earnings of subsidiaries:

                        

Undistributed

   $ 73,060     $ 48,244     $ 40,870  

Dividends

     17,500       29,000       33,500  

Interest income

     (2 )     —         241  

Interest expense

     (4,368 )     (3,016 )     (2,990 )

Other income

     134       35       43  

Other operating expense

     (1,288 )     (705 )     1,816  

Income tax benefit

     2,908       2,113       1,371  

  


 


 


Net income

   $ 87,944     $ 75,671     $ 74,851  

  


 


 


 

134


Table of Contents

PACIFIC CAPITAL BANCORP

(Parent Company Only)

Statements of Cash Flows

(in thousands)

 

     Years Ended December 31,  

   2004

    2003

    2002

 

Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents:

                        

Cash flows from operating activities:

                        

Net income

   $ 87,944     $ 75,671     $ 74,851  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash used in operations:

                        

Equity in undistributed net income of subsidiaries

     (90,560 )     (77,244 )     (74,370 )

Additional investment in subsidiary

     (13,008 )            

Depreciation expense

     58       126       1,421  

(Increase) decrease in other assets

     (14,267 )     (3,390 )     12,892  

Increase (decrease) in other liabilities

     4,297       231       (11,240 )

  


 


 


Net cash used in operating activities

     (25,536 )     (4,606 )     3,554  

  


 


 


Cash flows from investing activities:

                        

Net increase (decrease) in securities purchased under agreements to resell

                 14,500  

Net decrease (increase) in loans

     26       55       153  

Capital expenditures

     1,680       2,172       8,614  

Distributed earnings of subsidiaries

     17,500       29,000       33,500  

  


 


 


Net cash provided by investing activities

     19,206       31,227       56,767  

  


 


 


Cash flows from financing activities:

                        

Proceeds from other borrowing

     28,091              

Proceeds from issuance of common stock

     8,927       6,663       5,511  

Payments to retire common stock

           (28,208 )     (18,222 )

Dividends paid

     (31,400 )     (27,399 )     (23,707 )

  


 


 


Net cash used in financing activities

     5,618       (48,944 )     (36,418 )

  


 


 


Net (decrease) increase in cash and cash equivalents

     (712 )     (22,323 )     23,903  

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

     3,261       25,584       1,681  

  


 


 


Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

   $ 2,549     $ 3,261     $ 25,584  

  


 


 


 

Supplemental disclosures: none

 

135


Table of Contents

QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (UNAUDITED)

 

(amounts in thousands
except per share amounts)
  2004 Quarters

  2003 Quarters


  4th

  3rd

  2nd

  1st

  4th

  3rd

  2nd

  1st

Interest income

  $ 77,404   $ 76,583   $ 71,429   $ 100,765   $ 62,558   $ 59,951   $ 60,432   $ 89,248

Interest expense

    19,894     18,424     15,996     14,897     13,183     13,038     13,482     14,230

Net interest income

    57,510     58,159     55,433     85,868     49,375     46,913     46,950     75,018

Provision for credit losses

    1,748     2,740     737     7,584     1,381     2,653     2,635     11,617

Noninterest revenue

    12,393     11,241     15,380     36,621     12,666     13,626     15,137     38,852

Operating expense

    45,398     43,349     44,043     47,116     41,674     37,618     38,499     44,447

Income before income taxes

    22,757     23,311     26,033     67,789     18,986     20,268     20,953     57,806

Income taxes

    8,510     8,752     9,486     25,198     6,389     7,011     7,554     21,388

Net Income

  $ 14,247   $ 14,559   $ 16,547   $ 42,591   $ 12,597   $ 13,257   $ 13,399   $ 36,418

Net earnings per share:

                                               

Basic

  $ 0.31   $ 0.32   $ 0.36   $ 0.94   $ 0.28   $ 0.29   $ 0.29   $ 0.80

Diluted

  $ 0.31   $ 0.32   $ 0.36   $ 0.93   $ 0.28   $ 0.29   $ 0.29   $ 0.79

 

ITEM 9.    CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

 

There were no disagreements with accountants on accounting and financial disclosure.

 

ITEM 9A.    CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

 

Disclosure controls and procedures are the controls and other procedures that are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports that the Company files or submits under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Exchange Act) is recorded, processed, summarized, and reported within the time periods specified in the Securities and Exchange Commission’s (SEC) rules and forms. Disclosure controls and procedures include, among other processes, controls and procedures designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports that the Company files or submits under the Exchange Act is accumulated and communicated to management, including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.

 

As of December 31, 2004 the Company carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and management, including the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer, of the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures pursuant to Exchange Act Rule 13a-15. Based upon that evaluation and as a result of the material weaknesses described below in Management’s Report on Internal Controls over Financial Reporting, the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have concluded that the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were not effective as of December 31, 2004.

 

MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

 

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting at the Company. Our internal control over financial reporting is a process designed under the supervision of the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of the Company’s financial statements for external reporting purposes in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that accurately and fairly reflect, in reasonable detail, transactions and dispositions of the company’s assets, (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit

 

136


Table of Contents

preparation of financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and that receipts and expenditures are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and the directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the company’s financial statements.

 

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

 

As of December 31, 2004, the Company carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of the Company’s management, including the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, of the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting pursuant to Rule 13a-15(c), as adopted by the SEC under the Exchange Act. In evaluating the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting, management used the framework established in “Internal Control—Integrated Framework,” issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

 

A material weakness is a control deficiency, or combination of control deficiencies, that results in more than a remote likelihood that a material misstatement of the annual or interim financial statements will not be prevented or detected. As of December 31, 2004, management identified the following material weaknesses:

 

1. As of December 31, 2004, the Company did not maintain effective controls over the application of generally accepted accounting principles for leasing transactions and other non-routine transactions. The misapplications of generally accepted accounting principles involved: (a) initially recording a capital lease as an operating lease; (b) failing to record rental expense using a level expense in those instances where the lease terms included specific rent increases or minimum increases; (c) failing to record losses from the low-income housing tax credit limited partnerships in the appropriate accounting period; and (d) errors in the accounting for the purchase of PCCI in March 2004 including errors in the accounting for stay-put bonuses. This control deficiency did not result in a misstatement of the 2004 annual or interim financial statements although it did result in adjustments to the 2004 consolidated financial statements. Additionally, this control deficiency could result in a material misstatement to leasing transactions or other non-routine transactions that could result in a material misstatement to the annual or interim consolidated statements that would not be prevented or detected. Accordingly, management has determined that this condition constitutes a material weakness.

 

2. As of December 31, 2004, the Company did not maintain effective controls over approval of general ledger journal entries. Specifically, the Company has an open general ledger system in which journal entries can be processed without appropriate approval. Additionally, reconciliations of the general ledger that would detect unauthorized journal entries were not performed for general ledger accounts relating to prepaid and other expenses, accounts payable, cash, federal funds sold and general and administrative expense at the end of the accounting period. Furthermore, documentation surrounding the monitoring of monthly operating results that would detect unauthorized journal entries was either not prepared or retained. These control deficiencies in the aggregate did not result in any misstatements in the 2004 annual or interim consolidated financial statements; however, they could result in a material misstatement to the annual or interim consolidated statements that would not be prevented or detected. Accordingly, management has determined that these deficiencies aggregate to a material weakness.

 

Because of these material weaknesses, management has concluded that the Company did not maintain effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, based upon the criteria described in “Internal Control—Integrated Framework,” issued by COSO.

 

Management excluded certain elements of internal control over financial reporting of Pacific Crest Capital, Inc. (PCCI) from its evaluation of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004 because PCCI was acquired by the Company in a purchase business combination during 2004. PCCI’s loans and fixed assets and net income represent $439.8 million and $6.1 million,

 

137


Table of Contents

respectively, of the Company’s related consolidated financial statement amounts as of and for the year ended December 31, 2004. PCCI’s investment portfolio was integrated with the Company’s investment portfolio at the time of the closing of the acquisition and was included in Management’s evaluation of internal controls.

 

Management’s assessment of the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, has been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm as stated in their report which is included under the heading “Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” in Item 8 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K on page 76.

 

REMEDIATION OF MATERIAL WEAKNESSES

 

Management continually evaluates the adequacy of its internal control over financial reporting and enhances its controls in response to internal control evaluations and internal and external audit and regulatory recommendations.

 

During the fourth quarter of 2004, the Company strengthened the procedures for reconciling subsidiary records to the general ledger. It also engaged an accounting firm to assist it in preparing the tax provision calculations reported in its consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, 2004 and tax asset and liability account balances as of December 31, 2004.

 

The accounting errors were all corrected in the fourth quarter of 2004.

 

Since December 31, 2004, management has taken extra steps to ensure that the financial statements included in the 10-K are fairly presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and to support its certifications in Exhibits 31.1, 31.2, and 32. These steps included after-the-fact preparation of reconciliations of all general ledger accounts for which reconciliations had not been performed at December 31, 2004. They also included review of all non-routine or complex transactions and transactions requiring significant accounting estimates or judgments that occurred during the year.

 

While performing these steps provided evidence to management that no material error occurred, they do not provide evidence that no material error could have occurred. With respect to the review and reconciliation of general ledger accounts, the after-the-fact re-performance of reconciliations was not part of the Company’s internal control process as of December 31, 2004 and consequently did not support the effectiveness of internal controls as of that date. With respect to the non-routine or complex transactions, by their nature these transactions are sporadic or infrequent and there were simply not enough such transactions that occurred late in the year to give management sufficient evidence that they would be handled correctly in all cases as of December 31, 2004. The Company’s inability to provide itself with the necessary evidence led management to determine that there was still a material weakness as of December 31, 2004.

 

Additional changes need to be made to address these material weaknesses. These will include additional requirements for the content and timing of reconciliations that are being implemented in the first quarter of 2005. With respect to non-routine or complex transactions, management is reviewing hiring additional employees with more banking and accounting experience. Management has also discussed with, and received approval from, the Audit Committee to engage accounting consultants when necessary to provide the necessary expertise until sufficient accounting expertise can be developed internally.

 

CHANGES IN INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

 

None.

 

138


Table of Contents

PART III

 

ITEM 10. DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE REGISTRANT

 

The information required by Item 10 is incorporated herein by reference to the sections titled “The Board of Directors” and “Executive Officers” in the Company’s definitive Proxy Statement for the annual meeting to be held May 24, 2005 that will be filed within 120 days following the fiscal year end December 31, 2003 (“Proxy Statement”).

 

ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

 

The information required by Item 11 is incorporated herein by reference to the section titled “Executive Compensation” in the Company’s Proxy Statement.

 

ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

 

The information required by Item 12 is incorporated herein by reference to the section titled “Beneficial Ownership Chart” in the Company’s Proxy Statement.

 

ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS

 

The information required by Item 13 is incorporated herein by reference to the section titled “Other Information” in the Company’s Proxy Statement.

 

ITEM 14. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

 

The information required by Item 14 is incorporated herein by reference to the section titled “Audit Committee Report” in the Company’s Proxy Statement.

 

139


Table of Contents

PART IV

 

ITEM 15. EXHIBITS, FINANCIAL STATEMENTS, AND REPORTS ON FORM 8-K

 

(a)1. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

   The listing of financial statements required by this item is set forth in the index for Item 8 of this report.

 

(a)2. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS SCHEDULES

 

   The listing of supplementary financial statement schedules required by this item is set forth in the index for Item 8 of this report.

 

(a)3. EXHIBITS

 

   The listing of exhibits required by this item is set forth in the Exhibit Index beginning on page 142 of this report. Each management contract or compensatory plan or arrangement required to be filed as an exhibit to this report is listed under Item 10.1 “Compensation Plans and Agreements,” in the Exhibit Index.

 

(b) REPORTS ON FORM 8-K

 

The following current reports on Form 8-K were filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission during the fourth quarter of 2004.

 

Subject         Filing Date
Item 1.01   

Entry into a Material Definitive Agreement

   October 25, 2004
    

Approval of an Amended and Restated Management Retention Plan.

Item 7.   

Financial Statements and Exhibits

   October 26, 2004
    

Press release announcing earnings for third quarter of 2004.

The following current reports on Form 8-K have been filed the Securities and Exchange
Commission to date during the first quarter of 2005.
Subject         Filing Date
Item 7.   

Financial Statements and Exhibits

   January 27, 2005
    

Press release announcing earnings for fourth quarter of 2004.

Item 1.01   

Entry into a Material Definitive Agreement

   February 2, 2005
     On January 27, 2005, the Company announced that its board of directors approved modifications to the compensation of nonemployee directors, effective February 1, 2005.
Item 7.01    Regulation FD Disclosure Announcement of Acquisition of First Bancshares, Inc.    February 28, 2005

 

(c) EXHIBITS

 

   See exhibits listed in “Exhibit Index” on page 142 of this report.

 

(d) FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES

 

   There are no financial statement schedules required by Regulation S-X that have been excluded from the annual report to shareholders.

 

140


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

 

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Company has duly caused this report to be signed by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

Pacific Capital Bancorp

 

By /s/ William S. Thomas. Jr.

  March 22, 2005          

William S. Thomas, Jr.

  Date          
President and Chief Executive Officer          
Director              

 

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Company and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

/s/ Edward E. Birch

   March 22, 2005    /s/ William S. Thomas, Jr.    March 22, 2005

Edward E. Birch

   Date    William S. Thomas, Jr.    Date
Chairman of the Board         President     
          Chief Executive Officer     
          (Principal Executive Officer)     

/s/ Richard M. Davis

   March 22, 2005    /s/ Richard S. Hambleton, Jr.    March 22, 2005

Richard M. Davis

   Date    Richard S. Hambleton, Jr.    Date

Director

        Director     

/s/ D. Vernon Horton

   March 22, 2005    /s/ Roger C. Knopf    March 22, 2005

D. Vernon Horton

   Date    Roger C. Knopf    Date

Vice Chairman

        Director     

/s/ Robert W. Kummer, Jr.

   March 22, 2005    /s/ Donald Lafler    March 22, 2005

Robert W. Kummer, Jr.

   Date    Donald Lafler    Date

Director

        Executive Vice President     
          Chief Financial Officer     
          (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)

/s/ Clayton C. Larson

   March 22, 2005    /s/ John Mackall    March 22, 2005

Clayton C. Larson

   Date    John Mackall    Date

Vice Chairman

        Director     

/s/ Gerald T. McCullough

   March 22, 2005    /s/ Richard A. Nightingale    March 22, 2005

Gerald T. McCullough

   Date    Richard A. Nightingale    Date

Director

        Director     

/s/ Kathy J. Odell

   March 22, 2005          

Kathy J. Odell

   Date          

Director

              

 

141


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX TO PACIFIC CAPITAL BANCORP FORM 10-K FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2004

 

Exhibit

Number        Description *

 

3. Articles of Incorporation and Bylaws:

 

  3.1 Certificate of Restatement of Articles of Incorporation of Pacific Capital Bancorp dated January 27, 1999. (1)

 

  3.2 Certificate of Determination for the Series A Preferred Stock of Pacific Capital Bancorp (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3(b) to Pacific Capital Bancorp’s Registration Statement on Form S-4 (Registration No. 333-36298) filed May 4, 2000).

 

  3.3 Amended and Restated Bylaws of Pacific Capital Bancorp effective April 25, 2000. (4)

 

  3.4 Certificate of Amendment of Articles of Incorporation dated May 28, 1999. (5)

 

  3.5 Certificate of Amendment of Articles of Incorporation dated May 13, 2002. (6)

 

4. Instruments Defining the Rights of Security Holders, including indentures

 

  4.1 Amended and Restated Stockholders Rights Agreements, dated as of April 22, 2003, between Pacific Capital Bancorp and Mellon Investor Services LLC, as Rights Agent (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 to Pacific Capital Bancorp’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the First Quarter of 2003 filed on May 14, 2003).

 

Note: No long-term debt instruments issued by the Company or any of its consolidated subsidiaries exceeds 10% of the consolidated total assets of the Company and its subsidiaries. In accordance with paragraph 4(iii) of Item 601 of Regulation S-K, the Company will furnish to the Commission upon request copies of long-term debt instruments and related agreements.

 

10. Material contracts:

 

  10.1 Compensation Plans and Agreements:

 

  10.1.1 Pacific Capital Bancorp 2002 Stock Plan. **

 

  10.1.2 Pacific Capital Bancorp Directors Stock Option Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 to Post-Effective Amendment No. One to Santa Barbara Bancorp’s Registration Statement on Form S-8 (Registration No. 33-48724), filed on June 13, 1995).

 

  10.1.3 Pacific Capital Bancorp Incentive & Investment and Salary Savings Plan, as amended and restated effective January 1, 2001. **

 

  10.1.3.1 First Amendment to Pacific Capital Bancorp Amended and Restated Incentive and Investment and Salary Savings Plan. **

 

  10.1.3.2 Second Amendment to Pacific Capital Bancorp Amended and Restated Incentive and Investment and Salary Savings Plan. **

 

  10.1.3.3 Third Amendment to Pacific Capital Bancorp Amended and Restated Incentive and Investment and Salary Savings Plan. **

 

  10.1.3.4 Addendum Incorporating EGTRRA Compliance Amendment to Pacific Capital Bancorp Incentive and Investment and Salary Savings Plan. **

 

  10.1.4 Pacific Capital Bancorp Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust, as amended and restated effective January 1, 2001. **

 

  10.1.4.1 First Amendment to Pacific Capital Bancorp Amended and Restated Employee Stock Ownership Plan and Trust. **

 

  10.1.4.2 Addendum Incorporating EGTRRA Compliance Amendment to Pacific Capital Bancorp Employee Stock Ownership Plan.**

 

142


Table of Contents
  10.1.5 Pacific Capital Bancorp Amended and Restated Key Employee Retiree Health Plan dated December 30, 1998. **

 

  10.1.6 Pacific Capital Bancorp Amended and Restated Retiree Health Plan (Non Key Employees) dated December 30, 1998. **

 

  10.1.7 Trust Agreement of Santa Barbara Bank & Trust Voluntary Beneficiary Association. (3)

 

  10.1.7.1 First Amendment to Trust Agreement of Santa Barbara Bank & Trust Voluntary Beneficiary Association. (2)

 

  10.1.8 Pacific Capital Bancorp, Amended and Restated, 1996 Directors Stock Plan, as dated February 22, 2000 as amended July 21, 2004. **

 

  10.1.8.1 Pacific Capital Bancorp 1996 Directors Stock Option Agreement. **

 

  10.1.8.2 Pacific Capital Bancorp 1996 Directors Stock Option Agreement (Reload Option). **

 

  10.1.9 Pacific Capital Bancorp Directors’ Stock Option Plan and Form of Stock Option Agreement (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.25 to Pacific Capital Bancorp’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (File No. 0-13528) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 1991).

 

  10.1.10 Pacific Capital Bancorp 1984 Amended and Restated Stock Option Plan and Forms of Agreements as amended to date. **

 

  10.1.11 Pacific Capital Bancorp 1994 Stock Option Plan, as amended, and Forms of Incentive and Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreements. **

 

  10.1.12 Amended and Restated Pacific Capital Bancorp Management Retention Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Current Report on Form 8-K dated October 25, 2004).

 

  10.1.13 Pacific Capital Bancorp First Amended and Restated Deferred Compensation Plan dated October 1, 2000. **

 

  10.1.13.1 First Amended and Restated Trust Agreement under Pacific Capital Bancorp Deferred Compensation Plan dated October 1, 2000. **

 

21. Subsidiaries of the registrant **

 

23. Consents of Experts and Counsel

 

  23.1 Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP with respect to financial statements of the Registrant **

 

31. Certifications pursuant to Section 302 of Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002**

 

  31.1 Certification of William S. Thomas, Jr.

 

  31.2 Certification of Donald Lafler

 

32. Certification pursuant to Section 906 of Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002**

 

Shareholders may obtain a copy of any exhibit by writing to:

 

Carol Kelleher, Corporate Secretary

Pacific Capital Bancorp

P.O. Box 60839

Santa Barbara, CA 93160

 

143


Table of Contents
* Effective December 30, 1998, Santa Barbara Bancorp and Pacific Capital Bancorp merged and, contemporaneously with effectiveness of the merger, Santa Barbara Bancorp, the surviving entity, changed its corporate name to Pacific Capital Bancorp. Documents identified as filed by Santa Barbara Bancorp prior to December 30, 1998 were filed by Santa Barbara Bancorp (File 0-11113). Documents identified as filed by Pacific Capital Bancorp prior to December 30, 1998 were filed by Pacific Capital Bancorp as it existed prior to the merger (File No. 0-13528).

 

** Filed herewith.

 

The Exhibits listed below are incorporated by reference to the specified filing.

 

(1) Filed as Exhibit 4.1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-8 of Pacific Capital Bancorp (Registration No. 333-74831) filed March 18, 1999.

 

(2) Filed as an Exhibit to Annual Report on Form 10-K of Santa Barbara Bancorp (File No. 0-11113) for fiscal year ended December 31, 1995.

 

(3) Filed as an Exhibit to Annual Report on Form 10-K of Santa Barbara Bancorp (File No. 0-11113) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 1997.

 

(4) Filed as Exhibit 3.2 to the Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q of Pacific Capital Bancorp (File No. 0-11113) for the fiscal quarter ended June 30, 2000.

 

(5) Filed as Exhibit 3.4 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K of Pacific Capital Bancorp (File No. 0-01113) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2002.

 

(6) Filed as Exhibit 3.5 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K of Pacific Capital Bancorp (File No. 0-01113) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2002.

 

144